2011沉阳中考英语语法与词法完形与阅读超全

2011沉阳中考英语语法与词法完形与阅读超全

‎2011沈阳中考英语一轮复习 语法与词法、完形填空与阅读超全 第一篇 词法 2‎ 一、 名词 2‎ 二、 冠词 11‎ 三、 代词 17‎ 四、 形容词、副词 28‎ 五、 连 词 46‎ 六、 介 词 54‎ 七、 数 词 69‎ 八、 动 词 74‎ 第二篇 句法 97‎ 一、 主 要 句 式 97‎ 二、 定 语 从 句 110‎ 三、 常见习惯用语 115‎ 四、 完形填空与阅读 129‎ 附 录 144‎ 中学生英语学习常见错误一览表 144‎ A 144‎ B 152‎ C 158‎ D 164‎ E 168‎ F 171‎ G 176‎ H 178‎ I 183‎ J 185‎ Ｋ 186‎ L 187‎ Ｍ 192‎ Ｎ 196‎ Ｏ 199‎ Ｐ 201‎ Ｒ 204‎ Ｓ 207‎ Ｔ 212‎ Ｕ 215‎ Ｖ 217‎ Ｗ 218‎ Ｙ 221‎ 基本上不看短文内容仅看选项，2010年高考有人竟然过了100分！‎ 高考有没有瞬间大幅度提分的可能？‎ 谁能让你不用花很多时间和心思学习，英语就能提高至少20-30分？要是真的话，简直是白捡的分数！不仅如此，当你了解了高考真题答案的所有内幕规律，看到了绝密的解题招式，就会豁然开朗。哇！原来也可以这么做题！你的思路因此将会被彻底打通，提高的分数将不仅仅是20-30分！无论现在的英语成绩是60分，还是110分，任何人都可以做到！这些绝密招式是太简单、太震撼了！所以，如果你看到了，切勿告诉他人，否则，他们会在高考中轻松超过你！‎ 请注意 !‎ 如果你不相信这世上有考试秘诀，请立即将您的眼睛离开；‎ 如果你习惯于按照传统思路做题，不希望有思维上的突破，请你立即将您的眼睛离开；‎ 如果你现在的成绩已接近满分，甚至已是满分，请你立即将您的眼睛离开；‎ 如果你患有心理疾病或心脏病，请您立即将您的眼睛离开；‎ 如果你选择留下来，那么接下来的事，很可能让你目瞪口呆！‎ 如果我告诉你N个秘诀，在做完形填空和阅读理解题时，不用看文章和题干，只是简单的比较四个选项，就能瞬间选出正确答案，你是否想看？‎ 请先看下面的例子，它是辽宁卷2010年真题的第36题，是一个完形填空题. 在此我只列出它的四个选项,试试看，只是比较选项，你是否能够在3秒之内选出正确答案?‎ ‎36. A. worried B. sad C. surprised D. nervous 正确答案是C, ABD都是一个人状态不好的倾向词，而C则为中性词，表述态度不一致者是答案。.如果你知道了这个秘诀，可以解决很多类似的完型填空题!‎ 看一下辽宁卷2010年完形填空真题的第52题:‎ ‎52. A. Largely B. Generally C. Gradually D. Probably 正确答案是C, ABD都是含义不肯定的副词，排除表述不明确的选项,答案就水落石出了. 如果你知道了这个秘诀，你更是可以解决很多类似的完型填空题! 试想一下,知道了全部36个完形秘诀之后,您的分数会怎么样呢?‎ 请再看下面的例子，它是辽宁卷2010年真题阅读理解题的第56题，在此我只写出它的题干和四个选项.也试试看，只是比较选项，你是否能够在5秒之内选出正确答案?‎ ‎56. From Paragragh 1 we learn that the villagers .‎ ‎ A.worked very hard for centuries ‎ B.dreamed of having a better life ‎ ‎ C.were poor but somewhat content ‎ D.lived a different life from their forefathers 正确答案是C, 选项中表述的内容前后相互矛盾的是答案! 思路很简单，如果你掌握了其中的秘诀，抛开文章，你也可以很快选出正确答案. 掌握此类瞬间解题秘诀，不仅缩短了答题时间，还能保障近乎100%的准确率！请上www.sypeterwu.com或上百度,输入"沈阳英语家教吴军"查询!‎ 吴军英语高分密码，让您第一次课就提10分！20次课提25-62分！‎ 模棱两可处和看不懂，该怎么办？‎ 要知道，如果对文章似懂非懂，那么，在文章中寻找答案线索就像大海捞针一样的难,更谈不上做对题！吴军英语高分密码将会告诉你此类瞬间解题秘诀,帮助你辨识选项中的诸多暗示点，瞬间找出正确答案,或者瞬间排除错误选项.请记住!在英语完型填空和阅读理解题的选项中，从头到尾都充满了暗示点,善于利用这些暗示点，可以快速做对题!‎ ‎ 无论任何人，在考试中，总会遇到吃不准选项的题，或可以称之为不会做的“难题”,那么，如果遇到“难题”，你会怎办？是放弃？不可能，怎么着也要“猜”出一个答案!那么，是“瞎猜”吗？如果是“瞎猜”，其正确率仅是25%，是可想而知的低！那么，如何“猜”才能有高的准确率呢？如果我告诉你N个秘诀,让你在做“难题”时，猜出的答案的准确率由25%提高至95%，甚至是100%,你愿意继续看下去吗?‎ ‎35. A. eat up B. deal with C. throw away D. send out ‎35题在B和C模棱两可处到底选哪个? 当然选范围大的,能包括另一个的,即选B.‎ 再举个例子，假如2010年辽宁卷高考英语完形填空的47题,不知选哪个, 怎么办？‎ As I found out, there is, 46 , often no perfect equivalence(对应)between two 47 in two languages. My aunt even goes so far as to 48 that a Chinese “equivalent” can never give you the 49 meaning of a word in English!‎ ‎47. A. words B. names C. ideas D. characters 很简单，选A，勿须有任何的犹豫,为什么？复现法则!‎ 吴军英语高分密码会告诉你具体原因以及更多的解决“难题”的秘诀,都是非常的简单和直接.请记住!遇到“难题”，即使“猜”答案，也要“猜”的有理有据,切勿盲目的“猜”!‎ ‎  The moment he was about to 47 the hospital, he saw on the desk the 48 new book ,just as he had left it one 49 ago.‎ ‎  48. A much B still C hardly D quite 很简单，选B，为什么？答案高频词汇倾向归纳让你笑逐颜开!‎ 高频形容词 副词: suddenly, even, finally, first, last, again, also, however, though, although, yet, instead, even though, but, still等.‎ 吴军英语高分密码真的有这么神奇吗？是！一点儿没错！效果是绝对的真实！作为一种标准化考试，选择题本身是有很多缺陷的,这些缺陷就是暗示点，就是解题的突破口!吴军英语高分密码通过对历年真题的长时间的研究，对这些暗示点进行了全面、深入、细致的挖掘和整理,将其转化为超级解题秘诀!‎ 每一个秘诀的准确率都在95%以上，甚至是100% 吴军英语高分密码,真正做到了立竿见影！甚至是一剑封喉！单选280个考点,42个诀窍; 阅读16大满分攻略; 完形36绝招; 七选五6大原则; 改错36个规律;作文4大模板6-8页;不想考上一本、二本都很难!马上用吴军英语高分密码对照历年所有的高考真题进行逐一的验证吧! 遇到吴军老师，您太幸运了！请上www.sypeterwu.com或上百度,输入"沈阳高分英语家教"查询!‎ 全套中高考ABC三套教学系统教案加盟合作，3.8-5万人民币,多种合作方式，欢迎咨询！ ‎ ‎2011高考英语冲刺阅读/完形及知识考点清单全套自学家教式学案5000元/套，2011年5月12日前6折优惠，即3000元/套！‎ ‎《吴军高分英语核心教案》是国内最顶尖的名师吴军等集体为考生开发的绝密提分课程，内容紧贴高考实战，帮助学生千方百计从试卷中“挤分”、从难题上“割肉”。从2010年数千 考生的实战应用来看，它至少能让考生的总成绩提高30%。直接锁定高考的设题思路和发展轨迹，瞄准高考试题考查的重点、难点、疑点、易错点。名师从多角度、全方位看变化、循趋势、找差别、识共性、觅原形、导规律来透析高考。让学生吃透必考点，找准大热点，准确把握高考命题命题范围，明确高考考查的标准及方向，快速掌握解题方法及技巧从而在高考中大显身手。‎ 吴军对高考闯关的自信、对命题趋势、考试热点的把握的准确令人惊讶：每人1.5个小时的授课背后，是他们十几天、几十天的精心准备，更是十几年奋战在高考第一线积累的经验精华。这样的资料很有可能会彻底改变孩子的高考结果。有时，经过他们1-3个小时的指点，高考成绩都能提升20-30分，令人惊叹！‎ 技巧是科学分析，是实战总结，是统计规律，也是对人性的剖析。如果说命题是艺术，那么解题就是技术；如果说命题是设计陷阱，那么技巧就是识破陷阱。名师们通过大量研究，从命题者的角度剖析试题，辅之多年的经验总结，精讲“压箱底”的宝题，手把手帮助考生透析原理，总结错误，掌握最有杀伤力的应试技巧。‎ 吴军高分英语核心教案在网上从来就没有电子版,除了沈阳总部外,只有哈尔滨,河南新乡和湖南长沙几位全程合作者才拥有! 在网上免费发布的教案根本不是吴军的核心授课教案,是免费公益版的;另外淘宝网上卖的也是假的,是武汉某某在沈阳高分英语家教网站上或百度文库,英语周报英语教师网及新浪爱问共享资料上免费下载的,是可以免费得到的,然而他却卖你3000元,但其并非吴军核心授课教案!声明:没有与沈阳吴军本人联络,且未将款项打入吴军个人银行帐号的交易与吴军无任何关系,其后果自负!已经上当的家长,请看一下你得到的是类似如下吴军高分教案吗? 不要图便宜,还是与吴军本人亲自交易吧!‎ 沈阳有一位曾经到吴军高分英语家教应聘的杨老师,未合作后公开抄袭广告文案的,模仿秀做的相当棒! 抄袭并不可怕,可怕的是某些图便宜(教案有天壤之别!)的家长误入歧途后的授课后果! 其实辨别方法很简单:一要看你教的学生是不是真实的? 广告中提分的学员是否留有学校,班级和学生真实姓名及提分幅度?这样一来,知道了班级和姓名就很容易核实了,不符则可称为诈骗,可追究法律责任! 不敢留学生真实姓名,只是写上张某某(或从别处粘贴了外地高考状元的照片)并随意说提了50分是不可信的,目的也是可想而知!吴军英语的广告中声称的提分效果,都写明了学校班级和学生姓名及提分幅度,是可信的,也是敢于让公众监督的! 再次,可以在相关网站上查找发布的日期, 发现是在吴军老师之后发布的均为抄袭!‎ ‎ 最后,可以看他有没有系统教学教案,因为单位时间内,仅告诉你的几十条秘诀是不好使的,需要所有题都通用,所以事先的精密准备是必不可少的,没有教学系统教案还在那儿叫嚣什么技术是可笑的!在吴军老师那里,学生只要拿一只笔和自带验证试题就可以了.‎ 前期某成人探子陈某来时只学10课,却总想要更多的教案,我们发现不对,第2次课时便随便拿了我们的公益免费教案给他上了课,最后一课时他露出了捣乱的嘴脸,试问这位以为得到我方核心教案的你,真正得到的是什么?你学到下面的教案了吗? 哈哈! 以眼还眼,以牙还牙而已!‎ 还有极其个别的同行,变态嫉妒的心理是不可取的.猫有猫道,蛇有蛇道,不是没道,各行其道! 万物均有规律可寻!只是你肯不肯付出辛苦,你在享受的时候,我却在点灯熬油,清晨2、3点钟甚至5、6点钟才休息,有时一天才睡2-3个小时.你能做到吗? 能的话,1-2年,您肯定会成为另一个”我”. 您也应该知道,我不可能在网上发布自己的教学资料,有的,都是本人收集并整理的,是免费提供给大家的,包括您! 但您没有权力出卖它或将其商业化,您个人教学使用并声明出处是双方都没有异议的,这样不好吗?既然网上的资料不是本人的真实教案,您就不要妄加评论了,若很想知道,可以象其他学生一样来上一课,不就知道为什么我这么火了?另外声明:本人没有在学校做过老师,就不要说本人被学校开除了,本人原来就不是在校老师,是9年前改的行,哈哈!‎ ‎3年寒窗苦读不如只学3天!‎ ‎2011中高考英语, 火箭式提分有秘方!‎ 高考、中考英语高分的秘诀：不注意的细节和模棱两可处的处理和词汇辨析能力(需有专业老师帮你汇总,自己仅背3600词对考高分用处不大)是关键. 全新的单选技巧，将避开语法的干扰，平均轻松提高5分！彻底解决完型“一错错一串”和“发挥不稳定”两大难题。平均提高6分！不读文章直接做题，准确率70%以上；只读一遍，准确率达到90%！解决同学们“做题慢、浪费时间”和“准确率低”等困难。平均提高8分！核心教案65%出自吴老师（男,英文名Peter）9年教学经验，35%参考了育才、实验、2中、新东方、飞跃、哈师大附中、大连8中等系统教案或试题，并配套全国历届中、高考真题和育才、实验、2中等名校的各类试题，更全面、更概括、更系统。一处学习，以一顶十！在他这里，一天提高几十分的弟子，竟然比比皆是！而且几乎他是辽宁省仅有的能做到“当堂上课，当堂提分”的非在职家教专家哦！一名学生感触颇深：吴军老师水平就是不一样，做几千道几万道题，都不如吴军老师一句话来得直接！成绩马上看的见,讲完后,马上拿高考真题或模拟题验证!也欢迎自己带题进一步验证!3年寒窗苦读不如只学3天! 很多让学校老师，品牌家教机构和家长都束手无策的英语“落后分子”，经过吴军老师的指点，竟然95%以上的人 都能取得中考110分以上、高考110-130分的好成绩，让人不得不感叹吴军老师《英语高分密码》系统教案有着神奇的效果！“学什么、怎么学”，“考什么、怎么考”是核心主题！‎ 在他这里，孩子将捕捉到必考点的主、次主体特征，实现考点定向；通过考点全诊断，找出考生考点漏洞，实现对考生定向；最终达到考点和考生双向定向，即备考有针对性。利用独创的解密系统，对思维和记忆规律进行解码；结合辽宁省内一线特级教师多年经验形成的教案库，信息化归纳高考命题规律，对高考考点和命题规律进行解密；让考生解密高考，实现知识和思维双向解密，达到科学备考。通过10-20次课及三步骤四部分系统训练，能够快速让学生“抓考点记考点”，并形成良好的记忆习惯，用最短的时间记最多的考点，迅速提分。四部分有机结合，环环相扣，形成一整套提分系统，做到真正定向解密备考。吴军高端一对一英语家教为每位VIP学员提供量身打造的个性化提分方案，一本、二本不再是梦！‎ ‎2011年高考全托文化课培训 现在高二的你，是否也感觉到了高考的压力。但是因为种种原因（学校，同学，老师等人际关系；学艺术，学体育等等），你的成绩总是摇摇欲坠，令人担忧。我们为有各种问题而不能很好地继续在学校完成高三学习的同学提供另外一种学习环境。我们根据你的特点，制定学习计划。我们拥有轻松的学习氛围，我们提供一对一的VIP教学辅导；我们用更融洽的方式沟通，为高考打下坚实基础。学习形式：(全日托管)，招生对象：1：艺术；2：体育生；3：在学校学习毫无效率的同学；4：因各种原因离开学校而想参加考高的同学。学生全天在我部上课，根据孩子情况，制定学习计划。一对以辅导教学。欢迎家长咨询！‎ ‎ “当时学习，当时提分”的超实战家教！‎ 抚顺2中的徐金良同学,来时成绩是71分左右, 2009年高考成绩为117分;沈阳4中的刘洪鹏同学 来时成绩是46分, 2009年高考成绩为100分; 黑山1中的高三刘璐同学来时成绩是50-70分, 2010年高考成绩为113分！……………………….‎ 孩子从小学开始，学习英语已经多年，孩子天天背单词、做习题、记笔记，做过的卷子岂止几百套，上千套，那么孩子的英语成绩一直在稳步提高吗？还是一直没有提高，甚至越学越落后、越学越迷茫？如果孩子的英语成绩一直提高不了，如果孩子一直抓不住重点、找不到感觉，就来找 “神奇”的吴军老师吧！在这里孩子马上就会体验到英语学习成绩“突飞猛进”的快乐！在这里一天提高几十分的孩子比比皆是！‎ 鲁美附中、沈音附中7人全部考取国本！‎ 热烈庆祝吴军一对一家教学员---2010届鲁美附中1班王巨龙、冯潇潇，沈音附中李同学（女，不愿公开全名）及沈阳2中补习班姜雯悦等7人考取鲁美和沈阳音乐学院！为什么一个英语烂到家的学生，在不到2-3个月内成绩突飞猛进？为什么英语基础几乎为零的学生经过他辅导10到20 次课，成绩就能迅速提升30-70多分？走捷径考高分的窍门是什么？沈阳高端英语快速提分名师吴军老师将为您咨询谜底。艺术类国本，英语小分很关键！9年的高分经验能成就了他们，同样也可以成就暂时停止成功的你！‎ 只学习5-10次课，英语成绩就提高了30多分！‎ ‎　　能接触到吴军老师《英语高分密码》的人太幸运了！如何把握中心，猜测题意，一听就会！融会贯通，举一反三！沈阳83中高二的金柏岑同学来时成绩是82分, 2010年学习5次课后的期末成绩为108分; 现就读于沈阳4中高二文科班的胡兢元同学来时成绩是91分, 13次课后的期末成绩为125分; 现就读于皇姑区沈阳10中高一的高雅慧同学来时成绩是90分左右, 2010年高一下学期期中考试的成绩为127分;现就读于沈阳东北育才高中本部高二的戴冠宇同学来时成绩是107分,学习后的成绩稳定在125－140分之间，最好成绩是由倒数到班里前6名。‎ ‎2010年沈阳中考距离满分竟然只差了7分!‎ ‎2010届杏坛中学初三6班的周千会同学（女）， 2010年沈阳市铁西区一模才120分左右，其中一大半还是‘懵’来的。跟吴军老师学习3-4次后，自己很快找到了英语学习的感觉，好像一下子容易了很多，二模考了135分。10次课后，中考距离满分竟然只差了七分，考了143分。她说没想到她的最高纪录竟然创造在2010年沈阳中考中！‎ ‎2010中考冲刺,没想到效果居然这么好!‎ ‎2010届43中学初三13班的李圣同学（男），初三后成绩与其他同学突然拉大，成绩一直在80分左右，很少达到及格线90分，对自己没有信心，对英语家教更是排斥。跟吴军老师学习20次后，虽与好学生还有5-7分的差距，但又找到了初一前十名时的感觉。2010年沈阳中考虽然发挥不算理想（非选择手写部分基础不好），也达到了129分！‎ 英语一对一家教授课内容 单项选择 13条经典实战技巧,助你避开语法的干扰轻松得高分;‎ 完型填空 11个重要特点,10种判断技巧,彻底解决一错错一串、发挥不稳定两大难题;‎ 阅读理解 9大要点,9种提高方法轻松解决 做题慢准确率低等难题;‎ 短文改错 6大应试策略,6大提高方法让你拿分如探囊取物;‎ 书面表达 “黄金写作模型”,精辟独到的讲解,‎ 写出让阅卷老师无可挑剔的高分作文!‎ 上百度,输入"沈阳高分英语家教"查询!‎ 第一篇 词法 一、 名词 ‎(一) 知识概要 ‎ ‎ 名词的概念在不同的语法教课书中有不同的解释和分类方法，但就实际应用来讲还是不要过分地追求其理论概念，而更多的要把注意力放在其应用上来。我们不妨把它分为两大类：专有名词与普通名词。顾名思义，专有名词是指：个人、事物、机关等所专有的名称，如，the Great Wall， America…它们是不能随意变动的。而普通名词中则包括个体名词，如pen, worker…它表示单一的个体人或事物；集体名词，如：family,class， team,它表示的是由若干个个体组成的集合体；物质名词，如：water,paper…它表示的是一种物质，原材料；而后一种是抽象名词，如:work, time…它表示着一种在实际生活中看不见、摸不到，但却与实际生活紧密相关的某些动作、状态、品质的抽象概念。见下表。‎ ‎ 名词一览表 种类 ‎ 专有名词 ‎ ‎ London, John, the Communist Party of China ‎ 普 通 名 词 类名词 nurse, boy, worker, pencil, dog, table ‎ 集体名词 class, family, army, police, team, people ‎ 物质名词 water, steel, glass, cotton, wood, sand ‎ 抽象名词 happiness, love, work, life, courage, honest ‎ 功用 ‎ 主语 My family is now in New York. ‎ 表语 His father is a scientist. ‎ 宾语 We love our great motherland. ‎ 宾语补足语 He made London the base for his work. ‎ 定语 The girls are making paper flowesrs. ‎ 状语 The car cost him 1000 dollars. ‎ 同位语 Mr Brown, a famous scientist, will come here. ‎ 名词在使用中的难点在于名词的数，即可数名词与不可数名词的实际应用。不可数名词不能用数字计算，所以它通常只有单数形式。它包含有专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词等，如：English,air,water,cotton,work…可数名词是可以用数量加以计算的名词，所以它具有单数形式和复数形式两种。可数名词复数形式的构成规律是：‎ ‎1. 一般情况加s,如：pen—pens, doctor—doctors,boy—boys,其读音规则是在清辅音后读［s］，在元音和浊辅音后读［z］。如:map—map ， boy—boys.‎ ‎2. 在以s,sh,ch,x结尾的名词后面加es，如：bus—buses,class—‎ classes,其读音为［iz］。‎ ‎3. 以ce,se,ze,(d)ge结尾的名词加s，其读音为［iz］。‎ ‎4. 以辅音字母加y结尾的名词，要将y变为i再加es，读作［z］，如：factory—factories,country—countries, family—families.但要注意的是以元音字母加y结尾的名词的复数形式只加s，如:boy—boys,day—days。‎ ‎5. 以o结尾的名词的复数形式一般要加es，但如果o前面是元音字母或外来词，缩写词以o结尾的则只加s，如：tomato—tomatoes,hero—heroes;photo—photos,radio—radios,piano—pianos ‎6. 以f或fe结尾的名词的复数形式要将f或fe变为v再加es，如：knife—knives, leaf—leaves, 但有些例外的词如roof的复数形式是roofs。‎ ‎7. 不规则名词的复数形式是要单个记忆的，它没有规律可循，如:man—men,woman—women, child—children, foot—feet,tooth—teeth, mouse—mice ‎8. 单复同形的名词有：fish, sheep,deer…‎ ‎9. 单数形式但其意为复数的名词有:people,police等。名词还有格的变化，其主格可作主语，宾格可作宾语。还有所有格，用来表示人或物的所有，以及领属关系。表示有生命的名词的所有格其单数形式是加's其复数形式是s'，如其结尾不是s的复数形式仍加's，如：a student's room, students' rooms, Children's Day.在表示时间、距离、世界、国家……名词的所有格要用's，如：a twenty minutes' walk.但无生命名词的所有格则必须用of结构，如：the capital of our country, the colour of the flowers ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］Please give me a paper.‎ ‎［正］Please give me a piece of paper.‎ ‎［析］不要认为可以数的名词就是可数名词，这种原因是对英语中可数与不可数名词的概念与中文中的能数与不能数相混淆了，所以造成了这样的错误，因paper在英语中是属于物质名词一类，是不可数名词。而不可数名词要表达数量时，要用与之相关的量词来表达，如：two pieces of paper.‎ ‎［误］Please give me two letter papers.‎ ‎［正］Please give me two pieces of letter paper.‎ ‎［析］paper作为纸讲是不可数名词，而作为报纸、考卷、文章讲时则是可数名词，如：Each student should write a paper on what he has learnt.‎ ‎［误］My glasses is broken.‎ ‎［正］My glasses are broken.‎ ‎［误］I want to buy two shoes.‎ ‎［正］I want to buy two pairs of shoes.‎ ‎［析］英语中glasses—眼镜，shoes—鞋，trousers—裤子等由两部分组成的名词一般要用复数形式。如果要表示一副眼镜应用a pair of glasses而这时的谓语动词应与量词相一致。如：This pair of glasses is very good.‎ ‎［误］May I borrow two radioes?‎ ‎［正］May I borrow two radios?‎ ‎［析］以o结尾的名词大都是用加es来表示其复数形式，但如果o前面是一个元音字母或外来语时则只加s就可以了。这样的词有zoo—zoos,piano—pianos.‎ ‎［误］This is a Mary's dictionary.‎ ‎［正］This is Mary's dictionary.‎ ‎［析］如名词前有指示代词this, that, these those,及其他修饰词our,some, every, which, 或所有格时，则不要再加冠词。‎ ‎［误］There are much people in the garden.‎ ‎［正］There are many people in the garden.‎ ‎［析］可数名词前应用many, few, a few, a lot of 来修饰，而people是可数名词，而且是复数名词，如：The people are planting trees here ‎［误］I want a few water.‎ ‎［正］I want a little water.‎ ‎［析］不可数名词前可以用a little, little, a lot of, some来修饰，但不可用many,few来修饰。‎ ‎［误］Thank you very much. Your family is very kind to me.‎ ‎［正］Thank you very much. Your family are very kind to me ‎［误］Tom's and Mary's family are waiting for us.‎ ‎［正］Tom's and Mary's families are waiting for us.‎ ‎［误］I'm sorry. I have to go. Tom's families are waiting for me.‎ ‎［正］I'm sorry. I have to go. Tom's family are waiting for me.‎ ‎［析］集合名词如果指某个集合的整体，则应视为单数，如指某个集合体中的个体则应视为复数。如:My family is a big family. When I came in, Tom's family were watching TV. 即汤姆一家人正在看电视。这样的集合名词有：family class, team等。‎ ‎［误］Don't eat too much meats.‎ ‎［正］Don't eat too much meat.‎ ‎［误］Food in that restaurant is very good.‎ ‎［正］The food in that restaurant is very good.‎ ‎［析］物质名词是不可数名词，在使用中不可以加s，即它没有复数形式。也不可加不定冠词。但如果用于特指某一物质时可以加定冠词。如：I don't like drinking coffee, but the coffee in that cup is really good.‎ ‎［误］Please give me two waters.‎ ‎［正］Please give me two glasses of water.‎ ‎［正］Please give me two coffees ‎［析］物质名词如要加计量时，一定要加量词如：two cups of tea,two glasses of water,a glass of milk,a loaf of bread,‎ ‎ a piece of bread,a box of sugar,‎ a bowl of rice,a bottle of orange,‎ a bag of earth 例： I'll tell you a piece of good news.‎ 但只有coffee可以用coffees来取代many cups of coffee.‎ ‎［误］Can you give me the newspaper of today?‎ ‎［正］Can you give me today's newspaper?‎ ‎［析］加's构成所有格的名词一般应指有生命的人或物。如：Mary's hair，但在英文的习惯用法中对时间、距离等名词的所有格多用's来构成而不用of结构 如：a five minutes' walk.‎ ‎［误］Please make a room for the lady in the school bus.‎ ‎［正］Please make room for the lady in the school bus.‎ ‎［析］英语中更多的名词是含有多种用法和多种含意的，‎ 如： room为可数名词时为“房间”，如：I live in Room 5.而room为抽象名词时为空间上面一句话应译为“请给老妇人在校车上留个地方。”这样的词还有：glass 玻璃glasses 眼镜stone 石头a stone 一块石头time 时间two times 两次wood 木头woods 树林 ‎［误］There is a flowers garden behind my house.‎ ‎［正］There is a flower garden behind my house.‎ ‎［析］名词除了在句中作主语、宾语、表语外，还可以用来修饰另一个名词，这时作修饰词的名词一般要用单数形式，如：shoe factory (鞋厂),post office(邮局),evening paper (晚报),night school (夜校),head master (校长),a law school (法律学院)。但也有例外，如:a goods train(货车),sports meeting (运动会)。‎ ‎［误］My mother bought two fishes for supper this morning.‎ ‎［正］My mother bought two fish for supper this morning.‎ ‎［析］英语中有些名词单复同形，如：fish, deer, sheep, Chinese (中国人), means (方法)。所以应讲one fish, two fish, one Chinese, two Chinese. 如果讲There are five fishes in the pool.应译为池中有五种鱼而不是五条鱼。‎ ‎［误］Mary expressed her thank to her boy friend.‎ ‎［正］Mary expressed her thanks to her boy friend.‎ ‎［析］英语中有些名词只有复数形式，如： thanks, greens， 而有些词单数形式与复数形式有不同的词意。如:clothes 为衣服，而cloth则是布， sand沙子，而sands是沙滩。‎ ‎［误］I offered my son my congratulation on his success.‎ ‎［正］I offered my son my congratulations on his success.‎ ‎［析］英语中表示祝贺的词虽有单数形式，但一般要用其复数形式。如握手为shake hands.‎ ‎［误］We have five German in this meeting.‎ ‎［正］We have five Germans in this meeting.‎ ‎［析］英国人Englishman的复数形式为Englishmen，而German 则要加s，因为它不是由国名与man的组合词。‎ ‎［误］There are two As in this word.‎ ‎［正］There are two A's in this word.‎ ‎［析］在大写字母缩写形式的复数表达法中应加s，但如字母是A、I时，为了防止与As和Is相混，则要用's即A's，I's ‎［误］There are three 6s and two 3s in my telephone number.‎ ‎［正］There are three 6's and two 3's in my telephone number.‎ ‎［析］在小写字母与数字的复数形式表达法中要用's ‎［误］We have many woman teachers in our school.‎ ‎［正］We have many women teachers in our school.‎ ‎［析］一般组合名词变为复数形式时只将词中心词变为复数如： half brother—half brothers(同父异母或同母异父的兄弟)daughter in law—daughtersin law,(儿媳)但要注意的是：man driver—men drivers(男司机) woman doctor—women doctors(女大夫)grown up—grown ups(成年人) 但是boy student—则变为boy students ‎［误］Physics are very difficult to learn.‎ ‎［正］Physics is very difficult to learn.‎ ‎［析］虽以s结尾但只能用作单数名词有：科学，学科名字：Physics. Mathematics politics游戏名称：bowls 专有名称：Niagara Falls(尼亚加拉瀑布) 其他名词：news(消息，新闻)‎ ‎［误］There is a people in the room.‎ ‎［正］There is a person in the room.‎ ‎［正］There is a man in the room.‎ ‎［析］people是复数名词，不可用作单数，如要用来讲一个人时应用a person, a man, a woman。同样的词有police.要讲一个警察时则要用a policeman, a policewoman。‎ ‎［误］Where is my shoe?‎ ‎［正］Where are my shoes?‎ ‎［析］常常只用作复数形式的词有trousers, pants, shorts(短裤)，socks(袜子),shoes, gloves(手套)。但如果只找其中的一个则要指明，这时还是应用单数形式。如：Where's my left glove?(我左手的手套在哪?)‎ ‎［误］I paid five pennies for the sweet.‎ ‎［正］I paid five pence for the sweet.‎ ‎［析］英语中便士有两个复数形式pence用来表达一定数量的钱。而pennies是指一个个的硬币，如：I want to change this note for pennies.我想把这纸币换成硬币。(即一便士一个的硬币)。‎ ‎［误］There are many fruit in the shop.‎ ‎［正］There are many fruits in the shop.‎ ‎［析］物质名词为不可数名词，但是用来表示种类时则可以用作可数名词，这里应译为各种各样的水果。 ‎［误］There is a new car. It is Jone's and Mary's.‎ ‎［正］There is a new car. It is Jone and Mary's.‎ ‎［析］有生命名词的所有格，如果是单数名词则加's如：Mary's car.如果是以s结尾的复数名词则只在s后面加’如：teachers' offices.如果是复数名词但不是以s结尾，则只加’s，如：children's palace 组合名词的所有格是在最后一个词尾加's如：girl friend —girl friend's someone else—someone else's a week or three—a week or three's如名词后有同位语时，则应加在同位语的词尾上，如：It is my girl friend, Mary's car.要注意的是当两个名词并列时，如表示归两人共同所有，则在最后一个名词后面加's，如果表示分别所有则在两个名词后分别加's，如：This is Mary and Jone's home.即Mary与Jone是一家人。这是他们共同的家。而These are Mary's and Jone's homes.则应译为这里是Mary的家与Jone 的家。‎ ‎［误］It is really beautiful. It is a work of nature.‎ ‎［正］It is really beautiful. It is a Nature's work.‎ ‎［析］无生命名词的所有格应用of结构。但是's形式的所有格可用于以下无生命的名词：表示时间的词：today's newspaper, a twenty minutes' walk, an hour's, rest 表示长度的词：three metres' distance, a boat's length， twenty miles' journey 表示重量的名词：two pounds' weight价格名词：two dollars'worth拟人化的名词：Nature's work, nature's lesson(大自然的教训)及国家、机关、团体、城市等机构性名词：the university's library ‎［误］He is an old friend of my father.‎ ‎［正］He is an old friend of my father's.‎ ‎［析］这是英语中的一种习惯用法而不要根据语法去推理。如：This pen is Tom's.‎ ‎［误］My father is a good cooker.‎ ‎［正］My father is a good cook.‎ ‎［析］一般动词加上er后则转意为执行该动作的执行者，如:teach(教)—teacher(老师),think(想)—thinker(思想家),drive(开车)—driver(司机),sell(卖)—seller(卖物者)……但不能总是以此类推，比如cook是动词“做饭”。而cook也可作为名词“厨师”讲，而cooker则为厨具，餐具，即锅、碗、勺等做饭用具。‎ ‎［误］The young is dancing there.‎ ‎［正］The young are dancing there.‎ ‎［析］英文中用定冠词加上形容词表示一类人时应按复数名词，如：the rich 富人，the poor(穷人),the wise 聪明人，但如果用定冠词加形容词来表示事物则要用作单数名词，如：The beautiful is still here.美丽的风景依旧。‎ ‎［误］The stories of the book was written many years ago.‎ ‎［正］The stories of the book were written many years ago.‎ ‎［析］这句话的真正主语应是stories，所以应用复数谓语动词。‎ ‎［误］This is one of the EnglishChinese dictionary.‎ ‎［正］This is one of the EnglishChinese dictionaries.‎ ‎［析］one of意为“……之一”，of后面的名词要用复数形式。‎ ‎［误］Let's go to uncle Wang for supper.‎ ‎［正］Let's go to uncle Wang's for supper.‎ ‎［析］uncle Wang's 意为“王叔叔家”，doctor's意为“医院或私人诊所”。‎ ‎［误］I think we will make a friend with each other.‎ ‎［正］I think we will make friends with each other.‎ ‎［析］make friends 为习惯用法，即交朋友。‎ ‎［误］I want to tell you much pieces of good news.‎ ‎［正］I want to tell you many pieces of good news.‎ ‎［析］news为不可数名词，但加了量词之后则要用many来修饰量词，因量词是可数名词，或可以说I want to tell you some good news.因some 即可用在可数名词前，也可用在不可数名词前作形容词，如：I want to tell you some pieces of good news.‎ ‎［误］The teacher with five students are coming here.‎ ‎［正］The teacher with five students is coming here.‎ ‎［析］要注意由with引出的介词短语不是本句的主语，这与连词and有很大的区别，如：The teacher and five students are coming here. 这里由介词引出的短语仅仅是teacher的修饰语。‎ ‎［误］There are a lot of information here, but we don't need them.‎ ‎［正］There is a lot of information here, but we don't need it.‎ ‎［析］information为不可数名词，而用作代替它的词要用it而不能用them.‎ ‎［误］Many a student make the same mistake in the exam.‎ ‎［正］Many a student makes the same mistake in the exam.‎ ‎［析］many a 加可数名词单数，作主语时其谓语动词应用单数形式，但其意为许多学生。‎ ‎［误］The children wear very good cloth to go to school today.‎ ‎［正］The children wear very good clothes to go to school today.‎ ‎［析］英文中cloth,clothes,clothing是易混之词：cloth是物质名词，意为“布”，没有复数形式，而clothing是指衣物的总称，也没有复数形式。clothes是指衣服，但没有单数形式，如：This clothing is needed in warm countries. Her clothes are made of fine cloth.英文中的dress则指较正规的服装，如：a school dress 校服，an evening dress晚礼服。‎ ‎［误］I like to study the English.‎ ‎［正］I like to study English.‎ ‎［析］作为一种学科名词前不要用冠词，而作为某一特指学科则要加冠词，如：I like to study history. I like to study the history of America.‎ ‎［误］The Browns is going to visit China.‎ ‎［正］The Browns are going to visit China.‎ ‎［析］定冠词加姓加s，则意为“Brown先生一家人”。所以应用复数谓语动词。此句应译为：Brown先生一家将要访问中国。‎ ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1. Lucy and Lily＿＿＿in the same class.‎ A. am B. is C. are D. be ‎ ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］由and连接两个单数名词作主语时应按复数名词来搭配谓语动词。 ‎ ‎2. Which is the ＿＿＿to the bus stop， please?‎ A road B way C street D address ‎ ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］这是考察同意词辨析，road是指较宽阔的大道，意为“乡间公路”，而street意为道路两边的建筑物较高，可视为街道之意，而way则多为要到达某地所要经过的途径，还可引深为方式、方法。而address则为“地址”。如：There is a car running along the country road. I live at 105 Park street. Can you show me the way to the National Museum? ‎ ‎3. Hurry up!There is＿＿＿ time left.‎ A little B a little C few D a few ‎ ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］因time作为时间讲为不可数名词，所以不可用few，a few来修饰。另外，英文的表达法与中文不同，中文讲，快点，时间不多了，而英文要讲，快点，没时间了。因此，要用little而不用a little. ‎ ‎4. How many ＿＿＿can you see in the picture?‎ A tomatos B tomatoes C tomato D the tomato ‎ ［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］用How many提问时，其名词要用复数形式，而tomato的复数要加es.‎ ‎ 5. —　＿＿＿is the meat. Please?‎ ‎—　Ten yuan a kilo.‎ A How much B How many C How old D How long ‎ ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］由对话的答语可看出其问句问的是价格。钱数作为整体、价格讲时，不论其值是多少都是不可数名词，要用how much 提问。‎ ‎ 6 The boy's name is James Allen Green. So his given name is＿＿＿.‎ A James Allen B Allen Green C James Green D Mr. Green ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］英文的习惯与中文不同，中文是姓在前名字在后，而英文则是姓在最后，其第一个名字是由父母所起的，中间的名字可能是父母、教父所起的，但都可称作given name,而姓在英文中是family name.‎ ‎ 7 Shanghai is one of the biggest＿＿＿in our country.‎ A city B city's C citys D cities ［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］复音字母以y结尾的单词的复数形式要把y变成i再加es。one of 加名词的结构中的名词应用复数。‎ ‎ 8 Would you please pass me＿＿＿?‎ A two paper 　　　B two papers C two pieces of paper D two pieces of papers ［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］paper是不可数名词，如讲一张、两张纸时，要用量词piece.‎ ‎ 9 September 10th is ＿＿＿Day.‎ A Teacher B Teachers C Teacher's D Teachers'‎ ［答案］D.‎ ‎10 I only have＿＿＿ bread for lunch today.‎ A a bit B a bit of C little D few ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎11 “What would you like, Ann? ”“I'd like two＿＿＿.”‎ A glass of milk B glasses of milk C glass of milks D glasses of milks ［答案］B.‎ ‎12 There isn't ＿＿＿ paper in the box. Will you go and get ＿＿＿ for me?‎ A any, some B any, any C some, some D some, any ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］any用于否定句与疑问句，但如果要表达说话者真心实意希望得到肯定答复时，问句中要用some而不要按一般语法规律用any. ‎ ‎13 June 1st is＿＿＿.‎ A Children's day B children's Day C Children's Day D children's day ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎14 These foreign friends are＿＿＿.‎ A German B Germen C Germany D Germans ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎15 All the students are busy, so＿＿＿ of them will go to the cinema.‎ A many B little C a few D few ［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］student是可数名词，而few用于可数名词，意为：几乎没有学生去电影院。‎ ‎ 16 There are three＿＿＿and seven＿＿＿in the picture.‎ A deers, sheeps B deers, sheep C deer, sheep Ddeer, sheeps ［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］deer与sheep均是单复同形的名词。‎ 17 Whose room is this? It's＿＿＿.‎ A my B Kike's and John's C our D Kike and John's ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］因为room为单数，所以不可能是Kike的一间与John的一间，应为二者共用的一间房子。‎ 二、 冠词 ‎(一) 知识概要 冠词在英语中只有3个词，分为两类：不定冠词a与an，定冠词the。 a用在以辅音开始的单数名词前，an用于以元音开始的单词前。不定冠词用来表示一类事物中泛指的某一事物，而定冠词则用于特指的某一个或某些事物，可用于不可数名词、可数名词单数及可数名词复数前。‎ ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］This building is an university.‎ ‎［正］This building is a university.‎ ‎［析］a用于以辅音音素开始的单词前，而an用于以元音音素开始的单词前，而不是元音字母开头的单词前。university的第一个音素是［j］，所以用a而不要用an。又如：There is a “n” in the word.是错句，应为：There is an “n”in the word.因字母n的发音的第一个音素是元音。要注意的还有hour因其第一个字母h不发音，所以应该用an hour。例如：‎ I need an hour to finish the work.‎ It is a useful dictionary.‎ It is a European country.‎ I bought a used car.‎ ‎［误］I need a umbrella because it looks like raining.‎ ‎［正］I need an umbrella because it looks like raining.‎ ‎［析］因umbrella的第一个音素是元音，所以应用an.常用的情况有：an old man, an English teacher, an elephant, an idea, an hour ago, an honest boy…。‎ ‎［误］“Can you help me” “Sorry, I'm in hurry.”‎ ‎［正］“Can you help me” “Sorry. I'm in a hurry.”‎ ‎［析］不定冠词的主要用法如下： ‎1. 用来表示一类人或事物，如：She is a teacher.‎ ‎2. 指某一类人或事物中的一个，如：An elephant is bigger than a horse.‎ ‎3. 泛指某一人或事物，如：A man is waiting for you at the school gate.‎ ‎4. 相当于“one”的概念，如：I just bought a new dictionary.‎ ‎5. 其主要的难点是用在固定词组中：‎ 如：have a walk/a rest /a look 又如：in a hurry 匆匆忙忙 make a face 作鬼脸 do somebody a favour 帮某人忙 a number of =many 又如：have a good time (玩得好)‎ have a cold (感冒)‎ have a headache (头痛)‎ have a break=have a rest ‎［误］I bought the dictionary yesterday. A dictionary is very good.‎ ‎［正］I bought a dictionary yesterday. The dictionary is very good.‎ ‎［析］在文章中第一次提到某物时用不定冠词，而第二次提到时用定冠词。 ‎［误］Please turn off lights before you leave.‎ ‎［正］Please turn off the lights before you leave.‎ ‎［析］虽然是第一次提到某物但说话双方均知其所指，也应用定冠词。 ‎［误］There are nine planets around a sun.‎ ‎［正］There are nine planets around the sun.‎ ‎［析］世上独一无二的天体等名词前应加定冠词，如：the earth, the moon, the sun, the sky, the sea.‎ ‎［误］I live on a second floor of this building.‎ ‎［正］I live on the second floor of this building.‎ ‎［析］在序数词，形容词最高级前要用定冠词。如：He is the oldest in the family.‎ ‎［误］I want to learn the second language this term.‎ ‎［正］I want to learn a second language this term.‎ ‎［析］在序数词的含意不是顺序中的第一第二，而其意在于再学一个，再来一个时，应用a，本句的意思应为：这学期我要学一门第二外语。‎ ‎［误］Mississippi is one of the longest rivers in the world.‎ ‎［正］The Mississippi is one of the longest rivers in the world.‎ ‎［析］在河流名称前应加定冠词，如：the Yellow River(黄河)。‎ ‎［误］Look, there are Alp.‎ ‎［误］Look, there are the Alp.‎ ‎［正］Look, there are the Alps.‎ ‎［析］具体的某一座山不加定冠词，如：Mountain Tai.但在山名称前加定冠词后，其山名要加s，来表示山脉。the Alps即为阿尔卑斯山脉。如:The Alps are in the center of Europe.‎ ‎［误］Times is one of the oldest newspapers in the world.‎ ‎［正］The Times is one of the oldest newspapers in the world.‎ ‎［析］报刊名称前应加定冠词。 ‎［误］Rich are not always happy.‎ ‎［正］The rich are not always happy.‎ ‎［析］在形容词前加定冠词表示一类人，而在姓的前面加定冠词，姓后加s表示某一家，如：The turners are going to move to New York.‎ ‎［误］I like to eat bread for breakfast. Bread sells in this shop is very good.‎ ‎［正］I like to eat bread for breakfast. The bread sells in this shop is very good.‎ ‎［析］物质名词特指时也应加定冠词。 ‎［误］The sun rises in east.‎ ‎［正］The sun rises in the east.‎ ‎［析］在方向、方位前应用定冠词，如：in the east, in the west, in the north, in the south, in the direction 及in the past, in the future ‎［误］Do you know who invented telephone ‎［正］Do you know who invented the telephone ‎［析］在特定和专有事物或名称前要加定冠词， 如：the English Channel 英吉利海峡 the Panama Canal 巴拿马运河 the Suez Canal 苏伊士运河 ‎［误］Would you please buy some food for the supper ‎［正］Would you please buy some food for supper ‎［析］泛指一日三餐前无定冠词。 ‎［误］I like to climb the mountain in the autumn.‎ ‎［正］I like to climb the mountain in autumn.‎ ‎［析］一年四季前不用定冠词，如：Spring is the best season in a year.‎ ‎［误］Sometimes my parents come to school to see me.‎ ‎［正］Sometimes my parents come to the school to see me.‎ ‎［析］有些名词被用作其本身原来所含目的时不加冠词，如：go to school上学，leave school(辍学)，after school(放学)，但如果当建筑物讲时应加冠词，如例句中其父母来校不是上学，而是看望孩子，则要加定冠词。又如，He was in hospital for two days.(他在医院住院两天了。)而：He went to the hospital to see his mother.他去医院看望他的母亲。‎ ‎［误］I bought a same dictionary as she bought.‎ ‎［正］I bought the same dictionary as she bought.‎ ‎［析］在惯用法the same, the only, the very前的定冠词不可换为不定冠词。‎ ‎［误］The police caught the thief by his arm.‎ ‎［正］The police caught the thief by the arm.‎ ‎［析］这是英文表达法与中文的明显不同之处，也是初学者极易忽视之处。在英语中的某些动词，如：catch(抓)，take(拿)，strike (打),pat(拍)，hit(击)，hold(握)，pull(拉)…动词后应加人，再加介词on, by, in, with…之后要加定冠词，再加人体的某一部位。这时的定冠词千万不要换作his, her, their, 等词。‎ ‎［误］He was paid by hour.‎ ‎［正］He was paid by the hour.‎ ‎［析］by和计量单位之间要有定冠词。这句话应译为：他的工资是按小时计算的。‎ ‎［误］I went to New York by his car.‎ ‎［正］I went to New York by car.‎ ‎［正］I went to New York in his car.‎ ‎［析］by仅仅与交通工具相连表示应用某种工具，而加了别的修饰词后其前面的介词也应作相应的转换。如：by car (坐小汽车)by taxi (坐出租车)by bike (骑自行车)by water (乘船)by air (乘飞机)by sea (乘船)‎ ‎［误］Mary began to learn how to play piano when she was three.‎ ‎［正］Mary began to learn how to play the piano when she was three.‎ ‎［析］在乐器前要加定冠词，而在球类游戏之前则不要加冠词，如：They like to play bridge when they are free. (他们空闲时爱打桥牌)‎ ‎［误］The little boy wanted to go to cinema.‎ ‎［正］The little boy wanted to go to the cinema.‎ ‎［析］英语中虽有一些名词与go to连用时不加定冠词，以表示该名词的内涵，如：go to school (上学)，go to bed(睡觉)等，但去看电影则例外，要用go to the cinema.这也是语言的一个特点。‎ ‎［误］I live at 105 the Lake street.‎ ‎［正］I live at 105 Lake Street.‎ ‎［析］街道名称前不用冠词。 ‎［误］Next summer holiday I will go to country to live on a farm.‎ ‎［正］Next summer holiday I will go to the country to live on a farm.‎ ‎［析］country既作国家讲也作乡村讲。作乡村讲时，一定要加定冠词，而且只有单数形式，作国家讲时则可有复数形式。如：Japan is a country .Japan, China, India are Asian countries.‎ ‎［误］The picture looks better at the distance.‎ ‎［正］The picture looks better at a distance.‎ ‎［析］at a distance意为“离开一定距离”。而in the distance为“远方，远处”。这样常用的词组有：‎ as a rule (照例)‎ in a hurry (匆忙)‎ in the morning/afternoon (上/下午)‎ in the sun (在阳光下)‎ in the rain (雨中)‎ in the same way (同样)‎ in the shade (在阴凉处)‎ in the day time (白天)‎ in the end (最终)‎ on the other hand (换句话说)‎ on the contrary (相反)‎ ‎［误］The little boy and girl walk along the street a hand in a hand.‎ ‎［正］The little boy and girl walk along the street hand in hand.‎ ‎［析］这是英语中的习惯用法，如： bit by bit (逐渐)‎ day after (by) day (一天又一天)‎ day and night (日日夜夜)‎ face to face (面对面)‎ from A to Z (自始至终)‎ from time to time (再三)‎ hand in hand (手拉手)‎ shoulder by shoulder (肩并肩)‎ ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1 Mr Li is＿＿＿ old worker.‎ A a B an C some D /‎ ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］an用于元音音素开始的单词前。‎ ‎2 English is＿＿＿ useful language in ＿＿＿ world.‎ A an, the B a, the C the, / D /,the ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］因useful的第一个音素是［j］，它是辅音音素。‎ ‎3 What ＿＿＿ interesting book it is?‎ A a B an C the D /‎ ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］这是感叹句，因为移到原一般句前面的强调部分中有可数名词book,所以应加冠词，而interesting的第一音素是元音所以要加an。‎ ‎4 He will be back in ＿＿＿ hour.‎ A / B the C a D an ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］因hour的首字母h不发音。‎ ‎5 There is ＿＿＿ map in the classroom. ＿＿＿ map is on the wall.‎ A a, A B the, The C a, The D the ,A ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］在文章中首次提到某人或某物时用不定冠词，而第二次再提到该物或人时应用定冠词。‎ ‎6 Look at＿＿＿ picture! There's＿＿＿ house in it.‎ A a ,a B the, the C a, the D the, a ［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］虽然是第一次提到，但在句中的语言是让对方看某一特定的图画，所以应选择D。‎ ‎7 There is ＿＿＿ orange in the bottle.‎ A a B an C the D /‎ ［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］这里的orange是指桔汁而不是一个个的桔子。 ‎ ‎8 Beijing is ＿＿＿ capital of our country.‎ A the B an C / D a ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］capital之后有of结构则要用定冠词。‎ ‎9 If you work hard at English, you'll get ＿＿＿ “A” in the test.‎ A an B / C the D a ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］因字母A的第一音素是元音。‎ ‎10 He usually goes to school on ＿＿＿ foot.‎ A a B an C the D /‎ ［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］on foot意为走路上学，是习惯用法。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 三、 代词 ‎(一) 知识概要 英语中代词可以分为人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、疑问代词、不定代词。人称代词主要有主格和宾格之别。请看下表 人称 我 你 他 她 它 我们 你们 他们　 ‎ 主格 i you he she it we you they ‎ 宾格 me you him her it us you them ‎ 物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词两种。请看下表 人称 我的 你的 他的 她的 它的 我们的 你们的 他们的 ‎ 形容词性 my your his her its ours your they ‎ 名词性 mine yours his hers its ours yours theirs ‎ ‎ 反身代词可见下表 人称 我 你 他 她 它 我们 你们 他们　 ‎ 反身代词 myself yourself himself herself itself ourselves yourself themselves ‎ 指示代词主要有this, that, these, those 疑问代词有：who, whom whose, what, which,‎ 还有疑问副词when, how, where, why。‎ 不定代词在初中课本中主要有some, any， many, much, each, neither, other, another, all, both, one, none, either…‎ ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］Tom's mother is taller than my.‎ ‎［正］Tom's mother is taller than mine.‎ ‎［析］形容词性物主代词可以作定语，也就是讲它可以作形容词，如：my book，而这句话的意思是：汤姆的妈妈比我的妈妈高。比较的对象是my mother,也就是mine。‎ ‎［误］We have a lot of homework to do today. So we need two or three hours to finish them.‎ ‎［正］We have a lot of homework to do today. So we need two or three hours to finish it.‎ ‎［析］在应用代词时，要注意人称，格与数的一致性。这里it所代替的是不可数名词homework， 所以应用it。‎ ‎［误］He and you should go to the library to return the books.‎ ‎［正］You and he should go to the library to return the books.‎ ‎［析］这主要是英语习惯上的用法。当两个以上的人称代词并列时其排列顺序一般为you, he, she, I,而复数时为we, you， they:如男女并列时，应先男后女，如：He and she …如果在表示不好意思，承担责任时，单数时用，I, he, she, you, 复数时用They, you， we, 如：Tom and I are good friends.‎ You, he and I must go to play the game for our team this afternoon.‎ We, you and they have been there before.‎ I, he and you have to pay for it.‎ ‎［误］He or his brother is doing their homework.‎ ‎［正］He or his brother is doing his homework.‎ ‎［析］由either…or, neither…nor, or 连接两个主语时，如果两主语是单数时，用单数代词，如两主语是复数时，用复数代词，如：Either teachers or students want to do their best to help the old man.如是一单一复两名词时，一般将单数名词放在前，复数名词放在后，要用复数代词，如：The teacher or his students will clean their classroom together.‎ ‎［误］His brother is taller than him.‎ ‎［正］His brother is taller than he.‎ ‎［析］than是连词，其后应视为省略句，than he is.所以要注意区分其主格与宾格的用法。‎ I like you as much as she.‎ ‎［正］I like you as much as her.‎ ‎［析］as…as 其后也应看作是省略句。应为as I like her.所以应用宾格。而第一句应译为我像她那样喜欢你。两句语法都是对的但含义不同。‎ ‎［误］Myself did it yesterday.‎ ‎［正］I myself did it yesterday.‎ ‎［正］I did it myself yesterday.‎ ‎［析］反身代词不可作主语，但可以用作主语的同位语。 ‎［误］Take care of ourselves.‎ ‎［正］Take care of yourselves .(yourself)‎ ‎［析］祈始句的主语应看作第二人称you.‎ ‎［误］Please bring your daughter with yourself.‎ ‎［正］Please bring your daughter with you.‎ ‎［析］反身代词不能作介词宾语，除非是由不及物动词与介词组成的动词短语，如： The old woman spoke to herself.‎ ‎［误］Make yourself home.‎ ‎［正］Make yourself at home.‎ ‎［析］这是英语中的习惯用法，意为“像在家里一样”。这样的用法还有： enjoy oneself 玩得开心make yourself at home 像在家中一样 help yourself to something 自己拿某物lost oneself 迷路 seat oneself 就坐dress oneself 穿衣 ‎［误］—　Who's this speaking.—　That's Mary.‎ ‎［正］—　Who's that speaking.—　This is Mary.‎ ‎［析］在电话用语中，this指讲话人自己，而that指对方。‎ ‎［误］The days in summer are longer than this in winter.‎ ‎［正］The days in summer are longer than those in winter.‎ ‎［析］在比较句中往往为了避免重复，可以用that或those取代前面提到的事物，如是单数时用that,复数时用those，如：The weather in Beijing is hotter than that in Chang Chun.‎ ‎［误］It is so a good book that everyone likes to read.‎ ‎［正］It is such a good book that everyone likes to read.‎ ‎［正］It is so good a book that everyone likes to read.‎ ‎［析］在可数名词单数时可用so+形容词+不定冠词+名词+that从句，也可用such+不定冠词+形容词+that从句。在不可数名词或可数名词复数时，只用such, 如：It is such good weather that I want to go swimming. They are such good books ‎ that I want to buy them all.在many, much, few, little这4个词前仅能用so,如： She has so much money that she can buy everything she wants.而在so与that之间仅存形容词时，则不能用such,如:She is so sweet that everyone likes her.‎ ‎［误］I want to buy a same dictionary as yours.‎ ‎［正］I want to buy the same dictionary as yours.‎ ‎［析］same与定冠词the是固定搭配不可更改。这样的用法还有all the same(仍然)。‎ ‎［误］—　I hope she might pass the exam.—　I don't hope so.‎ ‎［正］—　I hope she might pass the exam.—　I hope not.‎ ‎［析］在作肯定回答时，I think so. I hope so. I believe so.但作否定回答时为：I don't think so. I hope/believe not.‎ ‎［误］—　He studied very hard this term.— So she did.‎ ‎［正］— He studied very hard this term.— So did she.‎ ‎［误］— English is difficult to learn.— So is it.‎ ‎［正］— English is difficult to learn.— So it is.‎ ‎［析］在对话中如果某一动作同时适用于两个主语，这时在答语中要用缩写且要用倒装句。如第一组句，即studied hard既适用于he,也适用于she.但答语仅仅是对前句的重复，即仅仅是第一句的缩写时则不要用倒装句。如第二组句子为：英语难学。答语为：是的，难学。这时缩写的答语不要用倒装句。‎ ‎［误］Everyone should do one's best.‎ ‎［正］Everyone should do his best.‎ ‎［析］one作代词时，它的复数形式是ones,所有格形式是one's，反身代词为oneself.如果讲One should do one's best.则是对句。如果one与别的词组成其他词，如： someone, anyone, everyone或only one 则要用his/her，来作其所有格形式。‎ ‎［误］— Who won the game?— None.‎ ‎［正］— Who won the game?— No one.‎ ‎［析］由who提问的句子的否定回答中的简略说法是no one,而由How many提问的句子的否定回答中的简略语是None.如：How many books are there? None.‎ ‎［误］There are many trees on either sides of the street.‎ ‎［正］There are many trees on either side of the street.‎ ‎［正］There are many trees on both sides of the street.‎ ‎［析］either作代词时由两个含意，其一是两者中随便哪一个，如：You can take either.其二是两者中的每一个。但要注意的是either后要加单数名词，如果作主语则谓语动词也要用单数形式。‎ ‎［误］Either you or I are right.‎ ‎［正］Either you or I am right.‎ ‎［析］在either…or,或neither…nor连接两个主语时，其谓语动词要与和其相近的那个主语相配。‎ ‎［误］I have three sisters. Neither of them is a doctor.‎ ‎［正］I have three sisters. None of them is a doctor.‎ ‎［析］neither用于两者中无一是，而none则用于多于两者中的人或事物无一是。‎ ‎［误］He doesn't like Beijing opera. I don't like too.‎ ‎［正］He doesn't like Beijing opera, I don't like either.‎ ‎［析］either作为“也”讲时，要用于否定句中，而too则用于肯定句中。‎ ‎［误］We like both this little boy.‎ ‎［正］We both like this little boy.‎ ‎［析］both作同位语时，它在句中的位置有：在be动词之后，如：We are both students.在实意动词之前，如：The parents both want to go to the cinema.用于第一助动词之后，如：We have both read these English novels.使用时要注意以下句子的实际含意：Both of us are not right.应译为：我们俩不都对。Neither of us is right.才应译为：我俩都不对。又如：I can't give you both of the books.意为：两本书我不能全给你，而I can't give you either of the books.才为：两本书我全不能给你。‎ ‎［误］We each has a ticket for the concert.‎ ‎［正］We each have a ticket for the concert.‎ ‎［析］each作句子主语时其谓语动词要用单数形式，如：Each of us wants to learn English well，但each作同位语时，则应以原名词的数为准。‎ ‎［误］Every of us has to pass the exam.‎ ‎［正］Each of us has to pass the exam.‎ ‎［析］every只可作形容词，不可作代词，而each既可作形容词，又可作代词，在作形容词时each侧重强调个体，而every 则侧重于全体。‎ ‎［误］Everyone of us should do housework two hours a day.‎ ‎［正］Every one of us should do housework two hours a day.‎ ‎［析］everyone不可与of结构相连接使用，而every one则可以这样用。‎ ‎［误］I should read English everyday.‎ ‎［正］I should read English every day.‎ ‎［析］要注意的是every day是“每天”，而everyday则是形容词为“日常的”。如：everyday English日常英语，everyday life日常生活。‎ ‎［误］There are trees on every sides of the street.‎ ‎［正］There are trees on each side of the street. ‎ ‎［析］every用于三者或三者以上的每一个，而each用于二者或二者以上的每一个。因为街道只有两侧，所以只能用each而不能用every.‎ ‎［误］All my parents are engineers.‎ ‎［正］Both my parents are engineers.‎ ‎［析］all用于三者或三者以上的全部，而both 则用于两者的全部。‎ ‎［误］All of students might make some mistakes.‎ ‎［正］All of the students might make some mistakes.‎ ‎［正］All students might make some mistakes.‎ ‎［析］非特指的名词前可用all但不可用all of结构，也就是讲all of结构后面的名词前一定要有定冠词。其他与all有关的习惯用法还有：‎ all the year round, all week, all day, all winter ‎［误］The all village was flooded.‎ ‎［正］All the village was flooded.‎ ‎［析］all作修饰语时要用在所有修饰词之前。‎ ‎［误］The post office is on other side of the street.‎ ‎［正］The post office is on the other side of the street.‎ ‎［析］单数可数名词如在泛指某一个时用another,而特指时则要用the ‎ other,因街道只有两边，而不在这边必定是在另一边，所以要用特指。请参考下表的用法以便于记忆。‎ ‎　 单数 复数 ‎ 泛指 another形容词 作定语 作名词 ‎ another代词 other others ‎ 特指 the other形容词 ‎ the other代词 ‎ ‎ the other the others ‎ ‎［误］There are ten students here Where are the others students?‎ ‎［正］There are ten students here.Where are the others?‎ ‎［正］There are ten students here Where are the other students?‎ ‎［析］the others=the other students.‎ ‎［误］The old man has two sons. One is a teacher, another is a doctor.‎ ‎［正］The old man has two sons. One is a teacher, the other is a doctor.‎ ‎［析］another用于泛指，如：Is it far from here to the station?I'm sorry. I have no idea. One may say it is quite near; another may say it is far from here.但在特指时则要用the other.它可以用作定语，the other one,也可以用作代词the other,但the other用作代词时它的含意一定是单数。如果指三者或者三者以上的情况时，则要用one…another…the other.或者one…a second…the third…‎ ‎［误］Some people like sports. The others like reading.‎ ‎［正］Some people like sports. Others like reading.‎ ‎［析］在泛指的复数名词前用some…others…others…来表示某些人……某些人……某些人……。‎ ‎［误］Please remember to water the flowers each other day.‎ ‎［正］Please remember to water the flowers every other day.‎ ‎［析］every other day为每隔一天。是习惯用法，不要随意改动。又如：on the other hand另一方面。‎ ‎［误］Many know him， but few likes him.‎ ‎［正］Many know him, but few like him.‎ ‎［析］few用于可数名词，意为几乎没有，但few作主语时谓语动词则要用复数形式，而a few为有一些。‎ ‎［误］You have few friends, haven't you?‎ ‎［正］You have few friends, have you?‎ ‎［析］little与few用于句中时，均要按否定句看待。‎ ‎［误］Much of what you said are true.‎ ‎［正］Much of what you said is true.‎ ‎［析］much用于不可数名词，作主语时用单数谓语动词。而many用于可数名词，它作主语时用复数形式的谓语动词。‎ ‎［误］This room is enough large for the students to live in.‎ ‎［正］This room is large enough for the students to live in.‎ ‎［析］enough 可以用作代词，如：There is enough of the food. 又如：Enough has been done for the work，但enough 还可以作形容词来修饰名词，这时enough可以放在名词之前，也可放在名词之后，如：money enough 与enough money都是对的。但当enough作副词修饰形容词时，则只能置于形容词之后了。‎ ‎［误］I want any books to read. Do you have any?‎ ‎［正］I want some books to read. Do you have any?‎ ‎［析］按照语法any用于疑问句和否定句，而some用于肯定句。‎ ‎［误］Would you like any thing to drink?‎ ‎［正］Would you like something to drink?‎ ‎［析］在由would you like发出的问句中，表达了说话者真心实意要为对方提供些饮料，或在说话者想得到对方的肯定答复时，在疑问句中要用some而不用any。‎ ‎［误］Someone want to meet you.‎ ‎［正］Someone wants to meet you.‎ ‎［析］不定代词应被看作单数，即使用and连接两个不定代词，也要看作单数，如：Anyone and everyone has the right. 任何人，每一个人都有这样的权力。‎ ‎［误］New York is much colder in winter than before.‎ ‎［正］It is much colder in New York in winter than before.‎ ‎［析］it常常用在英文的句子中来代表时间、距离、天气、自然现象，或用在句中作形式主语或宾语，如：‎ It is ten o'clock now. (代时间)‎ It is far from here to the airport. (代距离)‎ It is very hot.(代天气)‎ It is very difficult to learn English well. (作形式主语)‎ We found it very difficult to answer the question. (作形式宾语)‎ ‎［误］Be careful. Don't drink too many.‎ ‎［正］Be careful. Don't drink too much.‎ ‎［析］这里much所代的应是饮料或水，所以应为不可数名词 ‎ ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1 These are ＿＿＿books. Yours are over there.‎ A I B my C me D mine ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］这里应用形容词性物主代词。 ‎2 —＿＿＿ is she?‎ ‎— She is a teacher.‎ A What B How C Who D Where ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］这里的四个疑问词放在问句中全都成立，但其意义不同。What is she?应译为“她的工作是什么?”或“她是做什么的?”而How is she?应译为“她身体如何?”而Who is she?应译为“她是谁?”其答语应为“她叫什么名字。”而Where is she?应为“她在什么地方?”由答语决定了这道题的选择 ‎3＿＿＿ is wrong with my watch. It has stopped＿＿＿.‎ A Something, working B Something, to work C Any thing, working D Anything, to work ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］因为是肯定句所以应用Something,其后由于表停止工作了，则stop后要用动名词。‎ ‎4 Mary, help ＿＿＿to the bananas, please.‎ A you B your C yourself D yourselves ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］help oneself to something为“自己拿某物”。yourself为“你一个人”，而yourselves为“你们”。‎ ‎5 —＿＿＿ do you go to school every day?‎ ‎— By bus.‎ A How B Why C When D Where ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］这题的答案是由问句决定的。 ‎6 My skirt is＿＿＿ popular than＿＿＿.‎ A much, her B much, hers C more, her D more, hers ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］因句中有than,所以应选用比较级，而than后要选用名词性物主代词。‎ ‎7 — Can you speak English?‎ ‎— Yes, but only＿＿＿.‎ A few B a few C little D a little ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］因会讲某种语言的多少要用a little,把它看作不可数名词对待，此答语为：是的，但仅仅会讲一点。‎ ‎8 Mr.　Smith is an old friend of＿＿＿.‎ A I B me C my D mine ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］这里应选名词性物主代词，这也是英语的一种习惯用法，而不要选择my。‎ ‎9 “ ＿＿＿do you hear from your parents?”‎ ‎“About once a month.”‎ A How long B How many C How often D How much ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］How often问的是某一动作发生的频率，即在单位时间内发生多少次。‎ ‎10 Mr Green wouldn't say ＿＿＿at the meeting.‎ A everything B nothing C anything D something ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］在否定句中应用anything ‎11 “Mum, Ann's coming tonight. Let's give her ＿＿＿to eat.”‎ ‎“Good idea!”‎ A anything nice B nice anything C something nice D nice something ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］肯定句中用something而不用anything,不定代词的修饰词应放其后而不要放在其前面。‎ ‎12 — When shall we meet, this evening or tomorrow evening?‎ ‎— I don't mind. ＿＿＿time is OK.‎ A Some B Neither C Either D Both ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］因如选用both则名词要用复数名词，也要用复数谓语动词，由于答语前有I don't mind 则决定不能选择neither.‎ ‎13 This is not her kite,　but＿＿＿.‎ A he's B him C he D his ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］要注意“他的”名词性物主代词与形容词性物主代词是同形的。 ‎14 Don't worry, Mum! ＿＿＿ news is good news. I'm sure daddy will come back soon.‎ A No B Many C Those D Two ［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］这是一条谚语，即没有消息就是好消息。 ‎ ‎15 Mary has six apples. Her brother has three. She has ＿＿＿apples than he.‎ A few B many C more D fewer ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］由于是比较级，根据题意应选“多于”而不是“少于”。 ‎ ‎16 There isn't ＿＿＿in today's newspaper.‎ A anything interesting B something interesting C nothing interesting D interesting anything ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］由于句子是否定句，应选择anything，而且不定代词的修饰语应放在其后面。‎ ‎17 September 10th is＿＿＿ Day?‎ A Teacher B Teachers C Teacher's D Teachers'‎ ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］教师节Teachers' Day,儿童节 Children's Day, 妇女节 Women's Day ‎18 — In England, people eat a lot of “takeaway” food. What about people in your country?‎ ‎—＿＿＿ ‎ A So we do. B We do so. C So do we. D We so do. ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］在答语中用简略方式表达上文的一个动作同样适用于另一个主语时，则要采用倒装句，但如果仅仅是对上句的重复则不要倒装。 ‎19 — Shall we go into that shop and have a look?‎ ‎— Sorry. I won't. I have ＿＿＿to do there.‎ A everything B anything C something D nothing ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］这个答案的选择应由上下两句对话内容作出决定。 ‎20— Oh, dear! Who broke the glass?‎ ‎—＿＿＿ Sam ＿＿＿Bruce. It was the cat.‎ A Both, and B Not, but C Neither, nor D Either, or ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］neither…nor意为既不……也不……‎ ‎21 The students are having a good time in the park. Some are drawing by the lake.＿＿＿are climbing the hill.‎ A Others B Other C Another D The other  ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］这里因为是代替复数名词，所以应用名词性的复数代名词。 ‎22 She is not a nurse. I'm not＿＿＿.‎ A also B either C neither D too ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］在否定句中该用either,而不用too和also.‎ ‎23 I have two pencils. One is red,＿＿＿ is blue.‎ A the other B another C others D the others ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］两者中的另一个应为特指。而且应为单数形式的代名词。而another是泛指单数代名词。others是泛指复数代名词，而the others是特指复数代名词。‎ ‎24 Sorry, I can't answer your question.‎ I know ＿＿＿about the subject.‎ A little B a little C few D a few ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］中文讲我对此知道的不多，而英文中要用little。其含意为否定句。‎ ‎25 My sister doesn't like skating＿＿＿. ‎ A So do I B So I don't C Neither I don't D Neither do I ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］这是表达上面否定句中的动作，也同样不适合 于第二个人。所以要用neither,并要采用倒装句。‎ ‎26 Yesterday morning there were only three boys in our room,＿＿＿.‎ A you, he and I B I, you and he C he, I and you D you, I and he ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］这是若干人称代词并列时的顺序问题。请参看辨析中的例子。 ‎27 All the students are busy, so＿＿＿of them will go to the concert.‎ A many B little C a few D few ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］student为可数名词。‎ ‎28 The teacher gave ＿＿＿student a new book.‎ A nobody B both C each D any ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］both其后的名词应为复数，而any用于疑问句和否定句中只有each可以修饰单数可数名词。‎ ‎29 Black is neither a teacher ＿＿＿a worker.‎ A or B either C nor D and ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］neither…nor为“既不……也不……”的固定搭配。‎ ‎30 Our teacher gave us＿＿＿on studying.‎ A many advices B some advices C an advice D some advice ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］advice为不可数名词。some可用于可数或不可数名词之前。‎ ‎31 There are two foreign friends in the park. One ＿＿＿is from Japan, is from America.‎ A other B others C the other D the others ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］因为是两者中的一个，所以另一个应用单数特指代词。 ‎32 Are there ＿＿＿on the table?‎ A some cups B any cup C some cup D any cups ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］此句是疑问句，应用any cups, 因提问时的be动词用的是are。‎ ‎33 I've just bought five stamps. One is a German stamp, ＿＿＿are American stamps.‎ A the other B the others C other D others ‎［答案］B.‎ ‎［析］此空应填入主语。又因其范围已定，所以应选特指的代名词。the other只能用作单数，而others是泛指复数代名词，故只能选B。‎ ‎34 It was＿＿＿ fine day that they went to the park.‎ A a so B so a C such a D a such ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］在单数可数名词前可以有两种表达法，即such+不定冠词+形容词+可数名词单数形式，如：such a good day，或者用so加形容词+不定冠词+可数名词单数，如：so good a day.‎ ‎35 At that time the train was slow and noisy. So＿＿＿people liked taking trains.‎ A little B a little C few D a few ‎［答案］C.‎ ‎［析］这是英文的表达法与中文不同之处。中文讲只有少数人喜欢坐火车，英文要选用“few”。‎ ‎36 We must help and understand each＿＿＿.‎ A other B another C others D the other ‎［答案］A.‎ ‎［析］each other意为“互相”，是习惯用语。‎ ‎37 ＿＿＿is difficult to walk on the moon.‎ A Man B One C That D It ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］这里的真正主语应为不定式to walk on the moon.而形式主语只能用it.‎ ‎38 Jane has sent several letters, but ＿＿＿of them have been answered.‎ A all B both C either D none ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］several letters意为“若干信件”，应看作多于两者，则在A、D中作选择，仅D符合句意。‎ ‎39 I don't know ＿＿＿about the new headmaster.‎ A something B everything C nothing D anything ‎［答案］D.‎ ‎［析］否定句中应用anything.‎ ‎40＿＿＿ of the students in the whole class could do this physics question.‎ A No B None C Not D Neither ‎［答案］B. ‎ ‎ ‎ 四、 形容词、副词 ‎(一) 知识概要 形容词的用法很活跃，在英语中用处也很多，但英语中修饰可数名词和不可数名词的修饰语和词组有时不同，要特别加以注意。下面将初中学习阶段中遇到的修饰可数名词的词和词组归纳如下：many, no, several, some, a few, a lot, lots, plenty, plenty of, a lot of, a large number of, enough。而修饰不可数名词的词或词组如下：much, no, some, a lot, a great deal, lots, plenty, a lot of, plenty of。其中some, no, a lot of, plenty of既可修饰可数名词又可修饰不可数名词。英语中形容词与副词有原级、比较级、最高级之分，其规则如下： 构词法 原 级 比较级 最高级 加er，或est Tall young taller younger ‎ tallest youngest ‎ ‎ 只加r或st nice large ‎ nicer larger ‎ nicest largest ‎ ‎ 重读闭音节末尾只有一个辅音 字母时双写该字母加er、est big ‎ fat hot ‎ bigger ‎ fatter hotter ‎ ‎ ‎ biggest fattest hottest ‎ ‎ 不规则变化的形容词或副词： 原 级 比较级 最高级 ‎ good better best ‎ Well better best ‎ bad worse worst ‎ badly worse worst ‎ many more most ‎ most more most ‎ little less lest ‎ far farther further ‎ ‎ farthest furthest ‎ ‎ ‎ old older elder ‎ oldest eldest ‎ ‎ 要注意的是许多形容词同时又是副词，如：back, all, alone, either, far, high, slow等。而有些形容词则要经过一定变化才能转为副词，其规律如下： 构词法 形容词 副 词 ‎ 一般加ly Careful kind ‎ carefully kindly ‎ ‎ 尾是y时将y变成i加ly Happy busy easy ‎ Happily busily easily ‎ ‎ 其 他 true terrible full possible shy whole ‎ truly terribly fully possibly shyly wholly ‎ ‎ 在学习过程中要注意其变化。 此外并不是所有副词都可以修饰比较级和最高级形容词。能修饰比较级的有：much, yet, far, still, a great deal, even 和a little. 能修饰最高级的有：the very, much the, far等。 ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］ The young likes playing football very much. ‎［正］ The young like playing football very much. ‎［析］ 定冠词加形容词表示一类人，应作复数看待。而定冠词加形容词表示抽象事物时则要看作单数，如：The beautiful is not always kindness.美丽并不总代表善良。 ‎［误］ The danger has gone, so the worst are over. ‎［正］ The danger has gone, so the worst is over. ‎［析］ 意为："危险已经过去，最困难的状况已结束。"用定冠词加最高级形容词作主语时应看作单数形式。 ‎［误］ It is the gold age of the young. ‎［正］ It is the golden age of the young. ‎［析］ golden在英语中多用于比喻，如：golden hair金发，gulden voice金嗓子。而gold多用于表达金质的，如：a gold bar金条，a gold coin金币，但gold fish 金鱼例外。‎ ‎［误］ She is a warm heart woman. ‎［正］ She is a warmhearted woman. ‎［析］ 英语形容词的构词法很多，其中之一是由形容词，或数词，加名词加ed构成，如：warmhoarted 热心肠的，whitehaired 白毛的 ‎［误］ There is an alive fish in the pool. ‎［正］ There is a living fish in the pool. ‎［析］ 在初中范围内所学到的以a字母开头的形容词一般不能作定语，只能作表语。如：The fish is alive.(鱼还活着)这样的形容词有：alive, alike, alone, asleep, afraid, awake等。 ‎［误］ The ill man nearly died. ‎［正］ The sick man nearly died. ‎［析］ ill一般不作定语来形容某人有病，而要用sick，但作表语时则都可以。如：He is ill sick, ill作定语时则另有他意，如：ill luck (厄运)，ill nature(天性恶劣),ill temper(心绪不好) ‎［误］ I have important something to tell you. ‎［正］ I have something important to tell you. ‎［析］ 不定代词something, anyone, somebody…在用形容词修饰时，形容词应放其后。但要注意thing则不是不定代词，不符合上述规律。如：I have an important thing to tell you. ‎［误］ I'll be free on next Sunday. ‎［正］ I'll be free next Sunday. ‎［析］ 在表达将来时的时候：next Sunday, next week, next year或last Sunday last week, last year前都不加介词。 ‎［误］ The girl is twoyear old. ‎［正］ The girl is two years old. ‎［正］ She is a twoyearold girl ‎［析］ 由连字符连接若干名词、数词……组成的形容词，在学习时要记住两点，其一是这些词中的名词都不要用复数形式，如：twothousandword report(两千字的报告)；其二是这样构成的形容词只能作定语，即用于名词之前，而不能作表语。 ‎［误］ The foreigners like those little beautiful Chinese paintings. ‎［正］ The foreigners like those beautiful little Chinese paintings. ‎［析］ 在名词前若有几个形容词作修饰语时，其顺序如下。 ‎1. 指示代词，定冠词 2. 数量词 3. 性质词 4. 大小 5. 形状 6. 老少，新旧 7. 颜色 8. 材料 但要注意的是英语的习惯是一个名词前的形容词一般不要多于三个。 如： What a pretty little white horse! Those first few short English stories were not difficult to understand.  ‎［误］ The best way to learn English good is to speak with Englishman every day.‎ ‎［正］ The best way to learn English well is to speak with Englishman every day.‎ ‎［析］ good是形容词，这里是修饰动词speak的，所以应用副词well，但well作形容词讲时只作身体好。如：He is well.(他身体很好)。He is good.(他是个好人)。 ‎［误］ The children play on the grass nappyly. ‎［正］ The children play on the grass happily ‎［析］ 多音节y结尾的形容词变为副词时应将y变为i再加ly. ‎［误］ The teacher looked angry at the students. ‎［正］ The teacher looked angrily at the students. ‎［析］ 英语中感观动词后面要接形容词，这时它是修饰主语的，如：The food smells good.食物闻起来很香。The teacher looked angry 老师看起来很生气。 而此句的意思为："老师生气地看着学生"，所以应用副词形式。 ‎［误］ He worked with me friendly. ‎［正］ He was friendly to me. ‎［析］ 不是所有结尾是ly的词都是副词，但friendly是形容词，这样的词还有lovely, lonely, costly, lively…monthly weekly…。但其中有些词既是副词，又是形容词，如：early, hourly, monthly… ‎［误］ You can speak free in front of your friends. ‎［正］ You can speak freely in front of your friends. ‎［析］ free作为形容词意为"自由的，有空闲的，免费的"。作为副词讲则是"免费"之意。而freely作为副词则是"自由的，随便的"。这些要注意的词还有：hard 努力，艰苦 hardly 几乎不 late 迟，晚lately 最近的，最新的 near 近 nearly 几乎like 像 likely 几乎 ‎［误］ They must have arrived till now. ‎［正］ They must have arrived by now. ‎［析］ by now是用于表达到目前为止某一动作已经发生，所以应用瞬间动词。而till now是强调某一动作一直持续到现在，所以一定要用持续性动词。must have+过去分词是对过去某一事情所作的肯定推测。 ‎［误］ Someone called you right now. ‎［正］ Someone called you just now. ‎［析］ just now有两个意思，其一是"刚才"，其二是"现在"，而right ‎ now只能用于现在的状态。just则用于完成时态，如： I have just finished my homework. ‎［误］ My father will be back from America at present. ‎［正］ My father will be back from America presently. ‎［析］ presently有两个意思：其一是最近，不久，其二在美语中是现在之意，与at present相同。而for the present为暂时，如： I teach English in the school for the present.‎ ‎［误］ I'll be back at the moment. ‎［正］ I'll be back in a moment. ‎［析］ at the moment 其意为"现在，当时"，而in a moment意为"马上过一会"，与in a minute意思相近。 ‎［误］ The train from Shanghai will arrive here in time. ‎［正］ The train from Shanghai will arrive here on time. ‎［析］ on time为"准时"，而in time有两个含意。其一是"及时"，如：The doctor arrived in time。其二是"将来，终究"。 ‎［误］ I met an old friend sometimes last month. ‎［正］ I met an old friend sometime last month. ‎［析］ Sometime 过去，或者将来某时。Sometimes 有时 如： Sometimes I go to school by bus.Some time 一些时间  如： I need sometime to do my homework. Some times 几次  如： I went to Shanghai sometimes this month. at times 有时，偶尔 at all times 经常 some other time 改天  ‎［误］ I had met an old friend three days ago. ‎［正］ I had met an old friend three days before. ‎［正］ I met an old friend three days ago. ‎* ago 用在时间状语中时，主句中谓语动词一般用过去时，而before用于时间状语时则主句的谓语动词宜用完成时态。 ‎［误］ He studied very hard. and at the end he passed the exam. ‎［正］ He studied very hard, and in the end he passed the exam. ‎［析］ in the end＝at last 意为"最终，终于"，表达经过若干努力而达到的结果。而at the end是在某事的结束时如何如何，如：At the end of class, the teacher gave us some story books。 ‎［误］ I will come here to help you each three days. ‎［正］ I will come here to help you every three days. ‎［析］ every three days 为"每三天"，即每隔二天，而every other day为每隔一天。‎ ‎［误］ He didn't go to the cinema yesterday. and I didn't go, too. ‎［正］ He didn't go to the cinema yesterday and I didn't go either. ‎［析］ 英语中表示"也"，有4个字，also, as well, too, either，但either用于否定句中，而前3个用于肯定句中。在肯定句中too与as well一般要用在句尾，而also则可用于句中。如：She went to the party and her boy friend went there too. 又如： I've also read her other novels. ‎［误］ We should help the poor girl in anyway. ‎［正］ We should help the poor girl in any way. ‎［析］ anyway为"不管怎么"讲，"无论如何"，如：What a terrible accident, anyway no one was hurt. any way 为"任何方式"。这种常见的错误还发生在以下几组词中，如： everyday 日常的 every day 每天 faraway 遥远的 far away 远离 altogether 总计 all together 一块，大家一起 already 已经 all ready 全准备好了 ‎［误］ You can come to the doctor's at anytime. ‎［正］ You can come to the doctor's at any time. ‎［析］ anytime 是副词 而any time中的time是名词。 ‎［误］ She said nearly nothing. ‎［正］ She said almost nothing. ‎［析］ nearly 与 almost的含意相近，在很多场合可以互换，但在否定词前用almost。‎ ‎［误］ There are too much mistakes in your homework. ‎［正］ There are too many mistakes in your homework. ‎［析］ too much 后接不可数名词，如：There is too much water for the flowers. 而too many 后加可数名词，much too 后面加形容词，如：It is much too difficult to learn English well. ‎［误］ It is late enough that we can go home now. ‎［正］ It is late enough for us to go home now. ‎［析］ 要注意的是enough后面一般不接从句而接不定式，或不定式的复合结构：for somebody to do something。 ‎［误］ The twins are very alike. ‎［正］ The twins are much alike. ‎［析］ 用a为首字母的形容词不能用very修饰，一般要用much来修饰。 ‎［误］ - How long does he write to his parents? ‎- Once a week.  ‎［正］ - How often does he write to his parents? ‎- Once a week.  ‎［析］ 英文与中文表达法不同，隔多长时间办一次某事，实际上问的是该事发生的频率，所以要用how often。 ‎［误］ As soon as I arrive in New York, I'll call up you. ‎［正］ As soon as I arrive in New York, I'll call you up. ‎［析］ 当动词词组的宾语是人称代词时则一定要放于动词之后，如果是名词则可以放在词组其后。如：I want to watch TV. Please turn on the TV. 也可以讲： Please turn the TV on. ‎［误］ He drove quickly his new car. ‎［正］ He drove his new car quickly. ‎［析］ 副词在句中的位置很活，但主要有以下几种用法：①实意动词之前，如：He quickly give me the answer. ② 在be动词之后，如：The little boy is often late for class. ③ 第一助动词之后，如：This book has almost been finished. ④ 在单独使用的be动词和助动词之前，如： Can you help me this afternoon? I certainly can. 但是无论如何也不能将副词置于动词与宾语之间，如果是宾语从句或是很长的名词 词组作宾语则才可以这样用： He heard clearly what the teacher said. ‎［误］ The children came late yesterday to the cinema. ‎［正］ The children came late to the cinema yesterday. ‎［析］ 表示一定长度的时间的副词不应放于句中，可放于句尾。如果表示强调则可放于句首。‎ ‎［误］ You have few new books, haven't you? ‎［正］ you have few new books, have you? ‎［析］ 英语中的数量形容词有两组。修饰可数名词的有few(很少，几乎没有)，a few(有一些，几个)；修饰不可数名词的有little (很少，几乎没有)，a little(有一点，有一些)。要注意的是当few和little用于句中时应看作否定句，而 a few 和a little 用于句中时则应看作是肯定句。 ‎ ‎［误］ He spent quite little money on his food. ‎［正］ He spent quite a little money on his food. ‎［析］ quite a 为一固定用法，其意为"十分，相当，所以"。 quite a few＝many, quite a little＝much 而only a little＝little, only a few=few. ‎［误］ Do you want to have many bread? ‎［正］ Do you want to have some bread? ‎［析］ some与any都可以用作形容词、副词或代词，在一般情况下，some用于肯定句，any用于疑问句和否定句，但在希望得到肯定答复时，应用some。 其次是some 可以用来修饰可数名词和不可数名词。 ‎［误］ Please tell me where the shoes shop is? ‎［正］ Please tell me where the shoe shop is. ‎［析］ 在用名词作修饰词来修饰另一名词时，这个作修饰词的名词应用单数形式，如： a shoe shop 鞋店 ‎ a fruit shop 水果店 ‎ a book shop 书店 a post office 邮局 ‎ a police station 警察局 ‎ a bus stop 汽车站 ‎［误］ He is weak at physics. ‎［正］ He is weak in physics. ‎［析］ 在表达擅长于作某事时用be good at something, 而其反意词为be bad at something， 但be weak in something。 ‎［误］ This dictionary is worth to buy. ‎［正］ This dictionary is worth buying. ‎［析］ be worth 后可接动、名词表达值得作某事，又可接价格、金钱表示值多少钱。 ‎［误］ Don't afraid of that. ‎［正］ Don't be afraid of that. ‎［析］ afraid 在英文中是形容词而不是动词。这样的词组还有： be afraid of 害怕 be careful of 小心 be certain of 有把握，确定 be sure of 确信 be glad of 高兴 be sick of 厌恶 be fond of 喜欢 ‎［误］ The work has already been done well. ‎［正］ The work has already been well done. ‎［析］ well 与badly作副词时，表示好坏，如果句子是被动语态，则应放在过去分词之前，如：This machine has been badly damaged. 如果句子是主动语态，则应放于句末，如：I did my homework well. ‎［误］ We are yet in the classroom now. ‎［正］ We are already in the classroom now. ‎［析］ already主要用于肯定句，而yet多用于否定句和疑问句中，如：‎ Did you finish it? No. not yet. ‎［误］ Look. Here comes he! ‎［正］ Look! Here he comes! ‎［误］ Look! Here the bus comes! ‎［正］ Look! Here comes the bus! ‎［析］ 在句子开头用Here时，如主语是人称代词则不要用倒装语序，如果主语是名词则要用倒装语序。 ‎［误］ She is my older sister. ‎［正］ She is my elder sister. ‎［析］ elder 和eldest是用来指家庭中兄弟姐妹的长幼关系，而older, oldest 则是指岁数大多少，如：She is three years older than I. ‎［误］ I'm tired. I can't go further. ‎［正］ I'm tired. I can't go farther. ‎［析］ far有两个比较级 farther 较远的，further 进一步的，如：Do you need any further explanation? 你需要进一步的解释吗?当然它也有两个最高级。farthest和furthest. ‎［误］ I went to Beijing University five years before. ‎［正］ I went to Beijing University five years ago. ‎［析］ ago常与过去时连用，而before则多与完成时连用。 ‎［误］ - Have you finished your homework? ‎- No, not already.  ‎［正］ - Have you finished your homework? ‎- No, not yet.  ‎［析］ 仍然有三个英文字可以表达它们是already， yet 与 still。 要注意的是 already经常用于肯定句中，如The bus has already gone。 而yet 多用于疑问句和否定句中，如：Have you finished your homework yet? 而still则常用于主语与谓语动词之间，如：We still can't decide what to do. 但也有时用于be 动词之后，如：He is still here. ‎［误］ He is very higher than I am. ‎［正］ He is much higher than I am. ‎［析］ much可以用来修饰比较级，而very则用来修饰形容词原级，如：I'm very tired.‎ ‎［误］ - Can I walk to the station?- You'd better not. It is very far.  ‎［正］ - Can I walk to the station? ‎- You'd better not, It is a long way.  ‎［析］ for一般用在疑问句与否定句中，如：How far is it from here to the station? 又如：It isn't far. ‎［误］ I've ever been to America. ‎［正］ I've been to America once. ‎［析］ once 多用于肯定句，而ever则用于疑问句，否定句，及条件状语从句中，如：Have you ever been to London? ‎［误］ - Could you pass the exam this time? ‎- No, I am not afraid so.  ‎［正］ - Could you pass the exam this time? ‎- No, I'm afraid not.  ‎［析］ 在肯定的答语中我们可以用so来代替上句所讲的事件，如：Do you think she is a good student? Yes I think so, /I hope so, /I believe so/ I'm afraid so.但在否定的答语中，英语口语的习惯用法则有所不同，如，I don't think so 而在hope, belive 与 afraid后则常用not， 如：I hope not. ‎［误］ She didn't work enough hard, so she couldn't pass the exam. ‎［正］ She didn't work hard enough, so she couldn't pass the exam. ‎［析］ enough 可以作名词用，如：Enough has been said for how to learn English well. (对于如何学好英语已经讲的足够多了。)另外它可以作为形容词，如：I have enough money (or money enough) to buy this dictionary. 注意 enough作为形容词时即可放于名词前又可放于名词后，在初中范围的考题中多用于名词之前。如果enough 作为副词用，那么它一定要放在被修饰的形容词或副词之后。 ‎［误］ You can't be very careful. ‎［正］ You can't be too careful. ‎［析］ 此句话的含意是你如何小心也不过分。too…to的用法是"太……以至于不能作某事"。但在实际应用时也常常将后面的to省去，如：It is too expensive for me.那对我来讲是太贵了。 ‎［误］ He is good past fifty. ‎［正］ He is well past fifty. ‎［析］ well 作为副词用时除用于"好"之外还有"大大地、远远地"，等意。往往有人对下面两句的对或错有争议； He is well. He is good. 其实这两句都是正确的表达法，只不过其含意不同。He is well是"他身体不错"，而He is good 则为"他是个好人"。 ‎［误］ She is not as half clever as her brother. ‎［正］ She is not half as clever as her brother. ‎［析］ 在as…as结构中要将修饰形容词的数量词倍数及nearly, almost, exactly… 等置于第一个as之前。 ‎［误］ He is same age as Tom. ‎［正］ He is the same age as Tom. ‎［析］ the same…‎ as是固定的用法，其中定冠词the是不可省也不能换成别的词的。 ‎［误］ Mother and her daughter are exactly like. ‎［正］ Mother and her daughter are exactly alike. ‎* like 作为介词，其意为"像"，应用于 look like, be like, sound like, 其后要加宾语。而 alike 是形容词，或副词，如: You and I think alike. The twins are dressed alike。 但 alike 仅作表语而不能用于名词前作定语。 ‎［误］ Who is taller of the two? ‎［正］ Who is the taller of the two? ‎［析］ 两者的比较级之前要加定冠词。 ‎［误］ I have less books than Tom. ‎［正］ I have fewer books than Tom. ‎［析］ less 是 little的比较级，而fewer是few的比较级。less后应加不可数名词而fewer后是可数名词。 ‎［误］ There are three girls in my group. The cleverer is Mary. ‎［正］ There are three girls in my group. The cleverest is Mary. ‎［析］ 在两者之间应用比较级，在三者之间或三者以上的范围内应用最高级。 ‎［误］ The boy sat there as quiet as his sister. ‎［正］ The boy sat there as quietly as his sister. ‎［析］ as…as的用法要注意的是：①在其中间应加形容词或副词的原级，而不可加比较级，也有的语法书中称为同级比较。②要根据句意决定是加形容词还是副词，这要看它具体是修饰动词还是名词而定，如：He is as good as his friend. ‎［误］ The harder you study, and you can learn more. ‎［正］ The harder you study, the more you can learn. ‎［析］ 英文中如果要表达越来越怎样，在初中范围有两种表达法：①比较级+and+比较级。②定冠词+比较级……，如：The nights are getting longer and longer。 要注意的是多音节形容词的比较级前要加more，这样的用法是：more and more 加形容词，如：The girl is growing more and more beautiful. ‎［误］ Studying physics is not so interesting as to learn English. ‎［正］ Studying physics is not so interesting as learning English. ‎［析］ 在作比较时，英语一般要求对比的两部分结构应一致。如用动名词，应都用动名词，用不定式时则都用不定式。但有时在后一个不定式前的符号to可以省略。如：To repair the old one is as much expensive as (to) buy a new one. ‎［误］ The girl is more cleverer than the boy. ‎［正］ The girl is much more clever (much cleverer) than the boy. ‎［析］ clever有两个比较级：cleverer和more clever,要注意的是不能用比较级来修饰比较级。clever的两个比较级也各有不同之处，如用在两种不同性质的比较时多用more clever,如：He is more clever than honest. (他的聪明要远远超过其诚实。) ‎［析］ The boy is the tallest to the three. ‎［正］ The boy is the tallest of the three. ‎［析］ 最高级的范围要用of加复数形式或加集合名词。 ‎［误］ This book is one of the most useful dictionary. ‎［正］ This book is one of the most useful dictionaries. ‎［析］ 在one of 后面最高级形容词后要加可数名词复数。 ‎［误］ This dictionary is the much best one of the EnglishChinese dictionaries.‎ ‎［正］ This dictionary is much the best one of the EnglishChinese dictionaries. ‎ ‎［析］ 在修饰最高级时应用 far/by far/much 加the加最高级。但very例外，如：He is the very best player in the team. ‎［误］ Shanghai is bigger than any other cities in China. ‎［正］ Shanghai is bigger than any other city in China. ‎［析］ 在比较级中表示比较对象时如用any other其后一般要加单数名词。 ‎［误］ Most of stories in this book are written in English. ‎［正］ Most of the stories in this book are written in English. ‎［正］ Most stories in this book are written in English. ‎［析］ "大多数"一词的表达法有most of the +名词，或most+名词。当用前一种结构时，其后面的定冠词不可少。 ‎［误］ The temperature of that room is higher than this room. ‎［正］ The temperature of that room is higher than that of this room. ‎［析］ 比较级用于两句话之间时，比较的部分不可省略掉，但为了避免重复，一般都要用that代替前面的单数名词，而用those代替前面的复数名词，如：The books in that box are bigger than those in this box。 ‎［误］ He is no more here. Maybe he is at home. ‎［正］ He is no longer here. Maybe he is at home. ‎［析］ no more在现代英语中多译为："从此再也不会了"，如：His voice is no more here. 他已经去世了，他的声音不可能再出现了。而用no longer 表达目前的状态。要注意下面几组句子的实际含意：This room is no cleaner than that one.即两间屋子都不干净。(两者都不干净) This room is not cleaner than that one,即这屋子不如那间干净。(前者不如后者干净。即一间干净，一间不干净。) ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1 I think Chinese is ＿＿＿ than maths. Ａ. interesting B more interesting C. most interesting D. the most interesting  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ 在有than作比较的句子中应用形容词的比较级。 ‎2 - What does Lucy like better, singing or dancing? ‎- Singing. of course. She's known to ＿＿＿ it. A. be good at B. be good for ‎ C. be bad at D. be bad for  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ be good at为固定搭配，意为"擅长作某事"。初中英语中有些这样的固定用法应记牢，而不能似是而非。如：be good at, be bad at, be poor in, be week in, be fit for ‎3 The Huang He River is one of ＿＿＿ in China. A. The long river B. the longest river C. the longest rivers D. the longer river  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 在one of + 定冠词+最高级之后的名词应用复数形式。 ‎4 The girl was ＿＿＿ afraid ＿＿＿ she threw her bag away. A. so, that B. too, to C. too, that D. enough, to  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ so…that为"如此怎样以至于如何"，此句意思是：小女孩如此害怕以至于扔下包跑掉了。而too…to的意思为"如何如何，以至于不能作某事"。但to的后面是动词原形，而不是从句。 ‎5 It was ＿＿＿ yesterday than today. A. hot B. hoter ‎ C. hotter D. the hottest  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 用than表达比较的句中应用比较级 。 ‎6 Which subject do you like ＿＿＿ , English Chinese or maths? A. best B. well ‎ C. better D. good  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 在两者之间应用比较级，而在三者之间或三者以上用最高级。 ‎7 None of the students watched it ＿＿＿ . A. careful enough B. enough carefully ‎ C. carefully enough D. enough careful  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 首先应判定是选用用来修饰名词的形容词还是用来修饰动词的副词。这里是修饰watch这一动词，应选用副词。当enough用来修饰副词或形容词时应放于被修饰的形容词或副词之后。 ‎8 ＿＿＿ she eats, ＿＿＿ she'll be. A. More…fat B. The more…fatter C. More…the fatter D. The more…the fatter  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ the+比较级表示"越来越……"本句应译为：她吃得越多，她就会越胖。 ‎9 I don't think English is ＿＿＿ Chinese. A. as important as B. not important as C. not so important D. important as  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ think+宾语从句时，应采用否定主句的形式，如：中文讲，"我认为你不对"，英文应为："我不认为你对"。 I don't think you are right. 所以不能选答案B。而C、D均为不正确的表达法。 ‎10 Miss Gao is a good English teacher. The students in her class ＿＿＿ English.A. are interested in B. are interesting in C. are interested at D. are interesting to  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 过去分词常用来修饰人，而现在分词常用来修饰物，如：an interesting book， 实际上过去分词含有被动之意，如：interested 其含意是"被……所吸引，感动"。而interesting 则为"使人感兴趣的"，如：an interesting man 一个有趣、风趣的人。 ‎11 The twins are together most of the time. So they never feel ＿＿＿ . A. alone B. lonely ‎ C. happily D. friendly  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ alone意为"独自的，一个人的"，它只能作表语不能作定语。I am not alone in doing such a thing.而lonely 意为"寂寞的，孤单的"，如：The old man felt lonely. 要体会两个词的区别，如：The old man lived alone, but he didn't feel lonely. ‎12 What a ＿＿＿ cough! You seem ＿＿＿ ill. A. terrible, terribly B. terribly, terrible C. terrible, terrible D. terribly, terribly  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ terrible是形容词，而terribly是副词，第一个空是修饰名词的，所以应填入形容词。第二个空ill是形容词，这里terribly 是用来修饰ill的。 ‎13 The two friends were ＿＿＿ pleased to see each other that they forgot everything. A. so B. too ‎ C. very D. much  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 这里用的是so…that的固定搭配。 ‎14 Which is ＿＿＿ , Li Lei's box or Han Meimei's box? A. heavy B. heavier ‎ C. more heavier D. the heaviest  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ 两者之间用比较级，三者或以上用最高级。 ‎15 You don't like the same colours and I don't like them, ＿＿＿ . A. too B. also ‎ C. either D. neither  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 在否定句中也应用either, 而不要用too，因too用于肯定句中。 ‎16 Jim is ＿＿＿ at all his lessons. And I'm sure he'll do very ＿＿＿ in the exams. A. well, good B. good, well ‎ C. well, well D. good, good  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ good为形容词，如：He is good. 他是个好人。而well作为身体状况的好坏讲时是形容词，如：He is well为他身体不错，而作为其他意思时为副词，如：He speaks English well. ‎17 You look ＿＿＿ than before， why? A. more thin B. more thinner ‎ C. much more thin D. much thinner  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 多音节形容词才用more或most加形容词来表示其比较级或最高级，而thin的比较级为thinner。 ‎18 Let's go out for supper now. I'm very ＿＿＿ . A. hungry B. angry ‎ C. tired D. thirsty  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ hungry-饿，angry-生气，tired-紧，疲劳，thirsty-口渴。要注意名词的词义。 ‎19 - Can you understand me? ‎- Sorry, I can ＿＿＿ understand you. A. hardly B. almost ‎ C. even D. ever  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ hardly为一否定词，用在句中时应被看作是否定句。在答语中Sorry决定了其意为"听不明白"，所以只能选 hardly。 ‎20 "＿＿＿ do you write to your penfriend?" ‎"About twice a month." A. How often B. How soon ‎ C. How much D. How long  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ how often用来提问某一动作经多久就要发生一次，也就是提问发生的频率。how soon是问从现在起还有多久。 ‎21 Changjiang River is ＿＿＿ river in China  A. long B. longer ‎ C. longest D. the longest  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎22 I'll work ＿＿＿ I can. A. so hardly as B. so hard as ‎ C. as hardly as D. as hard as  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ hard可用作形容词和副词，如：The desk was made of hard wood 又如：It is raining hard。 而 hardly 是副词，其词义是"几乎不"，如：Hardly did I sleep last night. 我昨晚几乎没有睡觉。而且hardly用于句首时要采用倒装语序。as…as即可以用于肯定句，也可以用于否定句，但so…as则只能用于否定句中。 ‎23 It is very ＿＿＿ to listen to him. A. interested B. interesting ‎ C. interested in D. interest  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ interest作为名词有两个词义，①兴趣，②银行中所讲的利息。而其形容词 interesting是"使人感兴趣的"，而interested是"感兴趣的"如：He is interested in English. ‎24 Things are ＿＿＿ worse than I thought. A. more B. few ‎ C. very D. much  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 只有much可以修饰比较级。 ‎25 It is one o'clock, but her father hasn't come back ＿＿＿ . A. already B. still ‎ C. too D. yet  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 完成时的否定句尾要用yet， 而already则用于肯定句。 ‎26 Comrade Chen is ＿＿＿ older than I.  A. very B. more ‎ C. much D. quite  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 只有much可以修饰比较级。可以修饰比较级的词还有much, far, even a little, by far等。 ‎27 She did her homework ＿＿＿ . A. carefully B. careful ‎ C. care D. careless  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 这里应填入副词，而careless是由care加less后辍得来的，less意为"没有"，是否定之意，如：careless-不小心，homeless-无家可归。而carefully为副词。 ‎28 They can't answer the question in Japanese; we can't answer it, ＿＿＿ .A. also B. too ‎ C. either D. neither  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎29 - How are your parents? ‎- They are very ＿＿＿ , thank you. A. good B. kind ‎ C. well D. happy  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 由问句得知其询问的是身体如何，所以well作为身体状况不错时应视为形容词。30 Peter runs ＿＿＿ in our class. A. the fast B. faster ‎ C. fastest D. most fast  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 副词的最高级前可以加定冠词，也可以不加定冠词。 ‎31 We were all ＿＿＿ glad that we sang and danced. A. such B. so ‎ C. very D. quite  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ 在so与that之间只有形容词时不可用such。 ‎32 Kate sings ＿＿＿ Joan. A. as well as B. as good as ‎ C. so good as D. as better as  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 这里well为副词，意为"唱得好"。 ‎33 This egg smells ＿＿＿ , though it looks all right. A. good B. well ‎ C. bad D badly  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ smell为系动词，其后应加形容词，而不是副词。同样的词，还有sound， feel, seem、become(变成)等等，如：Ice feels cold in winter. ‎34 Wait a minute, I have ＿＿＿ to tell you. A. something interested B. something interesting C. interesting something D. anything interesting  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ 修饰不定代词的修饰词要放在不定代词之后。 ‎35 I shall visit you ＿＿＿ next year. A. sometimes B. sometime ‎ C. some time D. some times  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ sometimes 有时，sometime 某一时刻，some time 一段时间， some times 若干次 ‎36 My sister said she would try to speak ＿＿＿ English every day. A. a little B. a few ‎ C. litttle D. few  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ little修饰不可数名词，而a little意为"一些，一点"。 ‎37 I have ＿＿＿ friends here and I often visit them. A. few B. little ‎ C. a few D. a little  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ a few意为"有些"，few后面要加可数名词复数。 ‎38 Of all these books, do you think, which one is ＿＿＿ ? A. interesting B. much interesting C. more interesting D. the most interesting  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ Of all these books 是用来表示最高级的范围 五、 连 词  ‎(一) 知识概要 连词是一种在句子与句子之间，短语之间以及名词等其他词语之间起连接作用的虚词，它不能单独作句子的成份。按其意义可分为并列连词和从属连词两大类。并列连词连接的双方是对等的。常有的并列连词有and, both…and, either…or, neither…nor， not only…but also, as well as等。但如果连接的两部分意义不趋向一致，意义有转折的并列连词有：but, however, while (而)，only (只不过)。还有表示选择关系的并列连词，如：or, or else, otherwise… 再有的是连接双方，互为因果，或表示前因后果的连词有：for, so, therefore (因此)，then等。从属连词在初中范围内常常用来连接名词性从句，如：that, if, whether, 其次用来连接状语从句。其中有原因状语从句，常用的连接词有：when while, as, since, before, after, once, as soon as, until, till 连接条件状语的连词有：if, unless, as long as 等，而原因状语的连接词有because, since, as, now that (既然)。目的、结果、方式、比较、地点等状语从句的连接词有：so that, so…that, such…that, as…as, than,‎ ‎ where… 它们在句子与文章中几乎无处不见。具体用法见下表。 连词用法一览表 ‎ 种类 功用 例句 ‎ 并列连词 连接具有并列关系的 词 He knows neither English nor French. ‎ 短语 Are you going by bus or on foot? ‎ 分句 Mary was a good girl, but she had one shortcoming. ‎ 从属连词 引导： 状语从句 I'll do it as you told me.‎ You will be late unless you hurry. ‎ 连接代词和连接副词 主语从句 What he said proved true.‎ When we'll start has not been decided yet. ‎ 表语从句 This is why he didn't come yesterday.‎ That is where he lives. ‎ 宾语从句 The man asked me which I liked best. I can't understand why she is so late. ‎ 关系代词和关系副词 定语从句 Nicotine is a drug that gets one into the habit of smoking. He came last night when I was out. ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］ Both my parents are not here. They went to the concert just now. ‎［正］ Neither of my parents is here. They went to the concert just now. ‎［析］ 在英语中both一般用于肯定句中，如用于否定句中，其意义也不同于汉语，如：Both of us are not right. 在英语中应被理解为"我们俩不都对。"而Neither of us is right。 才能被理解为"我们俩无一正确"。 ‎［误］ He or his parents has some tickets for the film. ‎［正］ He or his parents have some tickets for the film. ‎［析］ 由or 连接两主语时，谓语动词应与相临近的那一个主语保持一致。 ‎［误］ You should study hard, and you won't pass the exam. ‎［正］ You should study hard, or you won't pass the exam. ‎［析］ or作为连词，这里的意思为"否则"。又如：Hurry up, or you'll be late for school.‎ ‎［误］ Though he is poor, but he is ready to help others. ‎［正］ Though he is poor, he is ready to help others. ‎［正］ He is poor, but he is ready to help others. ‎［析］ "虽然……但是"是中文中的常用结构，但在英文中用了"虽然"则不要用"但是"，用了"但是"则不能再用"虽然"，二者只可用其一。 ‎［误］ Either you or I are on duty. ‎ ‎［正］ Either you or I am on duty. ‎［析］ either…or 连接两个主语时，其谓语动词与相临近的一个主语相呼应，这也叫作就近原则。类似的用法还有or, neither… nor, not only…but also等。 ‎［误］ Tom is our English teacher and teaching English in our school now. ‎［正］ Tom is our English teacher and is teaching English in our school now. ‎［析］‎ ‎ 并列句中常常在后面的句子中作一些省略，以免重复，但不是所有词都可作任意的省略的。当你连接的是两个系动词时，后面的那个系动词不可省略，也就是讲连接的部分不可省略。 ‎［误］ My father likes swimming and to collect stamps. ‎［正］ My father likes swimming and collecting stamps. ‎［析］ 由并列连词连接的两个部分要保持相等的语法结构。如是动名词则都用动名词，如用不定式则都应用不定式，这是初学者要注意的一点。 ‎［误］ My father is reading a newspaper, I am doing my homework. ‎［正］ My father is reading a newspaper while I am doing my homework. ‎［析］ 两个并列句中间不可用逗号连接，要用并列连词来连接。 ‎［误］ My father asked me that if I wanted to learn how to drive. ‎［正］ My father asked me if I wanted to learn how to drive. ‎［析］ 宾语从句的连接词只能有一个不能重复使用。 ‎［误］ We will go both to Beijing and Shanghai. ‎［正］ We will go to both Beijing and Shanghai. ‎［析］ 用both…and…作连接词时，其相连接的部分结构也要相同。 ‎［误］ Not only Mary but also her brothers is going to dance. ‎［正］ Not only Mary but also her brothers are going to dance. ‎［析］ 由not only… but also…连接两个主语时，其重点在其后面的那一个主语，所以谓语形式应采用就近原则。 ‎［误］ The teacher as well as his students are coming. ‎［正］ The teacher as well as his students is coming. ‎［析］ 由as well as 连接两个主语时，谓语动词与as well as 后面的名词无关，而与前面的名词相一致。 ‎［误］ Tom does not swim nor play football. ‎［正］ Tom does not swim or play football. ‎［析］ nor主要用于连接句子的对等连词，如在否定句中连接某一部分时要用or, 但要注意句子的含意，如：This animal does not like a cow or a horse. 这个动物既不像牛也不像马。This animal does not like a cow but a horse. 这个动物不像牛而像马。 ‎［误］ For there is no light in the classroom. The students must have gone home. ‎ ‎［正］ The students must have gone home, for there is no light in the classroom.‎ ‎［析］ 由for引出的原因状语从句在使用时要注意不能将该从句置于句 首，而应置于主句之后，并在主句与从句之间加一逗号。更要注意的是because, as, since与for 4个表示原因的连词中because是因果关系，是最强的一个，而for是最弱的一个。有些语法书中干脆把for叫做并列连词 ‎［误］ My brother will pass the English exam is no question. ‎［正］ That my brother will pass the English exam is no question. ‎［析］ 主语从句的引导词that是不可省略的。这一点不要和宾语从句的引导词相提并论。‎ ‎［误］ This map will show you how will you get to the hotel. ‎［正］ This map will show you how you will get to the hotel. ‎［析］ 名词性从句作宾语从句使用时，最重要的一点是要用陈述语句。特别要注意的是那些使用双宾语的动词，如：tell, ask, show… ‎［误］ While the clock struch ten, all the lights went out. ‎［正］ When the clock struck ten, all the lights went out. ‎［析］ while是强调两个动作在同时进行中，如：While I am doing myhomework, my father is reading a newspaper. 而这里的when是"正当某某时刻"，"就在这一时间点上"，其重点强调在某一特定时刻某动作的发生。 ‎［误］ While I was walking along the street yesterday, I met an old friend. ‎［正］ When I was walking along the street yesterday, I met an old friend. ‎［析］ 这里用when表达在一个动作的进行中，另一个动作突然发生了。正在进行的动作用一进行时态，而突然发生的动作用一般时态。 ‎［误］ While I heard the bad news I felt sad. ‎［正］ When I heard the bad news, I felt sad. ‎［析］ while不能表达一点儿的时间，即瞬时某一时间点。 ‎［误］ After school some students play football, or others go to the library.‎ ‎［正］ After school some students play football, while others go to the library.‎ ‎［析］ while在此处意为"而，然而"。 ‎［误］ She sang when she walked along the dark street. ‎［正］ She sang as she walked along the dark street. ‎［析］ as用于句中时，其要点是强调两个动作的同时进行。这里用when虽然不能讲是语法上的错误，但则看不出来小女孩因独自走黑暗的街道因害怕而唱歌的心情。 ‎［误］ I finished my homework until twelve o'clock last night. ‎［正］ I didn't finished my homework until twelve o'clock last night. ‎［正］ I did my homework until twelve o'clock last night. ‎［析］ until用在句中时其含义是某一动作一直持续到某时结束，那么句中的动词则一定要用持续性动词，如果要用瞬间，或截止性动词时一定要用否定句式。因截止性动作的否定式应看作是持续性的动作。如离开leave是瞬间动作，因一出门即为离开了，而不离开则是长时间的。 ‎［误］ I have studied English when I was twelve. ‎［正］ I have studied English since I was twelve. ‎［析］ since引出的时间状语从句是表达了一个时间点，而这个时间点是主句动作的启始点，所以主句一般要用完成时态。 ‎［误］ Because he didn't study hard, so he didn't pass the exam.  ‎［正］ He didn't pass the exam because he didn't study hard. ‎［析］ because 与 so在英文中两者不能并用的，只能在句中用其一。 ‎［误］ He was such excited that he could not speak. ‎［正］ He was so excited that he could not speak. ‎［析］ so与such的用法可以分为四种情况，①用于单数可数名词之前，其格式是such+不定冠词+形容词+单数可数名词，如：It is such a beautiful book that every child likes it. 也可以用so, 其格式是so+形容词+不定冠词+单数可数名词，如：It was so beautiful a book that every child likes it. ②在不可数名词前或可数名词复数前这时只能用such, 如：It is such good weather that we want to swim. 又如：They are such good students that they can pass the exam easily. ③在few, little， much, many 这4个字前只能用so而不能用such, 如：I have so much money that I can buy everything I want. ④当that前只有形容词或副词时，这时只能用so, 如：She is so beautiful that every one likes her. He ran so fast that I couldn't keep up with him. ‎［误］ He got up earlier this morning so as to that he could catch the first bus. ‎ ‎［正］ He got up earlier this morning so as to catch the first bus. ‎［正］ He got up so earlier that he could catch the first bus. ‎［析］ so…that与so that的用法有相同之处，那就是其后接从句，而so as to 其后要接不定式，即动词原形。这样的词组还有：in order to。 ‎［误］ I want to buy same stamp that you have. ‎［正］ I want to buy the same stamp as you have. ‎［析］ the same…as (that)这是个固定用法，在same前的定冠词是不能少的。而the same…that意为"我要的就是那一个"。而the same…as为"要的是和……一样的东西"。‎ ‎［误］ Before I do not give you the answer, I'll ask you some questions. ‎［正］ Before I give you the answer, I'll ask you some questions. ‎［析］ 这种错误是由于受中文的影响。在中文中可以讲"我没给你答案前"。而英文用了before就不要再用否定句了。 ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1 We bought Granny a present, ＿＿＿ she didn't like it. A. but B. and ‎ C. or D. so  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 由于句意的原因，应选择转折连词。 ‎2 Run quickly, ＿＿＿ we'll miss the early train. A. and B. but ‎ C. so D. or  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ or这里应译为：否则。 ‎3 I'll give the book to him ＿＿＿ he comes back. A. since B. as soon as ‎ C. before D. until  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ as soon as 引出的时间状语从句应用一般现在时表示将来要发生的动作。 ‎4 Don't cross the road ＿＿＿ the light turns green. A. when B. while ‎ C. until D. as  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ until应译为"直到……才"，因为前面的祈使句为否定句。又如：She did not go to bed until her mother came back. 应译为"直到她妈妈回来她才睡觉"。 ‎5 Miss Gao has been a teacher ＿＿＿ 1990. A. before B. after ‎ C. since D. in  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 因为主句为完成时，所以应用 since表示该动作的启始点。 ‎6 - Which would you like better, tea ＿＿＿ milk? ‎- Tea, please. A. but B. and ‎ C. or D. with  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 在疑问句与否定句中应用or来表示一种选择。 ‎7 We love spring ＿＿＿ there's beautiful flowers every where. A. though B. but ‎ C. or D. because  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 因为这里表示的是因果关系。 ‎8 Please leave ＿＿＿ 7∶００, then you'll be able to get ＿＿＿ there earlier. A. till, in B. from, / ‎ C. before, / D. behind, to  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ before为在７∶００之前离开。 ‎9 The teacher didn't begin the lesson ＿＿＿ all the students stopped talking. A. until B. after ‎ C. if D. because  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 这句应译为"直到所有的学生都停止讲话老师才开始上课"。因begin为瞬间动词，所以应用否定句。 ‎10 Betty didn't go to see the film yesterday ＿＿＿ she was ill. A. but B. until ‎ C. if D. because  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 这里是表示因果关系，所以应用because。因为她病了所以未去看电影。 ‎11 You must start right now, ＿＿＿ you'll miss the train. A. for B. and ‎ C. so D. or  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ or译为"否则"。本句句意为：你必须马上走了，否则要赶不上火车了。 ‎12 ＿＿＿ he is a child of six, he can read and write. A. Whose B. If ‎ C. Though D. Because  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 这种状语从句在英语中称为让步状语从句，应译为：虽然他才是个6岁的孩子，他却可以读书和写字。 ‎13 I like fish, ＿＿＿ chicken, ＿＿＿ eggs. A. and, and B. and, with ‎ C. /, and D. and, /  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ 在有若干个名词或动词出现时，每一个词之间只用逗号连接，只在最后两个词之间加and。如：The old man passed the street, went into a shop and bought some food。‎ ‎14 Take this dictionary with you ＿＿＿ you may use it in class. A. when B. in order to ‎ C. but D. so that  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ so that应译为"为的是"。本句句义为：带上字典，为的是在上课时可能有用。而in order to 其后应接动词不定式，如：Take this dictionary with you in order to use it in class。 ‎15 I hope ＿＿＿ will be fine tomorrow. A. it B. what ‎ C. whether D. when  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ hope后接的是宾语从句，而且宾语从句中少主语，应用it来代替天气。 ‎16 ＿＿＿ she was not well, I decided to go without her. A. Though B. As ‎ C. When D. Because of  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ as这里应译为"由于"。全句意为：由于她不舒服，我决定不带她去了。而because of 其后不能接从句只能接宾语。如： Because of the heavy rain, we decided not to go。‎ ‎17 My aunt bought me ＿＿＿ many story books that I spent a lot of time them. A. such…on B. such…in ‎ C. too…in D so…on  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 因many前只能用so来修饰，所以只能选择D选项。而spend…on something 为在某事上花费时间或钱。如：She spent a lot of money on her clothes。 ‎18 Mother was cooking ＿＿＿ she ＿＿＿ a knock at the door. A. when, listen to B. while, listened to C. while, heard D. when, heard  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ when在这里应译为：就在那时，那一刻，那一瞬间。 ‎19 Speak slowly, ＿＿＿ we can understand you. A. and B. or ‎ C. if D. because  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ and这里是并列连词，应译为：请讲慢些这样我们就会明白你的意思。 ‎20 You'll learn English well ＿＿＿ you put your heart into it. A. if B. so ‎ C. until D. or  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎［析］ 本句译为：如果你将心放在学习上，你就会将英语学好。这里的语法现象是从句中用一般现在时表示将来。 ‎21 I won't let you in ＿＿＿ you show me your pass. A. until B. for ‎ C. since D. because  ‎［答案］ A.  ‎22 She didn't go to school ＿＿＿ she was ill. A. why B. because ‎ C. where D. but  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎ ‎ 六、 介 词 ‎(一) 知识概要 介词在英语中用法很活，也无一定规律可循。在初中范围内还应学一个记住一个，特别是那些和动词的特殊搭配。这样长期下去不断学习自然会总结出一套自己的规律来。下面是一般的规律，可帮助学习时参考，千万不要作为定律去背诵，照搬。 ‎ 介词 表示时间 表示地点方位 表示原因方式 其 他 ‎ about 大约在……时间about five o'clock 在周围，大约多远about five kilometres 关于、涉及 talk about you ‎ ‎ above 高出某一平面 ‎ above sea level ‎ ‎ across 横过 walk across the street对面 across the street ‎ after 在……之后 after supper ‎ 跟……后面 one after another ‎ 追赶 run after you ‎ ‎ against 背靠逆风 against the wall, against the wind ‎ 反对 be against you ‎ ‎ among 三者以上的中间 among the trees ‎ ‎ ‎ at 在某时刻 at ten ‎ 在小地点 at the school gate ‎ 表示速度 at high speed ‎ ‎ 向着，对着 at me ‎ ‎ before 在……之前 before lunch ‎ 位于……之前 sit before me ‎ ‎ behind 位于……之后 behind the tree ‎ ‎ below 低于……水平 below zero ‎ 不合格 below the standard ‎ ‎ by 到……时刻，在……时刻之前 by five o'clock ‎ 紧挨着 site by site ‎ 乘坐交通工具by air, by bick 被由 was made by us ‎ ‎ during 在……期间during the holidays ‎ for 延续多长时间 for five years ‎ 向……去 leave for Shanghai 为了，对于 be good for you ‎ ‎ from 从某时到……某时from morning till night 来自何方 from New York ‎ 由某原料制成be made from ‎ ‎ 来自何处 where are you from ‎ ‎ in 在年、月、周较长时间内in a week 在里面 in the room ‎ 用某种语言in English 穿着 ‎ in red ‎ ‎ into 进入……里面 walk into ‎ 除 分 divide into ‎ ‎ 变动 turn into water ‎ ‎ near 接近某时near five years 在……附近near the park ‎ of 用某种原料制成 be made of ‎ ‎ 属于……性质 a map of U. S .A ‎ ‎ on 某日、某日的上下午on Sunday afternoon 在……上面 on the desk 靠吃……为生live on rice 关于a book on Physics ‎ over 渡过一整段时间work over night 在上方 over the desk ‎ 超过， 高于over five pairs ‎ past 超过某一时刻 ten past five ‎ 经过某地 walk past the park ‎ ‎ since 从某时以来 since 1980‎ ‎ 原因 Since you were ill ‎ ‎ through 经过某一时期through his life 通过、穿过某地 through the forest ‎ tilluntil 直到某时为止till five o'clock ‎ to 差多少时间 five to ten ‎ 问，到，去往 to Shanghai ‎ 面对面 face to face ‎ ‎ 给予give a book to me ‎ under 在……下面 under the desk ‎ 少于 under ten ‎ 在……管制之 下 under the rule ‎ with 用某种工具with a pen 带着，具有 with me ‎ ‎ without 没有 without air ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎(二) 正误辨析 ‎［误］ We got to the top of the mountain in daybreak. ‎［正］ We got to the top of the mountain at day break. ‎［析］ at用于具体时刻之前，如：sunrise, midday, noon, sunset, midnight, night。‎ ‎［误］ Don't sleep at daytime ‎［正］ Don't sleep in daytime. ‎［析］ in 要用于较长的一段时间之内，如：in the morning / afternoon, 或 in the week / month / year. 或 in spring / supper /autumn / winter等等。 ‎［误］ We visited the old man in Sunday afternoon. ‎［正］ We visited the old man on Sunday afternoon. ‎［析］ in the morning, in the afternoon 如果在这两个短语中加入任何修饰词其前面的介词都要改为on, 如：on a cold morning, on the morning of July 14th ‎［误］ He became a writter at his twenties ‎［正］ He became a writter in his twenties ‎［析］ 这句话应译为：他在20多岁时就成了作家。在某人的一段生活时间段中要用介词in来表示，而在具体岁数时用at来表示。 ‎［误］ He went to New York to find a job in sixteen years old. ‎［正］ He went to New York to find a job at sixteen. ‎［析］ 在具体年岁前用at, 如：at the age of 12， at your age， 等等。 ‎［误］ We went to swim in the river in a very hot day. ‎［正］ We went to swim in the river on a very hot day. ‎［析］ 具体某一天要用介词on, 又如：on New Year's Day ‎［误］ I'm looking forward to seeing you on Christmas. ‎［正］ I'm looking for ward to seeing you at Christmas. ‎［析］ 在节日的当天用on，而全部节日期间用at,Christmas是圣诞节期间，一般要有两周或更长的时间。 ‎［误］ I haven't see you during the summer holidays. ‎［正］ I haven't seen you since the beginning of the summer holidays. ‎［析］ during表示在某一段时间之内，所以一般不与完成时搭配，如：I visited a lot of museums during the holiday. 而for表示一段时间，可以用于完成时，如：I haven't see you for a long time. 而through 用来表示时间时则为"整整，全部的时间"。如：It rained through the night.而since则是表达主句动作的起始时间，一般要与完成时连用。 ‎［误］ At entering the classroom, I heard the good news. ‎［正］ On entering the classroom, I heard the good news. ‎［析］ On 加动名词表示"一……就"。本句的译文应是：我一进入教室就听见这个好消息了。又如：on hearing… 一听见， on arrival 一到达就……(on表示动作的名词) ‎［误］ In the beginning of the book, there are some interesting stories. ‎［正］ At the beginning of the book, there are some interesting stories. ‎［析］ at the begining与at the end都是指某事物的开始与结束部分，均不指时间范围，而in the beginning 则是指开始一段时间。in the end＝at ‎ last是指"最终，终于"之意。 ‎［误］ Till the end of next week. I will have finished this work. ‎［正］ By the end of next week. I will have finished this work. ‎［析］ by 引起的时间状语表示了动作的截止点，其意思为"不迟于某一时刻将工作做完"，所以主句一般是完成时态。当然可以有将来时态，如：I'll be there by five o'clock.而till则表达其一动作一直持续到某一时刻，但句中的动词一定要用持续性动词，而瞬间的截止性动词应用其否定句式，如：I won't finish this work till(until) next weekend. ‎［误］ He came to London before last weekend. ‎［正］ He had come to London before last weekend. ‎［正］ He came to London two weeks ago. ‎［析］ before 一般要与完成时连用，而ago则与一般过去时连用。 ‎［误］ I have studied English for three years gince I had come here. ‎［正］ I have studied English for three years since I came here. ‎［析］ since用来表达主句动作的开始时间，所以其引出的从句中应为过去时，而不能用完成时态 ‎［误］ I can help you repair this bike. You will get it after two hours. ‎［正］ I can help you repair this bike. You will get it in two hours. ‎［析］ 中文经常讲两小时之后来取，两天内会修好，而这个介词在英文中要用in而不要用after。其原因有二，①after 多用于过去时，如：I arrived in New York. After three days, I found a job in the bank. ② after 加时间是表达一个不确定的时间范围，如：after three days, 即三天之后的哪一天都可以。所以在许诺若干时间内会完成某事时，一定要用介词in。 ‎［误］ Three days after he died. ‎［正］ After three days he died. ‎［正］ Three days later he died. ‎［析］ after 与 later都可以用来表达一段时间之后，但它们所处的位置不同，after 在时间词前，而later在时间词后。 ‎［误］ She hid herself after the tree. ‎［正］ She hid herself behind the tree. ‎［析］ after多用来表达某动作之后，所以有的语法书中称它为动态介词，如：I run after him. After finishing my homework, I went to see a film. 而behind则多用于静态事物之后。 ‎［误］ There is a beautiful bird on the tree. ‎［正］ There is a beautiful bird in the tree. ‎［析］ 树上长出的果实，树叶要用on, 而其他外来的人、物体均要用in the tree. ‎［误］ Shanghai is on the east of China. ‎［正］ Shanghai is in the east of China. ‎［析］ 在表达地理位置时有3个介词：in, on, to。 in表示在某范围之内; on表示与某地区接壤；to则表示不相接。如：Japan is to the east of China.  ‎［误］ I arrived at New York on July 2nd. ‎［正］ I arrived in New York on July 2nd. ‎［析］ at用来表达较小的地方，而in用来表达较大的地方。at常用于at the ‎ school gate, at home, at a bus stop, at the station, at the cinema, at a small village。 ‎［误］ He lived in No. 3 Beijing Road. ‎［正］ He lived at No. 3 Beijing Road. ‎［析］ 在门牌号码前要用at, 并要注意它的惯用法：at the end of the street, at the foot of the mountain, at the top of the page。 ‎［误］ There is a colour TV set at the corner of the hall. ‎［正］ There is a colour TV set in the corner of the hall. ‎［析］ 在屋内的角落应用in，而墙的外角用at，如：There is a tree at the corner of the street. ‎［误］ This weekend I'll stay in Uncle Wang's. ‎［正］ This weekend I'll stay at Uncle Wang's. ‎［析］ 要注意英文的特殊表达法，如：at a tailor's shop (裁缝店)＝at a tailor's, at the doctor's (去看病) at the bookseller's (在书店) at uncle Wang's (在王叔叔家)‎ ‎［误］ Do you know there is some good news on today's newspaper? ‎［正］ Do you know there is some good news in today's newspaper? ‎［析］ 在报纸上的新闻要用in, 而在具体某一版上，或某一页上则要用on。 ‎［误］ The school will begin on September 1st. ‎［正］ School will begin on September 1st. ‎［析］ 这里的school应看作不可数名词泛指学校的课程，即开学之意。要注意，有些活动场所当表达正在从事该种活动时不要加冠词，如：at table (吃饭)， When I came to Tom's home, they were at table. 还有： at desk (学习)，at work (工作) at school (上学)， in hospital (住医院) at church 作礼拜如加上定冠词则另有他意，如：at the school 即在学校工作或办事，in the hospital 即在医院工作或去看望病人。 ‎［误］ In my way to the station, I bought a newspaper to kill time. ‎［正］ On my way to the station, I bought a newspaper to kill time. ‎［析］ 译文为：在去车站的路上我买了份报纸，为的是消磨时光"在……的路上"应用on one's way…。而 in the way 有挡道之意，如：Please move the chair it is in the way。‎ ‎［误］ Look, the door is open, Maybe someone broke into. ‎［正］ Look, the door is open, Maybe someone broke in. ‎［正］ Look, the door is open, Maybe someone broke into the office. ‎［析］ in是表达一个静止状态，在与break连用时其后不加介词宾语，而into则是动态介词，与break连用时要加介词宾语。 ‎［误］ I'll leave Beijing to Shanghai tomorrow. ‎［正］ I'll leave Beijing for Shanghai. ‎［正］ I'll leave for Shanghai. ‎［析］ leave for 是离开某地去某处的固定搭配，不可将for改为别的介词。这样的搭配还有：start for 动身前往某处，set out for， sail for。 ‎［误］ I'm sorry. I have to get out the bus at next stop. ‎［正］ I'm sorry. I have to get out of the bus at next stop. ‎［析］ get in, 与 get out是两个相反的词组。get in 为上车，而get out为下车，但语法家认为这里的in与out为副词，所以其后不能接名词，我们可以讲We'd better get in. 或We'd better get out. 还有一组词组有关上下车：get on／off(a ‎ train, a ship, a struck) get into／out of (a car, taxi…) ‎［误］ Be careful The temperature of the water is ninety degrees over zero.‎ ‎［正］ Be careful. The temperature of the water is ninety degrees above zero.‎ ‎［析］ over 与 above 在作为比某物高的意思时有时可以互换。但在垂直方向上的高矮时，即正上方时则要用above.而泛指上方时用over. ‎［误］ There is an old stone bridge above the river. ‎［正］ There is an old stone bridge over the river. ‎［析］ over还有一意为"跨越，横跨"。 ‎［误］ The Dead Sea is under the sea level. ‎［正］ The Dead Sea is below the sea level. ‎［析］ 在垂直下方要用below.也就是讲above与below互为反意词，over与under也是反意词。‎ ‎［误］ There is a big tree in the front of the house. ‎［正］ There is a big tree in front of the house.  ‎［析］ in front of 是在物体外部的前面，而in the front of 是在物体内部的前面，如：The driver sits in the front of the bus. ‎［误］ It took them two days to walk across the forest. ‎［正］ It took them two days to walk through the forest. ‎［析］ across 作为介词有两个主要意思：① 横过，如：I want to walk across the street.② 对面，如：There is a post office across the street,而through 多用于三维空间中的穿越。across则多用于平面上的横过。如：The little girl ran across the room to meet her mother. ‎［误］ The sun sets toward the west. ‎［正］ The sun sets in the west. ‎［析］ towards也可用作toward，它主要表达朝向某方向运动，但不一定到达，如：He ran toward(s) the mountain.而在表示方位east, west, north, south 时，其前面要用in。要注意的是这4个词可以用作副词，如：I went south. 也可用作名词，如：I went to the south.也可用作形容词，如：I went to the south part of China. ‎［误］ Do you have no other clothes except those? ‎［正］ Do you have no other clothes besides those? ‎［析］ beside 是"在……旁边"，如：The students stood beside their teachers.而besides是"除……之外，不仅……而且……，除了……以外还有……"， 如：I studied English besides French, when I was in college. 而except 则是从同一类物体中去掉某一部分，如：I come here every day except Sunday. 而except for 是指去掉不同种类的事物，如：The room is clean except for two chairs. 而except that则要加从句。 ‎［误］ Can I write the exam paper with ink? ‎［正］ Can I write the exam paper with a pen? ‎［正］ Can I write the exam paper in ink? ‎［析］ with后要加拿得起来放得下的工具，而墨水、颜料等原料则要用in。 ‎［误］ I'm earlier today. I came here by his car. ‎［正］ I'm earlier today. I came here in his car. ‎［析］ 在交通工具前加介词by，但不能再有任何指示代词或冠词，否则要改换相应的介词。by taxi=in a taxi ‎ by train=in a train ‎ by bicycle=on a bicycle by ship=on a ship ‎ by boat=in a boat ‎ by bus=on a bus by plane=on a plane ‎ by air 空运 ‎ by land 陆运 by sea 海运 ‎ on foot on horseback by phone by letter by radio by air mail by hand ‎［误］ A lot of French wines are made of grape. ‎［正］ A lot of French wines are made from grape. ‎［析］ made of 是指由原材料到成品过程中原材料未发生质地的变化，而发生了某种变化则要用from,如：The desk was made of hard wood. ‎［误］ This is a good dictionary in English grammar. ‎［正］ This is a good dictionary on English grammar. ‎［析］ 关于某方面的书籍、报告等有两个介词，其中on表示某专业用书，about则为某方面的普通读物，如：This is a book about physics.即物理科普知识。 ‎［误］ Do you have the key of the door.  ‎［正］ Do you have the key to the door. ‎［析］ key to the door门的钥匙。相同用法还有answer to the question, entrance to the highway, danger to health.千万不要用of。 ‎［误］ Today a lot of Chinese people have interest of collecting stamps. ‎［正］ Today a lot of Chinese people have interest in collecting stamps. ‎［析］ have interest in是在某方面有兴趣。 ‎［误］ I didn't do my homework, so the teacher was angry to me. ‎［正］ I didn't do my homework, so the teacher was angry with me. ‎［析］ be angry with其后接人，而be angry at其后接事。如：He was angry at what she said. ‎［误］ He was good for skating. ‎［正］ He was good at skating. ‎［析］ be good at 为"擅长某事"，而be good for somebody为对某人很好。 ‎［误］ It was good to you to help my little boy. ‎［正］ It was good of you to help my little boy. ‎［析］ 这句话应译为：你真太好了，帮助了我的小孩。而be good to somebody 是对某人态度好。如：Her mother is good to everyone. ‎［误］ My parents were very pleased at me. ‎［正］ My parents were very pleased with me. ‎［正］ My parents were very pleased at my studying. ‎［析］ be pleased with后加somebody, 而be pleased at后加something。 ‎［误］ He is agree with me. ‎［正］ He agrees with me. ‎［误］ He againsts me. ‎［正］ He is against me. ‎［析］ 同意agree为动词，而反对against则为介词。在使用中一定要注意。 ‎［误］ I haven't heard letters from him. ‎［正］ I haven't heard from him. ‎［析］ hear from 即为：从某人处得到信件。不要再加letter了。 ‎［误］ Teacher. May I call at you this weekend? ‎［正］ Teacher. May I call on you this weekend? ‎［析］ 作为"拜访"讲call at其后接地点，如：May I call at your home this weekend?而call on其后接人。 ‎［误］ Do you know the girl on white? ‎［正］ Do you know the girl in white? ‎［析］ in white为穿一身白。与in有关的词组有：in bed(睡觉)，in hospital(住院)，in a hurry(匆匆忙忙)，in danger(危险中),in joy (高兴)，in good health(身体好)，in love(恋爱)，in trouble(困境)，与之相反的是out of ,如：out of trouble (摆脱困境)，out of date(过时了)， out of order(出故障) ‎［误］ He looked at me at surprise. ‎［正］ He looked at me in surprise. ‎［析］ surprise的用法一般有三种。①用于句首，To one's surprise, 如：To my surprise he succeeded. ② be surprised at, 如：I was surprised at the news. ③用于句尾in surprise. ‎［误］ She didn't come to school because of she was ill. ‎［正］ She didn't come to school because she was ill. ‎［析］ because of 后接名词，如：The game was put off because of the rain. ‎(三) 例题解析 ‎1 - Thank you ＿＿＿ the beautiful flowers! ‎- Not at all. A in B on C at D for  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ 由于某事向某人道谢应用for。 ‎2 Can you answer this question ＿＿＿ English? A by B in C with D from  ‎［答案］ B.  ‎［析］ in 表示用语言、声音、或材料，如：He answered the question in a low voice.‎ ‎3 Look ＿＿＿ the map ＿＿＿ China ＿＿＿ the wall, please. A after, of, in B at, of, in ‎ C after, in, on D at, of, on  ‎［答案］ D.  ‎［析］ look at 为"看"，而on the wall为"在墙表面挂着"，而in the wall 则是"在墙内"，如：There is hole in the wall.墙上有个洞。 ‎4 - When did Mr Green arrive in London? ‎- He arrived there ＿＿＿ the evening of December 6th. A at B in C on D to ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ in the evening / afternoon这两个词组不论是在其前或后加上任何修饰词都应将介词换为on,如：on a cold morning, on a spring morning等。 ‎5 We won the relay race. And there was a big smile ＿＿＿ our teacher's face. A off B near C on D between ‎［答案］ C.  ‎6 The twins got on well ＿＿＿ their classmates. A to B in C with D about  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎［析］ get on well with与人相处很好。 ‎7 - Please remember to come to my birthday party. ‎- I see. I'll come ＿＿＿ Saturday evening. A in B at C on D for  ‎［答案］ C.  ‎8　 Let's hurry， or we'll be late ＿＿＿ school A　to B　at C　with D　for  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ be late for， 而 come late to， 如： Don't come late to school ‎9　 They will have a maths test ＿＿＿ two days A　for B　at C　in D　after  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 三天之内应用in，而不要受中文影响用after， after three days 是个不定的时间范围，即没有一个准确的时间。5天、6天、10天全是after three days。 ‎10　 My brother joined the army ＿＿＿ A　1989， March B　in March， 1989 ‎ C　March， 1989 D　1989， in March  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 在月份、年、前用介词in，而日子前用on。 ‎11　 He couldn't work out the maths problem ＿＿＿ your help A　without B　under C　for D　with  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 在某人帮助下应用with， 如：With the help of the teacher I passed the exam easily　而要是没有你的帮助则用 without your help ‎12　 Granny took one look at us ＿＿＿ her glasses A　by B　through C　on D　in  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ through 为穿过……。 ‎13　 We had our breakfast ＿＿＿ a quarter ＿＿＿ seven A　/， to B　in， to C　at， to D　on， to  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 具体时间点前用at，而差几分几点用to，这里应译为：我在差一刻七点吃的早饭。‎ ‎14　 I learn French ＿＿＿ the radio every day A　on B　in C　from D　at  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 从收音机中听到某事应用词组 on the radio。 ‎15　 It's good manners to wait ＿＿＿ line A　in B　on C　at D　with  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ in line 为排队。 ‎16　 How many English words had you learnt ＿＿＿ last term? A　by the end of B　at the end of ‎ C　to the end of D　till the end of  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ by the end of 为动作的截止时间，与完成时态相配合 ‎17　 The manager was very satisfied ＿＿＿ his work A　in B　on C　about D　with  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ be satisfied with 为固定搭配。 ‎18　 John hit Jack ＿＿＿ face A　on the B　in the C　on his D　in his  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 英文中的某些动词其后要接人，然后加介词＋the＋身体部位，如：He caught the boy by the arm。 ‎19　 I was born ＿＿＿ the night ＿＿＿ September 15， 1978 A　in， on B　at， on C　at， in D　on， of  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 在时间前加介词时应以最小的时间单位为准。 ‎20　 It's a bad manner to laugh ＿＿＿ people when they are ＿＿＿ trouble A　over， in B　at， in C　in， at D　at， for  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ laugh at 嘲笑某人， laugh over 笑着谈论某人或某事， in trouble 陷入困境。‎ ‎21　 I can't do this work well ＿＿＿ Tom's help A　under B　for C　without D　from  ‎［答案］ C. ‎22　 Don't shout ＿＿＿ the old woman。　You should be more polite ＿＿＿ her A　to， at B　at， to C　in， for D　from， for  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ shout at 为"冲某人喊叫"，而 be polite to somebody 为"对某人和气。" ‎23　 We must be strict ＿＿＿ our selves ＿＿＿ everything A　with， in B　in， with C　with， to D　to， of  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ be strict with 对某人严格要求。 ‎24　 He went to the football match ＿＿＿ lunch last Sunday A　to B　without C　behind D　between  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ without lunch 未吃午饭。 ‎25　 The people's Republic of China was founded ＿＿＿ 1949 A　with B　on C　since D　in  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 在年代前用in。因句子是过去时而不是完成时，所以不能用since。 ‎26　 Mr Black got to Hangzhou ＿＿＿ a few days A　in B　after C　on D　at  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这句话应译为：几天之后 Mr　Black 到达了杭州。而不是在几天之内一定要做完某事，所以选B。 ‎27　 - Has the teacher given you any advice ＿＿＿ your English study? ‎- Yes， he has A　from B　with C　on D　in ‎  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 给予某一方面问题的忠告其介词用on。 ‎28　 You may depend ＿＿＿ him　He is ＿＿＿ honest man A　on， a B　in， an C　on， an D　at， the  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ depend on 为"依靠某人或某事"，而 honest 的首字母 h 不发音。 ‎29　 ＿＿＿ my joy， I can answer this question A　With B　To C　By D　For  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ To one's joy 意为"使我高兴的是。" ‎30　 The teacher asked the students to look ＿＿＿ the word in the dictionary A　for B　at C　up D　after  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ look for 寻找， look at 看， look after 照顾， look up 查字典。 ‎31　 A little monkey is playing ＿＿＿ a tree and there are a lot of bananas ＿＿＿ it A　on， on B　in， on C　on， in D　in， in  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 树上长出的果实为 on the tree　而其他外来之物要用 in the tree， 表达在树上。 ‎32 I go to school ＿＿＿ bus every morning.‎ A. in B. by C. on D. at ‎  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ by后直接加交通工具，表示乘某种交通工具去某地。‎ 33 No one likes a person ＿＿＿ bad manners.‎ A. without B. on C. out of D. with ‎  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ with bad manners 有不良习惯的人。‎ 34 The policeman was surprised ＿＿＿ the news.‎ A. into B. for C. at D. out of ‎  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ be surprised at 对某事吃惊。‎ 35 He had to sell newspapers ＿＿＿ seven.‎ A. at an age of B. at the ages of C. at the age of D. at age of ‎  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ at the age of 在几岁时。‎ 36 The little girl couldn't help ＿＿＿ when she saw a large dog.‎ A. cried B. to cry C. crying D. cries ‎  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ couldn't help＋动名词表示情不自禁地去做某事，或禁不住做某事。‎ 37 Jack was born ＿＿＿ March 1st, 1978.‎ A. on B. in C. at D. of ‎  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 日期，时间前的介词按其表达语中的最小单位计算。‎ 38 Edison was very interested ＿＿＿ science when he was a boy.‎ A. to B. on C. in D. about ‎  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ be interested in something 对某事感兴趣。‎ 39 The teacher was very satisfied ＿＿＿ her answer. A. in B. on C. for D. with ‎  ［答案］ D.‎ 40 The story happened ＿＿＿ Beijing.‎ A. in B. with C. for D. on ‎  ［答案］ A.‎ ‎ ‎ 七、 数 词  (一) 知识概要 数词用来表示人或物的数目多少和顺序。所以数词主要有两种：基数词，用于计数，如：one, two…而序数词用于表示位置先后或次序，台：first second…其构成法如下： 阿拉伯数字 基数词 序数词 简写序数词 ‎ ‎1 one first 1st ‎ ‎2 two second 2nd ‎ ‎3 three third 3rd ‎ ‎4 four fourth 4th ‎ ‎5 five fifth 5th ‎ ‎6 six sixth 6th ‎ ‎7 seven seventh 7th ‎ ‎8 eight eighth 8th ‎ ‎9 nine ninth 9th ‎ ‎10 ten tenth 10th ‎ ‎11 eleven eleventh 11th ‎ ‎12 twelve twelfth 12th ‎ ‎13 thirteen thirteenth 13th ‎ ‎14 fourteen fourteenth 14th ‎ ‎15 fifteen fifteenth 15th ‎ ‎16 sixteen sixteenth 16th ‎ ‎17 seventeen seventeenth 17th ‎ ‎18 eighteen eighteenth 18yh ‎ ‎19 nineteen nineteenth 19th ‎ ‎20 twenty twentieth 20th ‎ ‎21 twenty-one twenty-first 21st ‎ ‎30 thirty thirtieth 30th ‎ ‎40 forty fortieth 40th ‎ ‎50 fifty fiftieth 50th ‎ ‎60 sixty sixtieth 60th ‎ ‎70 seventy seventieth 70th ‎ ‎80 eighty eightieth 80th ‎ ‎90 ninety ninetieth 90th ‎ ‎100 a(one)hundred hundredth 100th ‎ ‎104 one hundred and four hundred and fourth 104th ‎ ‎1000 a(one) thounsand thounsandth 1000th ‎ ‎10000 ten thounsand ten thounsandth 10000th ‎ ‎1000000 one million millionth 1000000th ‎ 基数词与序数词都有一定的构成方法，但都有特殊例外的几个字，所以除了要学会一般构成法之外，还要特别记熟一些例外。因它们在考试中出现的频率很高。‎ 1 基数词构成结构 21～99的两位数字，在10位和个位之间加连字符构成，如89-eighty-nine.１０１～９９９的三位数字，由hundred 加and 再加二位数或未位数字，如： 101-one hundred and one, 223-two hundred and twenty-three.四位以上数字，应从个位起向前数三位加逗号，读作thousand,再数三位加第二个逗号，读作million,再数三位加逗号，读作billion，其读法如下：‎ 1001-one thousand and one５３８６-five thousand, three hundred and eighty－six要注意的是hundred, thousand, million与billion的用法。①前面有别的基数词时，即若干个百、千、百万、十亿时，其本身都不要加s，如：three hundred students。 ② 若表示成百，成千或数百，数千时，前面不能有基数词，但其本身要用复数形式，然后+of+名词复数。如：thousands and thousands of。 (成千上万)‎ 2 序数词的构成法 序数词除first, second, third 以外，其余一般在词尾加th构成，除一般略有差异的各别数词外，很容易掌握。其二位数或多位数只将后面的个位数字改为序数词，其前面各位数字均不改变，都用基数词。‎ 3 其他数字表示法 小数的小数点读作point，零读作o［ｕ］或zero,小数点后面的数字按个位基数词依次读出。分数分子用基数词，分母用序数词，当分子大于1时，分数要在序数词上加s，但１／２用one half, 1 4 用a quarter. １ ３ 读作one third而 ２ ３ 读作two thirds。百分数(%)，读作per cent (percent),但不论是多少均用作单数形式不能加s。表示日期有两种说法和四种写法，如：2月1号英语表达法为：the first of February而美语为February (the) first,但其书写上可有四种写法①　February 1 ② February 1st ③ 1st February ④ 1/2。倍数的讲法有所不同。两倍用twice,而三倍以上用序数词加times,如：He has three times as many books as I have.‎  (二) 正误辨析  ［误］ 1107 should be read as a thousand a hundred as seven.‎  ［正］ 1107 should be read as one thousand one hundred and seven.‎  ［析］ 在读数字时，如：and前只有百或千时，用one hundred/ one thousand 还是a hundred /a thousand全是可以的。但如果文有百又有千时，则只能用one不要用a。 如果没有and时，如：1100也只能读作one thousand one hundred 或eleven hundred.‎  ［误］ I drove about half mile.‎  ［正］ I drove about half a mile.‎  ［析］ 半小时为half an hour, 半天为half a day, 半镑为half a pound, 尽量避免用half a year, half a month, 要用six months, two weeks 或 fifteen days 要注意的是Half of the work is done Half of the books are sold. 当Half 作名词时，其谓语动词要看of后面的名词而定。如名词是不可数名词则用单数谓语动词，如是复数名词时，则要用复数谓语动词。要注意的是一个半的表达法，如：One and ‎ a half apples is left on the table.其名词要用复数，但谓语动词则要用单数。‎  ［误］ 60 students are playing on the ground.‎  ［正］ Sixty students are playing on the ground.‎  ［析］ 在句首的数字要用文字而不要用阿拉伯数字，如数字过大则应放于句中，用阿拉伯数字。如： There are 166 students playing on the ground.‎  ［误］ He became famous around fifty years old.‎  ［正］ He became famous in his fifties.‎  ［析］ in his fifties 50多岁时，而in the fiflies 在50年代。‎  ［误］ There are about two thousands workers in our factory.‎  ［正］ There are about two thousand workers in our factory  ［析］ 几千，几百的表达法是基数词加thousand或加hundred,而且均不要加s。这样的单位还有dozen(打)， score (20年)等。‎  ［误］ In the morning there are hundred of old people walking in the park.‎  ［正］ In the morning there are hundreds of old people walking in the park.‎  ［析］ 当表达数百，数千时，要用hundreds of和thousands of 这一结构。‎  ［误］ The class begins at eight a. m.‎  ［正］ The class begins at 8 a. m.‎  ［析］ 与符号或与缩写的字母连用时一定要用数字，如：43%， 67, No.2…‎  ［误］ Twofifth of the books are sold out.‎  ［正］ Twofifths of the books are sold out.‎  ［析］ 分数表示法，分子用基数词，分母用序数词，但分子大于1时，分母要在序数词后加s。‎  ［误］ Tom was born on July eighteen.‎  ［正］ Tom was born on July eighteenth.‎  ［析］ 月日的表达法有美语和英语两种。 美语 July 18 读作 July eighteenth 英语 July 18th 读作 July the eighteenth  ［误］ I'll go to school at 7∶３０ a. m. in the morning.‎  ［正］ I'll go to school at 7∶３０ a. m/ at 7∶３０ in the morning.‎  ［析］ a. m 即表达在早上之意，不要再用in the morning.‎  ［误］ The film will begin at three quarters past one.‎  ［正］ The film will begin at one quarter to two.‎  ［析］ 大于30分钟时不要使用past，而要用差多少不到几点的to来表达。‎  ［误］ Three time three is nine.‎  ［正］ Three times three is nine.‎  ［析］ times 此处作为"乘"讲一定要加s。 英语中乘除法表达式如下： ‎ 算法 种类 例 句 ‎ 加法 一般 Five and six is eleven. ‎ 正式 Five plus six is (equals) eleven. ‎ 减法 一般 Eight take away four leaves (is) four.‎ Four from Eight leaves (is) four. ‎ 正式 Eight minus four equals (is) four. ‎ 乘法 一般 Three fours are twelve 3×4=12 ‎ 正式 Three times four equals (is) twelve. ‎ ‎ 一般 Two in to four is two. ‎ 正式 Four divided by two equals two. ‎ ‎(三) 例题解析 1 - How many students are there in your school, Mike?‎ - There are over ＿＿＿ students in our school.‎ A. two thousands ‎ B. two thousands of ‎ C. two thousand ‎ D. two thousand of ‎  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 有基数词在前面时thousand， hundred 等词不能加s，也不能加of结构，只有在thousands of时才可以使用。‎ 2 John lives on ＿＿＿ floor. He doesn't use a lift to go up and down.‎ A. nine B. the ninth C. ninth D. a ninth ‎  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ 序数词前加定冠词，nine 与 ninth 的拼写上有一个e字母相差别。‎ 3 Wu Dong won the girls' ＿＿＿ race in the school sports meeting last week.‎ A. 100 metres B. 100metres C. 100 metre D. 100metre ‎  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 数词、名词、形容词等词用连字符连接成的形容词中，名词都不要加s，如： I have to write a twothousandword report.而且由连字符组成的形容词只能放于名词前，不能放于名词后，作后置定语，或用在be动词后作表语。‎ 4 There are ＿＿＿ students in our school.‎ A. four hundred twenty B. four hundred and twenty C. four hundreds twenty D. four hundreds and twenty  ［答案］ B.‎ 5 - How many days are there in a year?‎ - There are ＿＿＿ .‎ A. three hundreds and sixtyfive B. three hundreds sixtyfive C. three hundred and sixtyfive D. three hundred sixty five  ［答案］ C.‎ 6 We have learned about ＿＿＿ English words.‎ A. nine hundreds B. nine hundred C. nine hundred of D. nine hundreds of  ［答案］ B.‎ 7 Autumn is ＿＿＿ season of the year.‎ A. third B. the three C. thirds D. the third  ［答案］ D.‎ 8 They are learning ＿＿＿ now.‎ A. Lesson Eight B. the eight lesson C. Lesson Eithth D. Eighth lesson  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 第几课，第几个门……，在英语中有两种说法，①Lesson Two, Gate Two但要注意每一单词的首字母要大写。② the second lesson, the second gate 首字母不要大写，并要注意有些缩写的读法。如:‎ p. 8-第8页(page eight)‎ $ 8.50-8.5美元(five dollars and fifty)‎ 电话号码66164532－(six, six, one, six, four five, three, two)‎ 9 The boy was so hungry that he ate ＿＿＿ .‎ A. three bowls of rices B. three bowl of rice C. three bowl of rices D. three bowls of rice  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ rice 是不可数物质名词，而bowl是可数名词。‎ 10 There are ＿＿＿ months in a year.‎ A. twelve B. twelf C. twelveth D. twelfth  ［答案］ A.‎ ‎ ‎ 八、 动 词  (一) 知识概要 动词在语言中是必不可少的一部分。它的语法现象也较多，但在初中范围主要有以下几方面问题。① 时态：初中范围主要有一般现在时，一般过去时，现在完成时，过去完成时，将来时与过去将来时六种时态。② 语态：主动语态与被动语态。③ 助动词和情态动词。④ 非谓语动词，也就是不定式，动名词及现在分词的用法。时态主要掌握以下几种时态的应用要点和习惯用法。‎ 1 一般现在时：主要有以下三方面，① 用来表示状态，特征或不受时间限制的客观存在和真理。如：Matter exists in three states物质有三态。又如：The earth moves around the sun ② 表示习惯性和经常发生的动作，如：I often go to bed at 9∶３０ ③ 在时间、条件等状语从句中表示将来要发生的动作，如：As soon as I get there I'll telephone you.‎ 2 一般过去时：①　主要用于表达过去时间内发生的动作或存在的状态，如：I was ill last week ② 过去经常发生的动作或习惯性动作，如：I used to get up at six.‎  3 一般将来时：用于表示将要发生的动作，其构成方式① 用ｗill (shall)+动词原形来表达将来在某一时间内要发生，或经常、将要发生的动作或状态，如：School will begin on Sepember 1st ② 用be going to+动词原形，用来表示不久将要发生或打算去作的动作。如：I'm going to swim this afternoon ③ be+现在分词，也就是用某些动词的现在进行时表示将来，如：I'm coming。这些动词只限于：go, come, leave, start, move, sail, arrive, reach, get to等动词。④ 在状语从句中用一般现在时表示将来。‎ 4 现在进行时：用于表示现在正在进行的动作，如：What are you doing now?要注意的是表示状态，情感的某些词没有现在进行时，这些动词有：like, have (有)，love, know, understand, remember, forget, see, hear, smell, taste, feel, wish hope, expect…‎ 5 过去将来时：用来表达从过去某时间点上看将要发生的动作，如： He told me he would come to my party 6 现在完成时与过去完成时：现在完成时的两个用处是：①　用来表达在过去开始的动作持续到现在，如：I've studied English for two years ② 用来表达过去发生的事但它影响到现在，如：I haven't had my breakfast. so I'm hungry now 现在完成时与过去完成时的区别在于动作的截止时间，现在完成时所表达的动作截止于现在，而过去完成时所表达的动作截止于过去。如：I haven't seen my old teacher for a long time 我好久未见到我过去的老师了。是指到目前截止。如果加上一句话，则将变为过去完成时，如：Yesterday I saw my old teacher. I hadn't seen him for a long time. 因为我好久未见他这一情况截止于昨天。还要注意的一个问题是截止性动词可以有完成时，但不能与表示一段时间的状语连用，如：When I got to school, the class had begun 如果一定要讲开始几分钟了则要换用表示状态，或延续性动词，如：When I got to school, the class had been on for five minutes语态：英语中只有主动语态与被动语态之分。主动语态，句子中的主语是动作的执行者，如：I broke the window 而被动语态句子中的主语是主动语态句子中的宾语，如：The window was broken by me 被动语态主要用于，动作的执行者不明确，或没有必要说出来，如：The New building was built last week 关键要注意的是在主动语态中有省略不定式符号to的动词，在被动语态要还原，如： 主动语态 I saw him come in.被动语态 He was seen to come in. 助动词和情态动词：助动词本身没有词义，它只不过与实义动词一起构成谓语动词，形成了时态、语态、构成了疑问句，否定句，以及用来加强语气。而情态动词则表达一种可能、必要、允许、愿望、猜测……的意图、倾向。也用来表示语气的委婉和祝愿。初中阶段主要有：can, could, may, might, will, would, must (have to), shall, should。最后要谈论的是非谓语动词，非谓语动词分为不定式，和动词的 ing形式，(即现在分词和动名词)。虽然在初中范围，这一项不是语法重点，但还是要花一定时间去学习，为的是打下良好的基础。为进一步学习提供良好的条件。不定式在句中可以作主语、宾语、表语。如：To see is to believe.(百闻不如一见) He want to see a film 还可以作补足语，如：He wants me to leave.也可以作状语，如：I come here to learn English.动名词也可以起到上述作用，如：Seeing is believing. I like swimming very much. 而现在分词多用于作定语、补足语、状语，如： The girl driving a car is her sister.(定语) Did you notice his hand shaking?(宾语补足语)‎ Hearing the noise, we stopped talking.(状语) ‎ ‎(二) 正误辨析  ［误］ She laid down and soon fell asleep.‎  ［正］ She lay down and soon fell asleep.‎  ［析］ 考试中常出现的是易混动词lay放，lie躺，lie说谎。它们的过去时、过去分词和现在分词变化如下：‎  lay (放) laid， laid， laying (及物动词)‎  lie (躺) lay， lain， lying (不及物动词)‎  lie (说谎) lied， lied， lying  ［误］ Please rise your hand.‎  ［正］ Please raise your hand.‎  ［析］ rise 是不及物动词，其后不能接宾语，如：The sun rises in the east.而raise是及物动词。‎  ［误］ I like to swim very much, but I don't like swimming this afternoon.‎  ［正］ I like swimming very much, but I don't like to swim this afternoon.‎  ［析］ like作为"喜欢"讲时，可以接动名词也可以接不定式，但接动名词时多表达一种习惯性动作。而接不定式则侧重于表达一次性、特殊性的动作。 但要注意的是like 与would连用时则一定要接不定式，如：Would you like to go with me? 再有一点要注意的是，like作为介词"像"讲时，只能用分词作其宾语。‎  ［误］ Stop! Did you listen to a strange voice?‎  ［正］ Stop! Did you hear a strange voice?‎  ［析］ hear的侧重点是听到、听见什么，而listen to 的侧重点为听的倾向，如：listen! Do you hear someone calling help?这样的词还有look与see。它们的侧重点也不同，look重于"看"的倾向，而see重于看见没看见。‎  ［误］ Did you watch some film recently?‎  ［正］ Did you see some film recently?‎  ［析］ 英语中see 与 watch 各有不同的用处，see用于看电影、剧目，而watch用作看电视和看球赛。‎  ［误］ Look. A beautiful lamp hanged from the ceiling.‎  ［正］ Look. A beautiful lamp hung from the ceiling.‎  ［析］ hang有两个含义，① "挂"，它的过去时与过去分词是hung， hung;② "绞刑"，这时它是规则动词，其过去式与过去分词则为hanged， hanged。‎  ［误］ How long can I borrow this book?‎  ［正］ How long can I keep this book?‎  ［析］ "借"在英文中有三个词，① 借入，即borrow,如：May I borrow some books from the library?② 借出，如：I can lend my bike to you.③ 借多久要用keep, 因为borrow与lend都是截止性动词，而keep是延续性动词。如 How long ‎ can I keep it?‎  ［误］ We have won your class.‎  ［正］ We have beaten your class.‎  ［析］ win是及物动词，其后面的宾语应是比赛、战争、奖品、奖金。而beat的宾语，应是人、队、班级等等，如：We won the game.‎  ［误］ I left my key.‎  ［正］ I forgot my key.‎  ［正］ I left my key at home.‎  ［析］ leave是"丢下"，其后一定要接地点状语，而forget其后不要接地点状语。‎  ［误］ Oh! It's raining outside. Please bring the rain coat with you.‎  ［正］ Oh! It's raining outside. Please take this rain coat with you.‎  ［析］ bring为"带来"如：Next time bring your little sister here.而take为"带走"，fetch为"去某处取什么回来"，如：Please fetch some coffee for us 要熟记的是在初中课文中与take有关的词组，如： take away 拿走 take back 收回 take down 取下take off 脱下 take…out 拿出 take place 发生 take hold of 拿住 take part in 参加 take a seat 坐下take one's place 替代 take a look 看看 take one's turn 轮流 take a message 捎信 take care of 照看 take it easy 别着急take one's time 慢慢来 take one's temperature 测量体温  ［误］ The policeman reached his gun.‎  ［正］ The policeman reached for his gun.‎  ［析］ reach作"到达"讲时是及物动词，如：I reached the hotel at 8∶30但作"伸手去拿"，则要用reach for something。作为"到达"讲时还有arrive (in+大地方)(at＋较小的地方)和get to.要注意的是与get有关的词组有： get back 回来 get in 收割 get into 进入 get off 下车 get on 上车 get out 出去 get up 起床 get to 到达 get ready for=be ready for  get on well with 与人相处融洽 get 加比较级为变得如何，例如： get colder and colder.‎  ［误］ This dictionary spent me five dollars.‎  ［正］ This dictionary cost me five dollars.‎  ［析］ 英文中的"花费"有4个spend, cost, take 和 pay,其中spend 与pay所在句中的主语应为人，如：I spent two hours in doing my homework. I paid five dallars for the book.而cost与take的主语则是事物，如：It takes me two years to finish this book.‎  ［误］ In summer I always sleep with the windows opened.‎  ［正］ In summer I always sleep with the windows open.‎  ［正］ I always sleep with the windows closed.‎  ［析］ 要注意open是动词也是形容词，而close则要用其过去分词作形容词。 ‎［误］ Please wait a minute. I'm having on my clothes.‎  ［正］ Please wait a minute. I'm putting on my clothes.‎  ［析］ 英语中的穿衣服要分状态，是什么样的穿着打扮，还是穿衣服的动作两类动词。表示穿着状态的词有have on, wear,在用法上have on不宜用进行时态，它多用一般时态，如：She has on a new school dress. 而wear则多用进行时来表示状态，如：She is wearing a new sweater.在表示动作的词中put ‎ on是常用的一词。dress用作动词当"穿衣"讲时其后宾语不应接衣物，而要接人，如：My children were very young they couldn't dress themselves.在表示穿着状态时用其过去分词当形容词，如：He is dressed in white.‎  ［误］ My computer can't begin. Could you find someone to help me?‎  ［正］ My computer can't start. Could you find someone to help me?‎  ［析］ begin与start均可指"开始"，而且常常可以互换，如：School begins (starts) at 8 a. m. 但是在两种情况下不宜用begin 而要用start, ① 当作机器开动、发动讲，如：My car can't start. There must be something wrong with it.② 作为"旅途开始"讲，如：We should have to start early. There was a lot of traffic on the road.‎  ［误］ I'm very glad because I have founded my lost key.‎  ［正］ I'm very glad because I have found my lost key.‎  ［析］ find是不规则动词，它的过去式和过去分词是found, found，而found又是另外一词"建立"，它是规则动词，其过去式与过去分词是founded founded, 如：The People's Republic of China was founded in 1949.‎  ［误］ Please. Let's speak in English.‎  ［正］ Please. Let's speak English.‎  ［正］ Please. Let's talk in English.‎  ［误］ Can you speak it English?‎  ［正］ Can you say it in English?‎  ［析］ 英文中"说"有4个常用词say, tell, speak, talk.其中不及物动词有speak和talk，如：I want to talk with you.We are talking about the new film.而speak其后接语言时是及物动词，其他情况是不及物动词。say 与tell是及物动词，其中tell常用双宾语，如：Tell us a story.但用于讲实话或谎话时也用单宾语。如： Tell the truth.‎  ［误］ Can you say Japanese from Chinese?‎  ［正］ Can you tell Japanese from Chinese?‎  ［析］ tell…from为固定词组，即分辨两者的不同。‎  ［误］ Excuse me, did I step on your foot?‎  ［正］ Oh, sorry, did I step on your foot?‎  ［析］ excuse me用于未打扰对方前，以提醒对方注意的用语，而sorry则是由于自己已做的事向对方道歉。‎  ［误］ Would you care for to swim with us?‎  ［正］ Would you care to swim with us?‎  ［析］ care for 后接不定式时，要省略for,或换用名词，如：Would you care for a cup of tea. care for 作"照顾"讲时与look after相同。在初中阶段学习与for有关的词组有：‎  ask for 请求 call for 接人，请人 care for 关心 go in for 从事 answer for 负责 look for 寻找 wait for 等待 send for 请人 pay for 付款 search for 寻找 leave for 去某地 prepare for 准备 ‎ thank somebody for something 为某事向某人道谢。‎  ［误］ Are you understanding it? Yes, I got to it.‎  ［正］ Do you understand it? Yes, I got it.‎  ［析］ understand这一词没有进行时态，如同感观动词love、hate… I got it ‎ 是美语，即I understood it。要记住get 作为"到达"讲时是不及物动词，如：I'll get to the school at 8 a. m. 初中范围常用与to有关的动词词组如下： belong to 属于 come to 苏醒 point to (at) 指着get to 到达 refer to 谈到 stick to 坚持lead to 导致 turn to 翻到 look forward to 期望agree to 同意  ［误］ The meat has gone badly.‎  ［正］ The meat has gone bad.‎  ［析］ 英语中go, get, become, turn作为转变时，其后接形容词，这时这些动词应被看作系动词。‎  ［误］ The teacher said the earth moved around the sun.‎  ［正］ The teacher said the earth moves around the sun.‎  ［析］ 如果主句的谓语动词是现在时，其宾语从句可以是任何时态。如果是过去时，则宾语从句中的时态应与之呼应。但地球围绕太阳转是不随时间而变化的客观事实，所以还应用一般现在时态来表达。‎  ［误］ I'll come to see you as soon as I'll be back.‎  ［正］ I'll come to see you as soon as I am back.‎  ［析］ 在状语从句中要用一般时来表示将来，如：I should tell him when he came back.‎  ［误］ I want to know whether you come to my party tomorrow or not.‎  ［正］ I want to know whether you will come to my party tomorrow or not.‎  ［析］ 在宾语从句中则要用将来时表示将来的动作。要注意的是如果宾语从句中仍有状语从句时，依然要用一般现在时表示将来，如：I want to know if it rains tomorrow you'll come here or not.‎  ［误］ What did you do at eight last night?‎  ［正］ What were you doing at eight last night?‎  ［析］ 在描述过去某一具体时刻的动作或从某时到某时一段时间内正在进行的动作要用过去进行时，如：I was washing clothes from eight till noon last Sunday  ［误］ My classmates came to see a film yesterday. I didn't go with them, because I have seen it before.‎  ［正］ My classmates came to see a film yesterday. I didn't go with them because I had seen it before.‎  ［析］ 现在完成时与过去完成时的相同之处是其动作均开始于过去的某一点，它的差别在于该动作是截止到什么时候。如动作截止到现在用现在完成时；如动作截止到过去，用过去完成时。例如：I've learnt English for three years.(到现在为止)又如：Before I went to college, I had learnt English for three years. (动作截止到上大学那时，即截止于过去)‎  ［误］ I'm feeling well now.‎  ［正］ I feel well now.‎  ［析］ 瞬间动词有些无进行时态，它们是：表示思维状态的词：believe, feel, forget, imagine, know, mean, need, prefer, remember, understand, want 表示感情的动词：care, like, do like, love, mind, hate, fear 表示状态的词：belong, own 感观动词： feel, hear, see， smell, taste  ［误］ When have you done this work?‎  ［正］ When did you do this work?‎  ［析］ when提问的是一个时间点不可用于完成时态的问句中。‎  ［误］ This is our new English teacher. He has gone to many foreign countries.‎  ［正］ This is our new English teacher. He has been to many foreign countries.‎  ［析］ have gone to 是到某地去了，此人现在不在这里。have been to 是到过某地，现在此人在说话现场。‎  ［误］ I have borrowed this book for two weeks.‎  ［正］ I have kept this book for two weeks.‎  ［析］ 截止性动词有完成时态，但不可和与表达一段时间的时间状语连用。如：When I got to the cinema the film had begun. 但要讲When I got to the cinema the film had be on for five minutes 这样的用法还有buy, join, die, 如：I bought this book yesterday.我昨天买的这本书。 I have had this book for two days. 这本书我已买了两天了。‎  I joined the club two years ago.两年前我加入了这个俱乐部。‎  I have been in this club for two years. 我加入这个俱乐部已两年了。‎  My father died five years ago. 我父亲是5年前去世的。‎  My father has been dead for five years. 我父亲已去世5年了。‎  ［误］ Have you understood the lessons?‎  ［正］ Do you understand the lessons?‎  ［析］ 有些动词不易用完成时态，它们是understand, think, believe, know (知道)‎  ［误］ It was said that the Second World War had broken out in 1939.‎  ［误］ It was said that the Second World War was broken out in 1939.‎  ［析］ 在讲述过去的历史事件时，总要用过去时而不要用完成时，而且happen, break out, take place作为发生讲时均没有被动语态。‎  ［误］ When I walked along the street. I happened to meet an old friend.‎  ［正］ When I was walking along the street I happened to meet an old friend.‎  ［析］ 在一个长动作发生或进行的过程中，某一突然事件发生，这时长动作应用进行时(现在进行时或过去进行时)，而突发性动作用一般时(一般现在时或一般过去时)，如：When my father is reading a newspaper the telephone rings.‎  ［误］ Please buy a book for me.‎  ［正］ Please buy me a book.‎  ［正］ Please buy a book to me.‎  ［析］ 在接双宾语的动词后面的两个宾语，一个是直接宾语，一个是间接宾语，如：Buy me a book中me是间接宾语，而a book是直接宾语。如果将直接宾语前置，其后应加to，如： Tell me a story. Tell a story to me. Give me a book. Give a book to me.‎  ［误］ He was seen come into the book store.‎  ［正］ He was seen to come into the book store.‎  ［析］ 在主动语态中，有时可以加不带to的不定式作宾语，如：I saw him come into the book store.但如果变为被动语态时，则要将省略的to还原。当然这些动词还可以加动名词作宾语，如： I saw him coming into the book store, 如变为被动语态时，则没有变化。如：He was seen coming into the book store.‎  ［误］ How nice the book is! Is it sold well?‎  ［正］ How nice the book is! Does it sell well?‎  ［析］ 有些动词可以表示一种动作，但也可以用来表示某种性质，表示动作时可用被动语态，在表示性质时则不可用被动语态。如：‎  This book sells well. 这本书畅销。‎  This car drives easily. 这车容易驾驶。‎  These clothes wash easily. 这些衣服好洗。‎  在作上述表达时，不要用被动语态。而要讲：‎  This kind of book was sold out. (这种书卖完了)‎  These clothes were washed by the washing machine. 这时要用被动语态，因为它描述的是具体动作。‎  ［误］ Must I do it now? No. you mustn't. ‎  ［正］ Must I do it now? No, you needn't. ‎  ［析］ need用在疑问句和否定句中常用作情态动词，其后接不带to的不定式。由must提问的问句作答语时，如是肯定的要用must,否定的要用needn't，即为没有必要。在肯定句中常用作实意动词，如：I need to wait for my boy.‎  ［误］ Is this book yours?‎  Yes, It's. ‎  ［正］ Is this book yours? Yes, It is. ‎  ［析］ 在肯定的回答中不要用缩写形式，而在否定的回答中可以用缩写形式，如：No. It isn't.‎  ［误］ I'll have my bike repair tomorrow.‎  ［正］ I'll have my bike repaired tomorrow.‎  ［析］ have+人+动词原形或现在分词意为：让某人作某事，如：My father had me to learn how to drive， 或My father had me doing my homework from morning till might have+物+动词的过去分词为某件事被别人完成。如：I have my hair cut.我去理发。而不是自己理发。如果讲我想自己作某事，则用I want to repair my bike myself.‎  ［误］ I'll get my brother repair the bike for you.‎  ［正］ I'll get my brother to repair the bike for you.‎  ［析］ have与get的用法有相同之处，也有不同之处。相同之处，如：have something done, 也可用get something done, 或have (get) somebody doing something但不同之处在于have somebody do something 在用get时则要用get somebody to do something。‎  ［误］ I have to study on Saturday but I haven't to study a full day  ［正］ I have to study on Saturday， but I don't have to study a full day.‎  ［析］ have to 不得不，而don't have to 为其否定式。‎  ［误］ Is Tom in the classroom? No. He mustn't be in the classroom, because I saw him talking with our teacher in the office just now.‎  ［正］ Is Tom in the classroom? No. He can't be in the classroom because I saw him talking with our teacher in the office just now.‎  ［析］ must 加动词原形表达一种比较肯定的推测，而表示否定的推测则要用can't。‎  ［误］ My grandpa is over eighty but he is able to read without glasses.‎  ［正］ My grandpa is over eighty， but he can read without glasses.‎  ［析］ can (could) 多用于表达客观的事实，主观能力，而be able to 则多用于表达主观的意愿。‎  ［误］ She doesn't answer the doorbell. She should be asleep. ‎  ［正］ She doesn't answer the doorbell.  She must be asleep ‎  ［析］ should 用于现在时态的句子中应译为"应该"，如：You should do your homework right away. 而 must加动词原形表示一种推测。‎  ［误］ Do you like to go with us?‎  ［正］ Would you like to go with us?‎  ［析］ Do you like…问的是习惯，如：Do you like swimming? 而would you like是一次性的邀请。‎  ［误］ I am used to get up early in the morning.‎  ［正］ I am used to getting up early in the morning.‎  ［析］ used to 共有三种用法，① 表示过去的习惯，如：I used to live with my parents. ② 表示过去的习惯延续到现在，如：I am used to swimming in the river. ③ 用于被动语态，如：　Oil is used to cook  ［误］ To play with the children are very interesting.‎  ［正］ To play with the children is very interesting.‎  ［析］ 不定式作主语时，应视为单数主语，特别是两个不定式用and作连词作主语时，如指的是一件事也应用单数谓语动词。如：To get up early and to go to sleep early is good for your health.‎  ［误］ He asked me do my homework alone.‎  ［正］ He asked me to do my homework alone.‎  ［析］ 某些动词要求不定式作其宾语或宾语补足语，它们是：ask somebody to do something 要求某人做某事。 tell somebody to do something 告诉某人做某事 还有prepare 准备， decide 决定， happen to 碰巧， seem 似乎。‎  ［误］ he told me to drive a car.‎  ［正］ He told me how to drive a car.‎  ［析］ 要学会疑问词加不定式的用法，特别要注意的是what是疑问代词，而how是疑问副词。如：I want to know what to do. (我想知道干什么)。 I want to know how to do it. (我想知道如何去作)。 要注意的是how to do it 中的it是不可少的，因how是疑问副词，不能作及物动词的宾语，而what是疑问代词，可做do的宾语，所以what to do 后不要加it。‎  ［误］ I am very glad meeting you.‎  ［正］ I am very glad to meet you.‎  ［析］ 许多形容词后加不定式，这样用时形容词多是用来描述人物的感情、态度，如：glad, happy, pleased, lucky, sorry, sad, upset, ready, careful, surprised。‎  ［误］ I'm too glad for seeing you.‎  ［正］ I'm too glad to see you.‎  ［析］ 这句话不能按照too…to的句型翻译为：我太高兴了以至于不想见你。而应译为：见到你太高兴了。又如：She is too honest to tell the truth 应译为：她很诚实，不会不讲实话。‎  ［误］ Tom is too young not to join the army.‎  ［正］ Tom is too young to join the army.‎  ［析］ 这是too…to的正常用法，太如何如何以至于不能如何。‎  ［误］ I went to the hospital for seeing my old friend. He was ill in hospital.‎  ［正］ I went to the hospital to see my old friend. He was ill in hospital.‎  ［析］ 在句中表示某动作的目的时，要用不定式而不能用for加动名词。‎  ［误］ Could you help me to find a chair to sit.‎  ［正］ Could you help me to find a chair to sit on.‎  ［析］ 当不定式作后置定语时，将不定式放于名词之后。如果不定式中的动词是不及物动词，则其后面的介词不要省略。如：I sat on the chair. 这样的用法还有：I want to find a room to live in. I want to find a pen to write with.‎  ［误］ When mother was about leaving the baby cried suddenly.‎  ［正］ When mother was about to leave the baby cried suddenly.‎  ［析］ be about to 是表达较近的即将发生的动作，可用来表示将来时，或按计划、安排的事。‎  ［误］ This work is difficult to be done.‎  ［正］ This work is difficult to do.‎  ［析］ 在不定式作宾语时，下列情况常用主动语态表示被动。① 句子的主语即是不定式动作的执行者，如：I have a lot of letters to write. ② 句中的宾语是不定式中动作的执行者，如：Could you find me a job to do? ③ 在形容词之后的不定式，如：English is difficult to learn.‎  ［误］ Would you like to see a film with us? Yes, I'd love. ‎  ［正］ Would you like to see a film with us? Yes, I'd love to. ‎  ［析］ 在口语简答语中要将不定式符号保留，如： I had to (不得不作) I'm going to (打算作) I used to (过去习惯作) I'd love to (喜欢作) I hope to (希望作某事) I'll be glad to (高兴作)‎  ［误］ Did you see someone to do this work for me?‎  ［正］ Did you see someone do this work for me?‎  ［析］ 在感观动词之后常接不带to的不定式。这些词是see, look at, watch, hear, listen to, feel, notice。‎  ［误］ He was seen prepare this car.‎  ［正］ He was seen to prepare this car.‎  ［析］ 在被动语态中要将主动语态句中省去的不定式还原回来。‎  ［误］ Please Let my child to try it again.‎  ［正］ Please Let my child try it again.‎  ［析］ 在make, have, let后加不带to的不定式作宾语补足语。‎  ［误］ Why not to do it again?‎  ［正］ Why not do it again?‎  ［析］ Why not, you'd better 后接不带to的不定式，如：You'd better go.但要注意的是它的否定式是You'd better not go.‎  ［误］ When he heard the news he couldn't help to cry.‎  ［正］ When he heard the news he couldn't help crying.‎  ［析］ can't help+现在分词表示情不自禁作某事。‎  ［误］ In autumn, the street is always covered with falling leaves.‎  ［正］ In autumn, the street is always covered with fallen leaves.‎  ［析］ 现在分词作定语有正在的含义，如：falling leave ‎ 正下落的叶子。而过去分词作定语fallen leaves是落地的叶子。过去分词含有已经完成的意思。‎  ［误］ Do you hear someone sing in the office?‎  ［正］ Do you hear someone singing in the office?‎  ［析］ 感观动词可用不带to的不定式来作宾语补足语，表达一个动作的全过程或已结束的动作，而用现在分词表示一个正在进行中的动作。‎  ［误］ I want to shop some food for supper.‎  ［正］ I want to buy some food for supper.‎  ［正］ I want to go shopping.‎  ［析］ shop作买东西讲时，要用go shopping,其后不要加所购买的东西。这样的用法还有： go boating 划船 go sailing 航海 go skating 滑冰go shooting 射击 go dancing 去跳舞 go fishing 钓鱼go swimming 去游泳…… 不要用错，也不要改为其他式，因为这是习惯用法。‎  ［误］ When the teacher came into the classroom, the students stopped to talk.‎  ［正］ When the teacher came into the classroom. the students stopped talking.‎  ［析］ stop to do something 是停下来去做某事，而stop doing something 则是停止做某事。‎  ［误］ I didn't remember closing the door, so the thief came into the room directly.‎  ［正］ I didn't remember to close the door, so the thief came into the room directly.‎  ［析］ remember后接不定式是记着去做某事，即该动作并没有完成。而remember 后接动名词则表明该动作已经作完了。如： Do remember to turn off the light, before you leave. 即在你离开前记着去关灯。而关灯的动作并没有做。I remember meeting you somewhere. 我记得在某处见过你。而相见一事已经作完了。相同用法还有forget。‎  ［误］ When I finished to do this work I would go to play football.‎  ［正］ When I finished doing this work I would go to play football.‎  ［析］ 在英语中有些动词后要接动名词作宾语。在初中范围主要有两个动词finish和enjoy, 千万不要与like相比。因为like作动词"喜欢"用时，其后接动名词表示习惯性动作，接不定式表示一次性特殊的动作，而would you like后面则一定要用不定式。‎  ［误］ When he finished his homework, he went on playing the football.‎  ［正］ When he finished his homework, he went on to play football.‎  ［析］ go on to do something 是做完一件事紧跟着做另一件事。而go on doing something 是在做一件事的过程中被打断后接着再继续做这件事。‎  ［误］ He's busy to prepare his lessons.‎  ［正］ He's busy preparing his lessons.‎  ［析］ be busy 后加doing 而不能接不定式。‎  (三) 例题解析 1 Mr Zhang asked me ＿＿＿ the words again.‎ A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ ask somebody to do something 要求某人作某事。‎ 2 You ＿＿＿ play on the road. It's dangerous.‎ A. mustn't B. may C. can D. must  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ must 用于否定句表示禁止做某事。‎ 3 Mr Brown ＿＿＿ in Beijing since 1993.‎ A. work B. works C. worked D. has worked  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 句中有since引导的时间状语，因此句中要用完成时态。‎ 4 I ＿＿＿ a letter when my mother came in.‎ A. write B. am writing C. was writing D. will write  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 当母亲进来时是一个瞬时的动作，而写信是一个长动作，所以写信这个动作应用过去进行时态，表示在写信过程中发生的另一个短动作。‎ 5 It's not an important party, you needn't ＿＿＿ .‎ A. pay for it B. wear it out C. try it out D. dress up for it  ［答案］ D. ［析］ pay for-为某物，某人付款，wear out-穿坏，磨破，tryout-选拔，挑选，而dress up-梳妆打扮。‎ 6 Can I ＿＿＿ a bike from him?‎ A. lend B. return C. give D. borrow  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ borrow something from…为向某人某处借某物。而lend, return, give后面的介词应用to。‎ 7 - Must I stay at home?‎ - No, you ＿＿＿ .‎ A. mustn't B. needn't C. may not D. can not  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ needn't 为"没有必要必须做某事"，而mustn't为"禁止做"，can not为"不能做"。根据题意是：你不一定待在家里。‎ 8 - How long have you ＿＿＿ here?‎ - About two months. ‎ A. been B. gone C. come D. arrived  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ have been here是个状态，可以与后面的长时间状语连接，而其他三个动词都是瞬间动词。‎ 9 Stamps ＿＿＿ by people for sending letters.‎ A. use B. using C. used D. are used  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 这里是被动语态，意为邮票被人们用来发信。‎ 10 The radio says Tianjin will be ＿＿＿ tomorrow.‎ A. rains B. rain C. rained D. rainy  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ rainy为形容词作表语。‎ 11 If you don't know this word, ＿＿＿ in the dictionary.‎ A. look for it B. look at it C. look after it D. look it up  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ look up 查字典，与look有关的词组有：‎ look about 四周环视 look after 照顾 look around 周围，四处看 look at 看 look back 回顾 look for 寻找 look forward to 期待 look out 当心 look like 看上去像 ‎ ‎12 My father told me ＿＿＿ play on the street.‎ A. not B. to not C. not to D. did not  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 不定式的否定式是not to do something.‎ ‎13 There is going to ＿＿＿ an English party this evening.‎ A. be B. has C. have D. is  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 这里是there be 无生命的"有"加助动词的句型，即there will be,而没有there have 的句型。‎ 14 There ＿＿＿ no bus stop here last year.‎ A. is B. was C. are D. were  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ last year为去年，所以用过去时。而there be 句型的单复数要看be动词之后离之最近的名词是单数还是复数。如：There is a pen and two pencils on the desk.‎ 15 Our school will hold a sports meeting if it ＿＿＿ tomorrow.‎ A. isn't rain B. rains C. won't rain D. doesn't rain  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 在状语从句中应用一般时态来表示将来。‎ 16 Bikes mustn't ＿＿＿ everywhere.‎ A. be put B. be putted C. put D. putting  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 这里是被动语态。与put有关的词组如下： put away 放好 put off 推迟 put on 穿上 put out 扑灭 put down 放下 ‎ ‎17 Neither Li Lei nor Han Meimei ＿＿＿ Harbin.‎ A. have been to B. has been to C. have gone to D. has gone to  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ has been to 是去过某处。‎ 18 It's cold today you'd better ＿＿＿ more coats.‎ A. put on B. take off C. to put on D. to take off  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 'd better 其后加不带to的不定式，而put on 为"穿上"。‎ 19 Henry ＿＿＿ a birthday card for Sam yesterday.‎ A. has bought B. buys C. bought D. will buy  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 因句中的yesterday为表达过去的时间状语，所以应用过去时态。 ‎20 When I got to the factory, the workers ＿＿＿ about the filim.‎ A. are talking B. talked C. were talking D. have talked  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 状语从句中所用的动词为过去时，则主句中也要与之呼应。而工人们在谈论电影为一长时间的动作，所以要用过去进行时。 ‎21 No hurry, please ＿＿＿ your time.‎ A. take B. bring C. carry D. catch  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ take one's time 慢慢来别着急。 ‎22 I enjoy ＿＿＿ the light music.‎ A. to listen to B. listening to C. hearing D. to hear  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ enjoy 与 finish其后只能接动名词作宾语补足语。 ‎23 Please ＿＿＿ as soon as you get there.‎ A. ring me up B. ring up me C. wake me up D. wake up me  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ ring up打电话，而wake up唤醒。英文中有很多动词词组如其宾语是代词时，一定要放在动词与介词之间。 ‎24 When I ＿＿＿ , I want to be a teacher.‎ A. grows up B. grow up C. shall grow D. grew up  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ grow up 长大。而状语从句要用现在时表示将来，即使主句也用的是一般现在时，但它含有将来之意。‎ 25 I called him and he ＿＿＿ to have a talk with me.‎ A. stop B. stops C. stoped D. stopped  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 这是由and连接的两个并列句，所以时态应保持一致。 ‎26 - Would you please ＿＿＿ me an evaser, Lucy?‎ - Certainly. Here you are.‎ A. borrow B. lend C. borrowed D. lent  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ would you please其后接不带to的不定式即动词原形，而borrow为"借入"而lend为"借出"。‎ 27 Trees ＿＿＿ in spring.‎ A. plant B. were planted C. should be planted D. should plant  ［答案］ C. ‎［析］ should用于一般现在时态中表示应该，而此句又是被动语态。‎ ‎28 - Where's your father?‎ - He ＿＿＿ to Paris.‎ A. go B. goes C. went D. has gone  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ has gone 是已去某处了，不在这里了。所以强调过去的动作影响到现在。 ‎29 - Must I finish my homework in class now?‎ - No, you ＿＿＿ . You can do it at home.‎ A. mustn't B. may not C. needn't D. can  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ needn't表示没有必要一定要这样做。由must提问，肯定句用must，否定句用needn't. ‎30 Thank you very much for ＿＿＿ your book ＿＿＿ me.‎ A. lending, to B. lent, to C. borrow, from D. borrowing,from  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ for是介词，要用动名词作介词宾语。‎ 31 The Great Green Wall will stop the wind from ＿＿＿ the earth away.‎ A. blowing B. blow C. blows D. to blow  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ stop…from doing something. 阻止某人或某物作某事。‎ 32 The students will go to the West Hill Farm by bike, if it ＿＿＿ fine tomorrow.‎ A. will be B. is C. shall be D. was  ［答案］ B.‎ 33 Our teacher always tells us ＿＿＿ in the street. It's too dangerous.‎ A. don't play B. not to play C. to play D. not play  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ 不定式的否定式为not to do。 ‎34 English is a useful language. It ＿＿＿ widely in the world.‎ A. is spoken B. was spoken C. can speak D. will speak  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ 本句为被动语态。‎ 35 The kite is flying high in the sky. It ＿＿＿ a bird.‎ A. looks at B. looks like C. looks for D. looks after  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ look like 像……，其中like 为介词。‎ 36 - Look! What's Wang Ping doing over there?‎ - She ＿＿＿ under a big tree.‎ A. sings B. sang C. has sung D. is singing  ［答案］ D.‎ 37 You ＿＿＿ see a doctor. You've got a bad cold.‎ A. will B. are going to C. had better D. could  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ had better 最好，意为一种真心的劝告。 ‎38 Your radio is too loud. Would you please ＿＿＿ ?‎ A. turn down it B. turn it down C. to turn down it D. to turn it down  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ would you please 后面加动词原形。 ‎39 Could you tell me if it ＿＿＿ tomorrow?‎ A. rains B. is raining C. will rain D. rain  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ if从句是宾语从句，而不是状语从句。所以还是要用将来时，而不能用一般现在时表示将来。‎ 40 Suddenly one of the bags ＿＿＿ the truck and landed in the middle of the road.‎ A. fell out B. fell down C. fell off D. will be  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ fall off 掉落，与off有关的词组有 see off 送行 give off 散发 shut off 关闭 kick off 踢掉 turn off 关闭 get off 下车 jump off 跳下 show of 炫耀 take off 脱下 pay off 付清 ‎ ‎41 He ＿＿＿ at this school since two years ago.‎ A. was ‎ B. has been C. is D. will be  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ since引导的时间状语应与完成时相呼应。‎ 42 She doesn't know ＿＿＿ .‎ A. when to do B. what to do C. how to do D. where to do  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ when, how, where均为疑问副词，而what为疑问代词，又因do是及物动词需要宾语。如用疑问副词时应为when to do it, how to do it, where to do it.‎ 43 Must older people ＿＿＿ to politely.‎ A. speak B. spoken C. be spoke D. be spoken  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 这句话的主动语态应为People must speak politely to older people对年龄较大的人讲话应有礼貌。 ‎44 Teachers usually ask their students ＿＿＿ loudly in class.‎ A. to speak B. speak C. speaks D. spoke  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ ask somebody to do something 要求某人作某事。 ‎45 - Where is Mr Zhang?‎ - Look! He ＿＿＿ on a big machine over there.‎ A. works B. worked C. is working D. has worked  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 由look, liston等词开始的句子一般要用现在进行时态。 ‎46 There's a football match. Please ＿＿＿ the TV at once. Let's watch together.‎ A. turn on B. take off C. turn off D. go on  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ turn on 打开。与turn有关的词组有： turn against 背叛 turn on 打开 turn +颜色 变为某种颜色 turn off 关闭 turn over 翻转 turn to 翻到某页 turn into ‎ 变为 turn up 向上翻 ‎ ‎47 Please tell me where ＿＿＿ have our picnic tomorrow.‎ A. we will B. will we C. will D. will you  ［答案］ A.‎  ［析］ where 引导的从句是宾语从句，而不是状语从句。‎ 48 We ＿＿＿ English for three years already. And we can speak a little English now.‎ A. learn B. have learned C. has learned D. will learn  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ for+表示一段长度的时间词，应与完成时相呼应。‎ 49 At last, Lin Feng made the baby ＿＿＿ and begin to laugh.‎ A. stop to cry B. stop crying C. to stop to cry D. to stop crying  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ make somebody do (or doing) something, stop doing 意为停止做某事。‎ 50 Our classroom must ＿＿＿ clean every day.‎ A. keep B. to keep C. be kept D. to be kept  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 应为被动语态。‎ 51 I hear there ＿＿＿ a sports meeting in our school next week. A. is going to have B. will have C. is going to be D. are going to be  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ 这是hear 的宾语从句是there be 句型。而且是用了be going to形式。‎ 52 It's getting colder, Peter. You'd better ＿＿＿ this coat with you.‎ A. bring B. carry C. take D. get  ［答案］ C.‎  ［析］ bring 带来，take 带走。‎ 53 Our classroom is clean and tidy.It ＿＿＿ every day.‎ A. cleans B. is cleaning C. cleaned D. is cleaned  ［答案］ D.‎  ［析］ 这里表达的是经常的一种状态，所以应用一般现在时的被动语态。 ‎54 If you are not careful in the street, a car may ＿＿＿ you.‎ A. hurt B. hit C. run D. catch  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ hit撞上，碰上，击中 55 The farmers were busy ＿＿＿ ready for the next year.‎ A. got B. getting C. to get D. get  ［答案］ B.‎  ［析］ be busy后应用动词的ing形式。 ‎ 第二篇 句法 一、 主 要 句 式  (一) 知识概要 初中所学的句型一般要分为陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。陈述句中有肯定句与否定句之分。其中可以分为以下五种：① 主语+不及物动词。如：I arrived at six last night.② 主语+及物动词+宾语，如：I bought a good EnglishChinese Dictionary yesterday.③ 主语+及物动词+间接宾语+直接宾语，如：Please tell me a story before I go to bed. 这样可加双宾语的句子有buy,tell, give, ask, pass, teach.④ 主语+及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语，如：I found it impossible to do it. Please keep the classroom clean and tidy.⑤ 主语+系动词+表语，如：Tom is an American boy. The grass turned green in spring.在初中常见的句型中有There be…句型，表示存在某种事物，如：There is a map on the wall其be动词的形式要与其后面相近的那个名词相一致。要注意的是这种句型加入助动词后，也要保持be动词，不要换用have,如：There is going to be a meeting tomorrow.在句子结构中要注意主谓一致的问题，即句子的主语与谓语动词要相呼应。要注意的有如下几点：① 用and连接两个主语时一般应视为复数，但如一人身兼两职时则要用单数谓语动词形式，如：A singer and dancer is coming to our party. a singer and dancer ‎ 既歌唱又可舞的演员。而 a singer and a dancer 则要译为：一位歌唱家和一位舞蹈家。②有些以 s 结尾的名词谓语动词要用单数，如： The news is good (news 为不可数名词)。③ 有量词时应按量词的数量计算；如： This pair of glasses is good My glasses are broken. ④有些形单却意为复数的名词，如： People are coming here 这样的词还有 Police， 如果要讲一个警察时，应讲 a policeman。 两个警察为 two policemen。 又如 a policewoman, two policewomen ⑤　所有不定代词 each， either， neither， one， the other， nobody， nothing， anyone， anything， someone， something … 要作为单数如： Someone is waiting for you在并列句中表示联合关系的连词有： and not only … but also，　neither … nor，　either … or 如: My sister and my parents are going to the cinema。 表示转折关系的并列连词有： but 和 yet， 如： She is a good student, but she didn't pass the final exam. 又如： I think the news is strange, yet it is true 表示选择关系的连词有：or， either … or，如： Hurry up, or you will be late for school 表示因果关系的并列连词有： for， so 如： They studied very hard， so they all passed the exam在初中范围复合句中主要有状语从句和宾语从句(名词性从句)两种，而定语从句(形容词性从句)要在高中讲述，为了使同学阅读文章方便，我们将在下面另一章予以介绍。我们首先来看宾语从句。①　在及物动词的后面可以接一个名词来充当宾语，如： I knew the man, 而这时也可以用一个句子来充当宾语，如： I knew that he was a good man 这时宾语从句的连接词有 that, (that 只在从句中起联接作用，不在句中充当语法成分，既不是主语也不是宾语，所以在口语中常常被省略。如： I am sure (that) she has passed the exam ②if, whether 它们在宾语从句中只起连接作用，不起语法作用，当作是否讲。从句中有 or not 结构时，要用 whether, 如： I ask him if (whether) he has had his lunch I asks him whether he has had his lunch or not 　③　what 它在宾语从句中除了作连接词外，还要作主语或宾语成份，如： I don't understand what you said (what 作 said 的宾语)。又如： I asked him what made him sick (what 在宾语从句中作主语)。④　who，它也和what一样，在句中除作连接词外，可以充当句中的成份，如：I know who she is looking for? ⑤　whose 如： I want to know whose book this is? ⑥　which 如： Do you know which book is mine?在连接词中还有4个常用的连接副词，①　how 它的应用最广，如： how much, how many, how long, how soon, how old …。如： How much does it cost? ②　when 它只是连接时间状语，如： Please tell me when the meeting will begin? ③　where 它连接地点状语，如： Where are you from? ④　why 它要连接的是原因状语从句，如： The teacher asked why Tom didn't come to school. 在考试中常见到的考点是：宾语从句的时态与主句时态的呼应问题。①　主句谓语动词如果是现在时或将来时，宾语从句的时态可以是任何所需要的时态， 如： I know he didn't come. 我知道他没来。 I know he will come tomorrow 我知道他明天来。I know he has gone to London 我知道他已去伦敦了。　②　主句中的谓语动词若是过去时，宾语从句也要用过去时态中的某一种。比如： 一般过去时，过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时。除了在表达宇宙中的客观真理时，不能用现在时态。如： I wanted to know when he would come The teacher told me the earth moves around the sun状语从句主要有时间状语从句，其连接词有：after， before， when， as， as soon as， until (till)， while， since， by其中较难掌握的有以下几点：①　until (till) 直到，在用 until ‎ 表达时间状语的句子中，主句中的动词是要十分小心去选择。如动词是持续性动词，它要用肯定句，如： I studied hard until 12 o'clock last night. 如果动词是瞬间截止性动词，则要用否定句，如： He didn't go to bed until his mother came back ②　由since， for， by， before 来引导的时间状语从句。 since 引导的时间状语是动作的开始时间，如： I have studied English since １９９０ 而由 by 引导的时间状语通常是动作的结束时间，如： I had learned 25 English songs by the end of last term 而before 则多用于完成时， ago 则多用于一般过去时，如： He had finished his work before twelve yesterday I left my hometown two years ago ③　在状语从句中用一般现在时或一般过去时表示将来。它们可能是主句用一般将来时，从句用一般现在时，如： If it rains, they won't go to the park　on Sunday 也可以主句是一般过去时，从句用一般过去进行时，如： He said if it rained the next day he would not go to the park 考试中常见的考点有：要学生区别是条件、时间状语从句还是宾语从句，因在宾语从句中该用什么时态用什么时态，如： I want to know if he will come here tomorrow 在宾语从句中的条件状语从句与主句的关系，如： I want to know if it rains he will come here tomorrow在原因状语从句中主要是①　because， 应译为"因为"。它表达的因果关系最强，如： He didn't pass the exam because he didn't study hard ②　since 应译为"既然"，如： Since you were ill yesterday I left some notes on your desk ③　as 应译为"由于"，如： As it is too hot we'd better go swimming since 与 as 所表达的因果关系远比 because 弱得多。而 for 表达的因果关系最弱。它不能用于句首，如： He studies hard, for he wants to go to college在比较状语从句中有同级比较 as … as， 如： This book is as good as that one 要注意的有两点：①　as … as 中间要用原级而不是比较级。②　用形容词还是副词，如： Mary writes as carefully as Tom 而其否定句为 not as (so) … as， 如： They didn't work so hard as we did, 而不同级比较用比较级加 than, 如： He is younger than I am 要注意的是表示"越来越"这一概念时有两个句型：①　比较级＋and＋比较级，如： The days are getting longer and longer The little girl is becoming more and more beautiful ②　定冠词 the ＋ 比较级＋ the ＋ 比较级，如： The harder you study, the more you can learn方式状语中要注意的是as (连词)与 like (介词)的区别。 as 作为连词其后接从句，如： Please do it as I did it 但后面的句子常作省略，如： Please do it as I 而 like 是介词，其后要接的是宾语，如： Please do it like me结果和目的状语从句主要有 so … that， so that， in order that等几种用法。①　so … that用在单数可数名词前，so ＋ 形容词 ＋ a ＋ 名词 ＋ that，如： She is so beautiful a girl that everyone likes her 或用 such ＋ a ＋ 形容词 ＋ 名词 ＋ that, 如： She is such a beautiful girl that everyone likes her ②　在不可数名词或可数名词复数前只能用 such， 如： It is such good weather we want to go for a picnic 又如： They are such good players that they should win the game.　③　在much， many， few， little 之前只能用so， 如： I have so little money that I can't buy it ④　so … that 之间只有形容词时，则不能用 such， 如： It is so good that I want to buy ⑤　so that 其后接从句，如： I got up earlier so that I could catch the first bus ‎（二）　正误辨析  ‎［误］ The stories in that book was written many years ago  ‎［正］ The stories in that book were written many years ago.  ‎［析］‎ ‎ 作主语的名词、代词或不定式、动名词，它们往往要带有修饰词，这些词可能是形容词，也可能是短语，但谓语动词还是要取决于这个主语的数，要记住的是一个名词不可能在同一句中作两个不同的语法成份，如： book 作了 of 的介词宾语则不可能再作主语了。 ‎［误］ To read many books are good for you  ‎［正］ To read many books is good for you  ‎［析］ 不定式作主语应该看作单数主语。  ‎［误］ What he said are right  ‎［正］ What he said is right  ‎［析］ 从句作主语一定要按单数主语看待。  ‎［正］ The rich is not always happy  ‎［误］ The rich are not always happy  ‎［析］ 形容词＋定冠词表示一类人，谓语动词应用复数，如： The young are very interested in study and sports ‎［误］ The school master and writer are coming  ‎［正］ The school master and writer is coming  ‎［析］ 本句应译为：校长兼作家就要来了。而 The school master and the writer are coming 则要译为：校长和一个作家要来了。在英语表达法中确实有 The girl and boy are playing on the grass 这应译为：一个女孩，一个男孩在操场上玩。因为不可能这样两个概念作用在一个人身上。又如： the husband and wife 夫妻二人。 ‎［误］ You or she go to get some water for us  ‎［正］ You or she goes to get some water for us  ‎［析］ 由 or 连接的两个主语应以离谓语动词近的那一个计算其数。这样的用法还有 either … or，neither … nor， not only … but also 也有人称作"就近原则"。 ‎［误］ The teacher with a lot of students come into the classroom  ‎［正］ The teacher with a lot of students comes into the classroom  ‎［析］ 真正的主语是 the teacher， 而 with 短语是伴随状态，不影响主语的数。 ‎［误］ My glasses is broken  ‎［正］ My glasses are broken  ‎［误］ This pair of glasses are good  ‎［正］ This pair of glasses is good  ‎［误］ These kinds of butter is good. ‎［正］ These kinds of butter are good ‎［析］ 英语中有些名词只有复数形式，如： glasses 眼镜， shorts 短裤等。如没有量词在前时，要用复数谓语动词，但有了量词之后则要按量词的单复数计算。 ‎［误］ One of the boys are going to take part in the match  ‎［正］ One of the boys is going to take part in the match  ‎［析］ One of 结构应以 one 来计算主语的数。  ‎［误］ Half of the work are done  ‎［正］ Half of the work is done  ‎［误］ Half of the books is read  ‎［正］ Half of the books are read  ‎［析］ 在小于1的数量词作主语时，如： ２ ３ ，８０％，０．３５… ＋ of ＋名词，这时主语的数应按 of 后面的名词计算。如果名词是不可数名词或可数名词单数，则谓语动词要用单数，如名词是复数则要用复数谓语动词。 ‎［误］ Each sides are full of trees  ‎［正］ Each side is full of trees  ‎［误］ Both side is full of trees  ‎［正］ Both sides are full of trees  ‎［析］ each， either 其后都要加单数名词，而 both 后要加复数名词。 如： each， either， another， little， a little， much等作主语时，谓语动词全部要用单数形式。 ‎［误］ The boys each has an apple  ‎［正］ The boys each have an apple  ‎［析］ each 作同位语时，不影响句子的主语。 ‎［误］ Everyone of us has a ticket for the concert  ‎［正］ Every one of us has a ticket for the concert  ‎［析］ everyone， someone， everybody … 在作主语时都不能加 of 结构。‎ ‎［误］ Girls like dancing very much， but few likes playing football  ‎［正］ Girls like dancing very much， but few like playing football  ‎［析］ few 虽然含意上是"几乎没有"，但作主语时仍要当作复数。 ‎［误］ The number of the workers in that factory are two hundred  ‎［正］ The number of the workers in that factory is two hundred  ‎［析］ the number of 意为：某某的数字是…… 如： the number of students 学生人数， the number of players 运动员人数。不论数字如何都应看作单数。而 a number of 与 many 意思相同，其后加可数名词复数，谓语动词用复数形式。如： A number of students are playing on the grass ‎［误］ The rest of the students is here  ‎［正］ The rest of the students are here  ‎［误］ The rest of the work are done  ‎［正］ The rest of the work is done  ‎［析］ the rest of 的用法与２／３，一半，８０％＋ of 的结构一致， of 后面为可数名词复数时用复数谓语动词，为不可数名词或可数名词单数时用单数谓语动词。这样用法还有 lots of， a lot of， plenty of。 ‎［误］ The news in today's newspaper are not bad  ‎［正］ The news in today's newspaper is not bad  ‎［析］ 有些以 s 结尾的名词要用作不可数名词，它们是：news， physics， mathematics， thanks， … ‎［误］ The Chinese is kind and friendly  ‎［正］ The Chinese are kind and friendly  ‎［析］ Chinese 作为中文来讲是单数名词，但作为中国人讲是单复同形的名词。如： one Chinese， two Chinese … 而 The Chinese ＝ The people of China 要用复数谓语动词。‎ ‎［误］ This dictionary is too expensive for me Ten dollars are a big sum for me ‎［正］ This dictionary is too expensive for me Ten dollars is a big sum for me ‎［析］ 表示一段时间，一笔金钱，一段距离，都应看作单数名词。 ‎［误］ Who are going to take part in our football match?  ‎［正］ Who is going to take part in our football match?  ‎［析］ 用 who 提问时，习惯上用单数谓语动词，但 which 则要视其情况而定，如： which are better these shoeses or those shoes? 又如： which is better this one or that one?‎ ‎［误］ What a hot weather it is!  ‎［误］ How hot the weather it is!  ‎［正］ What hot weather it is!  ‎［正］ How hot the weather is!  ‎［析］ 感叹句是用来表达说话人的喜怒哀乐的感情。它由 what 与 how 作句子的开始，判定是用 what 还是用 how 的最好办法是将它们换为陈述句，比如： What the hot weather it is! 应转换为： It is the hot weather 那么句子的起点是单词 it。 再来看感叹句中 it 前有不可数名词 weather， 则只能用 what。 再看第二句 How hot the weather is! 转为陈述句时为： The weather is hot这时句子的开始单词为 the weather， 再来看感叹句在 the weather 前只有形容词，所以应用 how。 至于是用 what a 还是 what 要看名词的具体情况而定，单数可数名词加 what a 其余的加用 what。 ‎［误］ We have to sing this， have we?  ‎［误］ We have to sing this， haven't we?  ‎［正］ We have to sing this, don't we? ‎［析］ 在反意疑问句中除了标准的一些常规外，有一些例外：‎ Let's go home， shall we?‎ Let us go home， will you? She had to leave， didn't she? Do your homework at once， will you? There is not much good news in today's newspaper， is there? Neither of them are right， are they? I think he will come to the party won't he? think 后的宾语从句，与其他宾语从句不一样，在初中只有这样一个较特殊的词。这样的句子的反意疑问句的主语要用宾语从句中的主语，其助动词要用宾语从句的助动词，而肯定还是否定要看主句谓语动词而定，如： I don't think he is coming to our party， is he? ‎［误］ I want to know where does he live  ‎［正］ I want to know where he lives  ‎［析］ 宾语从句中一律要用陈述语序，而不用疑问语序。 ‎［误］ - I haven't got a ticket for the football match ‎- Nor I have  ‎［正］ - I haven't got a ticket for the football match ‎- Nor (Neither) have I  ‎［析］ nor， neither 用在简答否定句中时要采用倒装语序。在肯定句的简答句中则要用so， 如： I do my homework very quickly， So does Mary ‎［误］ Look! Here the bus comes!  ‎［正］ Look! Here comes the bus!  ‎［误］ Look! Here comes he!  ‎［正］ Look! Here he comes  ‎［析］ 在 there， here 打头的句子中，如果主语是名词，则要采用倒装语序；如果是人称代词则用一般语序。 ‎［误］ Do you want Mary to go to the cinema with us? No， I don't hope so  ‎［正］ Do you want Mary to go to the cinema with us? No， I hope not  ‎［析］ 我不这样想，可用 I don't think so 但 hope 的否定简答句只能用 I hope not 这是习惯用法。但这两个词的肯定简答句形是一样的，如： I think so. I hope so ‎［误］ That is difficult for us to learn English well  ‎［正］ It is difficult for us to learn English well  ‎［析］ It 这里的语法作用是形式主语，而真正的主语是后面的不定式。形式主语和形式宾语都要用 it 而不能用 that， 如： I think it difficult to learn English well it 在这句中是 think 的形式宾语。 ‎（三）　例题解析  ‎1　 There ＿＿＿ a pencilbox on the desk． A .is B.　are C. has D. have ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ There be 句形中的 be 动词要看其后面离它最近的名词而定，如： There are two books and a pencil on the desk 但却可以讲 There is a pencil and two books on the desk ‎2　 Could you tell me ＿＿＿ ? A　Mrs King where lives B　where does Mrs King live  C　where Mrs King lives D　Mrs King lives where ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 宾语从句中的疑问句要用陈述语序。 ‎3　 Your brother came to see you， ＿＿＿ ? A　does he B　doesn't he C　did he D　didn't he  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 前句是肯定句，后面反意疑问句要用否定句，同时 came 为过去时态，所以应用 didn't he ‎4　 It's getting cloudy， ＿＿＿ ? A　does' it B　doesn't it C　is it D　isn't it ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 要区分's 是 has 还是 is， 这里由 getting 得出's 是is。 ‎5　 ＿＿＿ keep me waiting so long． A　Not B　Won't C　Don't D　Not to ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ Don't ＋ 动词原形为祈始句的否定句。 ‎6　 Mr Green hasn't been to Beijing, ＿＿＿ ? A　has he B　hasn't he C　did he D　didn't he ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 此句 has 是助动词与过去分词构成现在完成时态。 ‎7　 You have your lunch at school, ＿＿＿ ? A　have you B　haven't you C　do you D　don't you  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 这里的 have 是实意动词"吃"，而不是助动词。 ‎8　 ＿＿＿ sunny day! Let's go out for a walk． A　How a B　How C　What a D　What ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 这个感叹句是个省略句，其真实的句子应为 What a sunny day it is! ‎9　 - Can you tell me ＿＿＿ ? - Sure She's a nurse A　where is your sister B　where your sister is  C　what is your sister D　what your sister is ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ who 问的是姓名，如： Who is he? He is Smith 或 He is my father What 问的是职业，如： What is he? He is a teacher ‎10　 John likes listening to the radio， ＿＿＿ ? A　does he B　doesn't he C　doesn't John D　does Johe ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 当名词作主语时，反意疑问句应用代词。 ‎11　 Neither you nor I ＿＿＿ on the team． A　are B　were C　am D　is ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 由 neither … nor … 作连接词作主语时，其谓语动词要与相临近的那个主语相呼应。 ‎12　 ＿＿＿ delicious food! I'd like some more． A　what a B　How a C　What D　How ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 因 food 为不可数名词。 ‎13　 ＿＿＿ there a cat under the chair? A　Are B　Is C　Has D　Have ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这是 there be 句型的疑问句。 ‎14　 Could you tell me ＿＿＿ ? A　when the train will arrive B　when the train arrived  C　when did the train arrive D　when does the train arrives ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ could 用于现在时疑问句表达了口气的委婉，并不是过去时态。且宾语从句要用陈述语句。 ‎15　 - ＿＿＿ bad weather! ‎- Yes， But it's going to be fine soon， I think A　How B　What a C　What an D　What ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ weather 为不可数名词。 ‎16　 - Could you tell me ＿＿＿ ? ‎- Yes， They ＿＿＿ to the library A　where are the twins， have been ‎ B　where were the twins， have been  C　where the twins are， have gone ‎ D　where the twins were， have gone ‎ ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ have been to 是去过什么地方，而现在回来了。 have gone to 是到某地去了，人现在不在这里。 ‎17　 Go and ＿＿＿ the TV quickly The volleyball match will begin right away． A　turn off B　turn down C　turn up D　turn on  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 这是个祈使句，它由 and 连接两个动词。注意词组搭配的不同含义。‎ ‎18　 Let's go for some tea， ＿＿＿ ? A　shall we B　will we C　do we D　don't we ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ Let's go …， shall we? Let us go …， will you?这是两个特殊的反意疑问句。 ‎ ‎19　 Joan's short， ＿＿＿ ? A　wasn't she B　hasn't she C　isn't she D　doesn't she ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 在此句中应视's为is，而不是 has 或 was。 ‎20　 I don't know ＿＿＿ to read the word． A　which B　what C　whose D　how ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 因不定式 to read 中的 read 是及物动词，已有自己的宾语 the word， 所以应用疑问副词 how。 ‎21　 He didn't go to school， ＿＿＿ he was ill． A　for B　but C　and D　so ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 这里是表示因果的关系，从句表示原因，所以用 for，放于句尾，且常常前面有一个逗号。so 引起的是结果状语从句，如： He was only twelve， so he couldn't join the army ‎22　 The young woman can hardly ride a bike， ＿＿＿ she? A　doesn't B　does C　can't D　can ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ hardly 为否定词，所以应视此句为否定句。其后的反意疑问句应用肯定句。 ‎23　 Tom never goes to the cinema on Sundays， ＿＿＿ ? A　does he B　doesn't he C　isn't he D　is he ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ never 也是否定词，所以应将句子看作否定句。 ‎24　 Mother said to him， "Don't ＿＿＿ on football．" A　spend too much time B　to spend too much time  C　spend too many time D　to spend too many time ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ time 作为"时间"讲为不可数名词，应用 much 来修饰。当作"次数"讲是可数名词，如 three times 三次，而 Don't … 这一句是祈使句的否定句。 ‎25　 Mr White， together with some Japanese friends， ＿＿＿ visit our school this afternoon． A　are going to B　is going to C　have D　has ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 句子的主语是Mr White， 而together with … 是伴随状况，不影响句子的主语。 ‎26　 There is little water in the glass， ＿＿＿ ? A　is it B　is there C　isn't it D　isn't there ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这是 there be 句型的反意疑问句。 ‎27　 Ampere was thinking about a maths problem， ＿＿＿ ? A　didn't he B　wasn't he C　did he D　is he ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这是进行时态的反意疑问句。 ‎28　 She had a good time yesterday， ＿＿＿ she ? A　wasn't B　didn't C　hasn't D　isn't ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ had 这里是实意动词而不是助动词。 ‎29　 We'll make ＿＿＿ for you in the front of the car． A　a room B　room C　rooms D　some rooms ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ room 此处为不可数名词，意为"地方，空间"。 ‎30　 Neither she nor I ＿＿＿ to the Great wall before． A　has gone B　have gone C　have been D　has been ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 由neither … nor 连接两个主语时，其谓语动词应与相临近的那个主语相呼应。 ‎31　 Help me collect these books， ＿＿＿ ? A　are you B　will you C　do you D　shall you ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 祈使句的反意疑问句应用 will you， 而Let's go 例外，其反意疑问句为 shall we?‎ ‎32　 The number of deer， mountain lions and wild roses ‎ ‎＿＿＿ change much if people leave things as they are． A　don't B　doesn't C　isn't D　didn't ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ the number of 为"……的数量、数目"，所以谓语动词用单数形式。而 a number of 要加复数名词，其谓语动词也用复数。 ‎33　 She's had breakfast， ＿＿＿ ? A　is she B　isn't she C　hasn't she D　has she  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 这里的's应视为 has ‎34　 I wonder ＿＿＿ ． A　whose bicycle is it B　it is whose bicycle C　is it whose bicycle D　whose bicycle it is ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ wonder 后的宾语从句应用陈述语序。 ‎35　 It is good for us ＿＿＿ morning exercises． A　do B　to do C　did D　done ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这里的 it 是形式主语，而真正的主语是不定式 to do … ‎36　 Peter has sports very often， ＿＿＿ ? A　does， Peter B　doesn't he C　doesn't Peter D　does he  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ has 这里是实意动词，而主语为名词时其反意疑问句中的主语要用代词。‎ ‎37　 Mr Black said， "Jenny， don't be late tomorrow" Mr Black told Jenny ＿＿＿ ． A　don't be late tomorrow B　didn't be late tomorrow  C　not be late next morning D　not to be late the next day ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ tell 一般要加双宾语，其间接宾语是 Jenny， 直接宾语是不定式。而这里用的是不定式的否定形式。 ‎38　 Li Mei read the newspaper to the granny， ＿＿＿ ? A　does she B　didn't she C　did she D　wasn't she ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ read这里是过去时态，因其主语是第三人称单数，而 read 并未加 s 所以是过去时态。(read 的过去时与过去分词都是 read，只不过读音不同) ‎ ‎ 二、 定 语 从 句  ‎（一） 知识概要  定语从句并不属于中考范围，但由于作者在多年的教学中体会到，这一语法现象影响了许多学生自学英语。这些学生一般是成绩较好的学生，想进行大量阅读来提高自己的英语水平，但总是碰到一些问题，百思不得其解。苦于自己的水平只限于初中水平，无法提高，但各种补习班又都是为一些水平较差的学生开设的，所以又投师无门。为了解决这部分学生的学习困难，也为那些有志青年铺平学习上的道路，特用这一节讲述定语从句，不是从语法上讲述，而是从阅读理解方面去讲述。可供同学们在学习时参考。这会对你的英语学习起到事半功倍的作用。对于形容词我们已十分熟悉了，如： a good book， 形容词 good 用来修饰书 book。 我们也可以用一个句子来修饰名词，这种句子叫做形容词性从句，它起修饰名词的作用，又被叫做定语从句(The attributive clause)。但有一点不同的是这个从句不是像形容词那样放于名词前，而是放在名词之后。它所修饰的名词又被叫作先行词，如： Do you know the scientist who gave us the talk this afternoon?‎ ‎ 这句中的主句是 Do you know the scientist? (你知道那位科学家吗?)而 who gave us the talk this afternoon (他今天下午给我们作的报告。)是定语从句。所以这两句话合为一体即是：你认识今天下午给我们作报告的那位科学家吗?这里 scientist 叫作先行词，而 who 叫作定语从句的引导词。 who 在定语从句中起主语的作用， who 的数与它的先行词相同。又如： You must do everything that I do 这里先行词是 everything， 而 that I do 是定语从句，此句应译为：你必须作我所作的一切。 that 叫作定语从句的引导词，在句中作 do 的宾语。引导定语从句的引导词有关系代词： that， which， who， whom， whose 和关系副词 when， where， why， how。不论关系代词还是关系副词，都应放于先行词和定语从句之间，起联系作用，但它们都要在定语从句中起语法作用，充当一个成份。如关系代词在定语从句中不是作主语便是作宾语，而关系副词则是作状语。我们先来看关系代词的用法。①　that 的先行词可以是人也可以是物。如： A plane is a machine that can fly 这里先行词是 machine 而 that 是关系代词，在定语从句中作主语。这句译为：飞机是一种会飞的机器。又如： I like the book (that) you lent me yesterday 这里先行词是 book， 关系代词用 that， 它在定语从句中作 lend (借)的宾语。要注意的是关系代词在定语从句中作宾语时可以省略，即： I like the book you lent me yesterday②　which 关系代词的先行词只能是物。它在定语从句中作主语或宾语，如： The book shop is a shop which sells books 这里 shop 是先行词， which 在从句中作主语。又如： The book (which) I read last night was wonderful 这里主句是 The book was wonderful 而定语从句是修饰主句的主语 book， 即我昨晚读的那本书，which 在定语从句中作 read 的宾语，可以省略。③　who， whom， whose who 在定语从句中作主语， whom 是 who 的宾格，在定语从句中作宾语，而 whose 则是形容词性物主代词，在从句中作定语，如：The man who visited our school yesterday is an American friend 昨天参观我们学校的人是一位美国朋友。 Who 在定语从句中作主语。又如： Who's that woman (whom) you just talked to ? 你刚才与之谈话的那个女人是谁?而 whom 作定语从句中介词 to 的宾语，可以省略，而在现代英语中，句首的 whom 也常常可用 who代替。This is our classmate， Mary， whose home is not far from our school 这是我们的同学玛丽，她的家离我们学校不远。为了便于理解，我们来看看是如何将两句话并为一句话的。 ‎１．　 I saw the man. He closed the door I saw the man who (that) closed the door ‎2．　 The girl is happy She won the race The girl who won the race is happy ‎3．　 The students are from China They sit in the front row The students who sit in the front row are from China ‎(要注意的是先行词是 students 则 who 的数也应看作复数。) ‎4．　 We are studying sentences They contain adjective dause We are studying sentences that (which) contain adjective dause  ‎5．　 The taxi driver was friendly He took me to the airport The taxi driver who took me to the airport was friendly  ‎6．　 The book was good I read it The book that I read was good The book I read was good  ‎7．　 The people were very nice We visited them yesterday The people we visited yesterday were very nice ‎8．　 The man called the police His wallet was stolen The man whose wallet was stolen called the police ‎9．　 I come from a country Its history goes back thousands of years I come from a country whose history goes back thousands of years ‎10．　 I have to call the man I picked up his umbrella after the meeting I have to call the man whose umbrella I picked up after the meeting 关系代词 whom， which 在定语从句中作介词宾语时，可以和介词一起放于先行词与定语从句之间，有时为了关系紧凑也可以将 whom 与 which 与先行词紧挨着书写，而将介词置于定语从句的后面，如：‎ That was the room in which we had lived for ten years 或可以写作：‎ That was the room which we had lived in for ten years He was the man whom(who) you were looking for 要注意的是此句的关系代词 whom 可以用主格取代，而 look for 是短语动词也不可将 for 放于定语从句之前。that 作关系代词作介词宾语时，不能紧跟介词，而只能将介词置于定语从句的后面。如： The man that we were talking about has come to our school 这时不可用 about that … 请看下面例句： ‎1．　 The meeting was interesting I went to it The meeting that I went to was interesting  ‎2．　 The man was very kind I talked to him yesterday The man who I talked to yesterday was very kind ‎3．　 I must thank the people I got a present from him I must thank the people who I got a present from ‎4．　 The picture was beautiful She was looking at it The picture that (which) she was looking at was beautiful ‎5．　 The man is standing over there I told you about him The man who I told you about is standing over there  除关系代词外，还有关系副词， when， where， why， 其中 when用来指时间，在定语从句中作时间状语。如： I never forget the day when I first came to the Great Wall 而 where 则指地点，如： This is the house where the old man lives 请看下面例句：‎ ‎1．　 The city was beautiful We spent our vacation there The city where we spent our vacation was beautiful  ‎2．　 That is the restaurant I will meet you there That is the restaurant where I will meet you  ‎3．　 The town is small I grew up there The town where I grew up is small  ‎4．　 That is the drawer I keep my newpapers there That is the drawer where I keep my newspapers  ‎5．　 Monday is the day We will come then Monday is the day When we will came  ‎6．　 ７∶０５ is the time My plane arrives then ‎７∶０５ is the time when my plane arrives  ‎7．　 １９６０ is the year The revolution took place then ‎１９６０ is the year when the revolution took place  ‎8．　 July is the month The weather is usually the hottest then July is the month when the weather is usually the hottest  在定语从句中又可分为两大类定语从句，即限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。 ‎①　限制性定语从句是先行词在意义上不可缺少的定语，如果去掉的话，主句的意思就不完整，意义就表述不明。这种句型一般定语从句紧接先行词，如：I was the only person in my office who was invited ‎②　非限制性定语从句。它与主句的关系不十分密切，只是对其附加说明，也就是讲即便去掉定语从句，句意也不受影响，仍然清晰明了。这样的定语从句要在它和主句之间加一逗号分开。且关系代词不引导这种非限制性定语从句，如： Abraham Lincoln， who led the United States through these years， was shot on April １４，　１８６５ at a theatre in washington Ｄ．　Ｃ．　又如：Galileo lived in the city of Pisa， where there is a leaning tower about 180 feet high ‎（二） 正误辨析  ‎［误］ I won't tell you the name of the person who teach me English  ‎［正］ I won't tell you the name of the person who teaches me English  ‎［析］ 在定语从句中，关系代词作主语时，从它本身看不出其数的形式，这时要由它的先行词决定。这里who 应由 the person 单数决定，应该用单数谓语动词。又如：I who am a student want to find a spare time job这里的 who 应与 I 是一致的，所以其谓语动词应该用am。 ‎ ‎［误］ We talked about the things and the people who we met during the Second World War  ‎［正］ We talked about the things and the people that we met during the Second World War  ‎［析］ 这里的关系代词不要用 who， 因为其先行词有两个一个是 things (物)，而另一个是people (人)，这时既不可用 who， 又不可用 which， 因前者只能用于先行词是人的情况下，而后者则用于先行词是物的情况下，所以只能用 that， 因为它的先行词既可以是人又可以是物。 ‎［误］ The book， that I bought yesterday， was very good ‎［正］ The book， which I bought yesterday， was very good  ‎［析］ 先行词与定语从句被逗号分割开来时，即作为非限制性定语从句。在非限制性定语从句中 which， when， who， whom， where， when， whose 等都可以和限制性定语从句中的作用一样，而独有 that ‎ 不易用于非限制性定语从句。 ‎［误］ The dictionary which I lent it yesterday is a very useful tool  ‎［正］ The dictionary which I lent yesterday is a very useful tool  ‎［析］ 关系代词在定语从句中是要起语法作用的，它不是作主语就是作宾语。虽然在作宾语时它的位置由原来的宾语位置移到了句首，但它的作用依然存在，而且在原宾语位置上不能再出现宾语。 ‎［误］ The teacher I want to learn English from is the one which comes from America ‎［正］ The teacher I want to learn English from is the one who comes from America ‎ ‎［析］ the one， anyone， those 作代词并且是指某人、物时，其关系代词不能用 which 应用 who。 ‎［误］ This is the room in that the old man lives  ‎［正］ This is the room in which the old man lives  ‎［正］ This is the room which the old man lives in  ‎［正］ This is the room that the old man lives in  ‎［析］ that 不能紧跟在介词后作介词宾语，但如果介词不前置仍放于句尾，则可用 that 作引导词，而且可以省略。如： This is the room the old man lives in ‎［误］ I can do everything which is good for you  ‎［正］ I can do everything that is good for you  ‎［析］ 在先行词是 all， much， little， something， everything， anything， nothing， none， the one 等不定代词时，虽然它们指的是物体，但不要用 which 而用 that 作定语从句的引导词。 ‎［误］ The only thing which the students can do is studying hard  ‎［正］ The only thing that the students can do is studying hard  ‎［析］ 在先行词前有 only， any， few， little， no， all， one of 等词修饰时，虽然先行词指的是物，也不要用 which 作关系代词，而要用 that。 ‎［误］ This is the first American film which I've ever seen  ‎［正］ This is the first American film that I've ever seen  ‎［析］ 在先行词是序数词，或由序数词修饰时，其关系代词不可用 which 这样的用法还有在形容词最高级修饰的先行词之后，如： This is the best book that I have ever seen ‎［误］ He is from Africa, that we can see from the colour of the skin  ‎［正］ He is from Africa, as we can see from the colour of the skin  ‎［析］ 当 as 或 which 引导非限制性定语从句时，它可能没有明确的先行词，它们所指代的是前面整个句子。如例题应译为他是从非洲来这个事情是可以从其肤色上看出的。 ‎ 三、 常见习惯用语  ‎（一）　知识概要  由于英语国家的语言习惯与中国的语言习惯有许多不同之处，所以造成了许多同学在做选择或书写，或与人交谈中造成误用中国方式来对英语的问句作解答。例如一个小女孩十分好看，可爱，外国人见到时会讲： You are so beautiful ‎ 这时的答语应该是 Thank you 如果外国人发现你的英语不错，他们会讲： Your English is very good 这时中国人常常会说：不，我说的不好。这纯是一种礼貌的答语，但是不符合英语习惯。它正确的答语应是 Thank you 虽然交际英语有一些规律可讲，但更重要的是学习外国的生活习惯，了解他们的文化背景，历史渊源，这样才能真正的学好一门外语。 ‎（二）　正误辨析  ‎［误］ - What can I do for you? ‎- Yes， please help me  ‎［正］ - What can I do for you? ‎- I'd like to buy a sweater  ‎［析］ What can I do for you? 这一问语实际上用于的情景很多，要根据具体情况而定。如在商店中售货员讲这句话应译为：您想要点什么?在其他场合也可以被译为：我能为您做些什么?它的答语应是直接讲出想让对方提供的帮助。 ‎［误］ - Which colour do you like? ‎- Sorry， I don't like  ‎［正］ - Which colour do you like? ‎- I prefer blue  ‎［析］ 由 which 来提问的问句是要回答具体的选择，而不能泛指，泛泛的回答。如 Yes， I like it ‎［误］ Do you like to come with us tonight?  ‎［正］ Would you like to come with us tonight?  ‎［析］ Do you like … 问的是对方的习惯，如： Do you like swimming? Do you like collecting stamps? 而 would you like … 则是一次性的邀请、提议。邀请的英语表达法还有如下几种： Shall we go? 我们走吧! Let's go? 让我们走吧! How about having a cup of tea? 喝杯茶如何? What about a cup of coffee 喝杯咖啡如何? Why not buy it? 为什么不买呢? 其肯定答语一般为Certainly， Yes， O．Ｋ．　All right， With pleasure ‎［误］ Sorry， I've kept you waiting Not at all  ‎［正］ Sorry， I've kept you waiting Never mind  ‎［析］ "介意不介意"这一问法与答语在中英文中有所不同。如： ‎- Do you mind my smoking here?- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  Ａ．　Yes， do it please Ｂ．　No， of course not Ｃ．　Yes， take it please Ｄ．　No， you can't take it 这时正确的选择应是B。 其意为：不介意，当然不。而A选项则自相矛盾了，它应译为：是的我介意，请抽吧。而D选项是：不介意，你不能抽。当向对方争求意见时，可以有以下问法：‎ Do you mind if I open the door? Would you mind mailing the letter for me 其答语如果是同意应为： Certainly not， not at all 而不同意时应为 Yes， 或 I'm sorry ‎［误］ What's that man? He is Mike  ‎［正］ What's that man? He is a teacher  ‎［正］ Who's that man? He is Mike (He is Mike's father)  ‎［析］ 由 what 提问是问的职业，由 who 提问问的是姓名或身份。 ‎［误］ - How much are they? ‎- Half a kilo， please  ‎［正］ - How many bananas do you want? ‎- Half a kilo Please  ‎［析］ How much are they? 问的是价格而不是实际物品的多少。 ‎［误］ I'm sorry， but is this the way to the park?  ‎［正］ Excuse me， but is this the way to the park?  ‎［析］ I'm sorry 是对已经做错了的事向对方道歉时的开始语。而 Excuse me 是在打扰对方之前表达歉意的话。 ‎［误］ - Have a good time tonight! ‎- You are the same  ‎［正］ - Have a good time tonight! ‎- The same to you  ‎［析］ The same to you 是表达我也祝您有个愉快的夜晚，它是美语中的习惯用法。 ‎［误］ - What's the problem? ‎- I've got a headache  ‎［正］ What's wrong with you? I've got a headache  ‎［析］ What's wrong with you? 是询问对方身体状态如何，而 What's the problem?是问对方遇到了什么麻烦。 ‎［误］ - Now， I'm back Can I play? ‎- Perhaps You'd better do your homework first  ‎［正］ - Now， I'm back Can I play? ‎- I'm afraid not You'd better do your homework first  ‎［析］ Perhaps 是表示对一种拿不准的事态的推论，如： Am I right? Perhaps而 I'm afraid not 则表达一种不同意的态度。 be afraid 的几种用法有： I'm afraid that you are right 其后直接加宾语从句。 ‎- Will you come to my birthday party? ‎- I'm afraid not I have to go to see my father He is in hospital 其后＋not，表示否定。 ‎- Sorry， I don't want to go there alone， I'm afraid of the dog 其后＋名词，表示对某人，某物的害怕。 Mary is afraid of making mistakes in the exam 其后＋ of ＋ 动名词，表示害怕做某事。 Mary is afraid to see the teacher because she didn't do well in the exam 其后＋ 不定式，表示不敢去做某事。 ‎［误］ - How soon will you be ready? ‎- Two days  ‎［正］ - How soon will you be ready? ‎- In two days  ‎［析］ 此题关键是要根据情景，身临其境，要注意的是对方问了什么，就应答什么。或答了什么就应问什么。 How soon 问的是"还有多久才能作完"，这时要用 in two days， 即在两小时之内即可以作完。如用 How long 提问，则答语可以用 two days。 ‎［误］ - Would you mind if I have some time off? ‎- I don't mind ‎- Monday and Tuesday of next week  ‎［正］ - Would you mind if I have some time off? ‎- When exactly ‎- Monday and Tuesday of next week  ‎［析］ 有的对话是复杂的，稍有不慎就有可能选错，而且英语中如选错了答案是不容易找出错来的。 I don't mind 是可以用来回答 Would you mind…这一提问的，但如仔细看一看则会发现我们要选用的不是陈述句而是疑问句。根据下面一句的答语来判定要用 when exactly? 什么时间，这样才能与下句中具体的时间相符合。 ‎［误］ Suppose your name is Tom The phone rings and you pick it up The first word you say will probably be "Who are you?"  ‎［正］ Suppose your name is Tom The phone rings and you pick it up The first word you say will probably be "Hello? This is Tom speaking?"  ‎［析］ 在英语学习中，习惯用法实际上在某种情况，或某种意义上讲比语法更为重要。如果只从句子的角度上去分析，它们可能都是对的。比如，当你拿起电话时，如果你想知道对方是谁，可以问"Who's that(speaking)?"但不要讲"Who are you?"如果你想先介绍一下自己可以讲"This is ×××× speaking"而不要讲"I'm　××××"也不要讲"My name is ×××××．"　就语法而论，"Who are you?" "I'm ××××""My name is ×××××"并不错，也是英语中可用的句子，但就打电话这一场合，就不宜用了。 ‎［误］ - Do you think it's going to rain over the weekend? ‎- I don't hope so  ‎［正］ - Do you think it's going to rain over the weekend? ‎- I hope not  ‎［析］ 由于初学者对实际英语口语中表达感情意愿的答语不熟悉，如在肯定答语中 I think so I hope so I believe so 是相同的，但在否定句中却常用 I don't think so 但I don't believe so 和 I don't hope so 则意为：我不信此事和我不希望此事发生。而 I believe not 和 I hope not 则为：我想可能不会发生吧! ‎［误］ - Is anybody there? ‎- No， Bob and Tom have asked for leave  ‎［正］ - Is everybody there? ‎- No， Bob and Tom have asked for leave  ‎［析］ 许多学生在写作和选择答语或问句时总要语法在前，而不是习惯用语在先。所以总是要拘泥疑问句中的不定代词，用 anybody。 但是Is anybody there? 在英语中为：这里有人吗?而Is everybody there?为：全都到齐了吗?所以首先要考虑的是其答语。 No， Bob and Tom have asked for leave ‎［误］ - Your handwriting is very good! ‎- No， my handwriting is very poor  ‎［正］ - Your handwriting is very good! ‎- Thank you  ‎［析］ 中国人遇到别人称赞，总是以谦逊为美德。但英美人则往往认为自信是美德。所以当别人夸奖你或赞美你时，就应说： Thank you 又比如中国人见面时常讲 Where are you going? 或 Have you had your breakfast yet?而英美人则认为你过多的干预别人的私生活了。而他们见面时往往问一些无关紧要的话，如： Hello! How are you going? (你过得怎样) Morning! 等。而 good morning 和 How do you do 则被认为是较正规的问候语，在日常生活中则十分少见。 ‎［误］ When you have had dinner with an American friend and want to leave you may say： "Excuse me I'll go first"  ‎［正］ When you have had dinner with an American friend and want to leave you may say： "Excuse me I have to go"  ‎［析］ 这两句答语都是正确的，其关键不是语法，而是习惯问题。如果在这样的场合你讲 I'll go first 朋友们会迷惑不解，而 I have to go 则表示由于外界的特殊原因而造成的你要离去，而你本人则十分不愿做此事。 ‎［误］ - Would you like to come to dinner tonight? ‎- I'd like to， and I'm too busy  ‎［正］ - Would you like to come to dinner tonight? ‎- I'd like to， but I'm too busy  ‎［析］ I'm too busy 与 I'd like to 在意义上正好相反。所以要用转折连词。这里考查了对词义合乎逻辑的表达能力。所以要强调语言环境，更要强调在语言的基础上的词语辨析。 ‎［误］ - Where's Deter? ‎- Deter will come with us tonight but he isn't very sure yet  ‎［正］ - Where's Deter? ‎- Deter may come with us tonight but he isn't very sure yet  ‎［析］ 由于 but 所引出的句子可以看出 Deter 的来与不来是十分不确定的，所以应用 may 来表达一个不肯定的事件。 ‎［误］ - Hi， haven't seen you for ages! You look fine! ‎- Great You look well too  ‎［正］ - Hi， haven't seen you for ages! You look fine! ‎- Thanks You look well too  ‎［析］ 要注意的是 Great 在口语中多表示惊叹，而 Thanks 则表示感谢对方的称赞。 所以对情景谈话要有准确的判定，要根据情景，身临其境，上下对照，周密思考，弄清场合，注意英美人的风俗习惯，注重语义上的词语辨析，并要进行大量的语言实践练习，扩大实际交际能力。 ‎（三）　例题解析  ‎1　 - Would you like to have some rice? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Yes， I like B　Yes， please C　of course D　Yes， I have  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 当对方对你发出邀请的问语时，如果你想接受则讲 Yes， please 如不想接受则用No， thanks ‎2　 - Nice to see you - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Good morning B　Happy to meet you， too  C　Nice to see you， too D　Pleased to meet you， too  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 虽然A、B、D三个选项都可以作为某种问候语的答语，但英语中问候语的答语多用重复对方的话，以表达同样的心情。 ‎3　 - Would you please give me some water? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Yes， I would B　Certainly C　No， thanks D　Yes， please  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 当对方发出十分礼貌的请求帮助的问语时，一般的回答是肯定的。而Yes， please 为"是的，您请做某事吧"。这一含意显然不对。 ‎4　 - Thank you very much for helping me ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　You're welcome B　It doesn't matter ‎ C　No need D　Don't say that  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ You're welcome 译为中文为：不用谢。而 It doesn't matter 则为：没关系。 ‎5　 - Hello， Lucy How are you? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ And you? A　Fine， thanks B　Yes， I am ‎ C　Glad to meet you D　Good afternoon  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 在正常交往中一定要避免所问非所答。所以对 How are you? 的答语应为"很好，谢谢!" ‎6　 - Help yourself to some meat ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　It sounds nice． B　Yes， please．  C　Yes， Let's help each other． D　Thank you．‎  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ Help yourself to some meat． 你自己拿些肉吃吧。其意为主人劝客人不要客气，像在家里一样。 ‎7　 - Oh， I am not feeling well I've got a cold ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Fine， How are you? B　Never mind Take care  C　Well， I 'm sure to get weel soon． D　I'm sorry to hear that ‎  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 这是美国、英国的习惯用语，而B、 C则是中国人常讲的答语。 ‎8　 - Meimei you speak English very well ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　No， I don't think so B　Thank you very much C　Not good enough D　That's all right  ‎［答案］ B. ‎9　 - "Kate， could you answer the telephone， please?" ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ , Mum I'll get it． A　Yes， I could B　No， thanks  C　OK D　Yes， but I have no time  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 要注意 could 用于口语中是为了讲话的口气委婉，但它不是过去时态，也不是助动词，而应看作情态动词。所以在答语中则不应这样用。 ‎10　 - Could you look after Polly for me while we're away? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　No， thanks． B　With pleasure．  C　I'm not afraid． D　I'm sure you will．‎  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ With pleasure 是英语中的一句十分客气的答语，用在当对方因你的帮助或你的许诺向你道谢时，表达自己十分乐意为对方效力的口气。 ‎11　 - Hello! Could I speak to the headmaster， please? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Hold on， please． B　That's the headmaster， please．  C　Who are you ? please． D　Sorry I'm not the headmaster．‎  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ hold on， please 是指请对方等一等不要将电话放下的用语。如果要讲我就是的话不能用 that， 而要用 this， 在电话用语中 that 指对方， this 指自己。 ‎12　 - Happy birthday! ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Thank you． B　The same to you．  C　Good luck． D　Congratulations．‎  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ the same to you 是同样祝贺对方的意思，不能用于生日这一祝贺语，除非两人的生日在同一天。 ‎13　 - I'm sorry I don't know the way， either You'd better ask that policeman for help ‎ ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Good night． B　That's nothing．  C　Very well． D　Thank you all the same．‎  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 当向对方求助时，对方无能为力，这时的感谢语则为 Thank you all the same 意为不管如何还是要谢谢你。 ‎14　 - I fell and hurt my leg last week， So I can't do anything ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I'm sorry B　Don't worry ‎ C　Good luck D　Bad luck  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 如果用A则要用 I'm sorry to hear that而不能单用 I'm sorry 因I'm sorry 是向对方道歉。而 bad luck 为真是不幸啊。 ‎15　 - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  ‎- I have got a cough A　What's your trouble? B　What have you got?  C　Why did you come here? D　Have you got a cough?‎  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ What's your trouble? 多用于问对方有什么问题、麻烦或得了什么病。这种用语还有 What's wrong with you? ‎16　 - Would you like to go shopping with me? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Yes， I'd love to． B　That's right． ‎ C　Yes， please． D　Quite well．‎  ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ 表示愿意作某事应讲：I'd love to I'd like to ‎17　 - What's the weather like today! ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　It's nice for a walk． B　I like autumn best of all． C　It will be fine tomorrow． D　It's rather cold today．‎  ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］‎ ‎ 本题要注意问的是什么，不要所问非所答。因问题是今天的天气怎样，所以只能选D ‎18　 - Is Jane in ，please? I want to speak to her ‎- Sorry， she is out You'd better ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　visit her in the office B　call her later  C　see her this afternoon D　speak to her yourself  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ call her later 晚些时候再来电话。 ‎19　 - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  ‎- Very well， thank you， and you? A　How do you do? B　Good morning  C　How are you these days? D　How do you like English?‎  ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 本题是由答语来推断问话，所以应熟悉英语的问答习惯： How do you do? 的答语应为 How do you do? ‎20　 - How is your mother? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　She is old． B　She is no better than she was．  C　She is kindhearted． D　She is in her forties．‎  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ How is your mother? 问的是你妈身体如何，而B选项则是"她不比以前强"。而其他三个选项则是所问非所答。 ‎21　 - Thank you very much for your help ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　You're welcome B　Please don't ‎ C　There's no trouble D　No， no  ‎［答案］ A. ‎22　 Your uncle has taken you to the cinema Afterwards you thank him ‎ He says " ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ．" A　It was nothing B　I'm glad you enjoyed it  C　Don't say it D　No， needn't  ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 这是英语的答语，千万不要选A，因它是中文习惯的答语。 ‎23　 - Thank you for your good present ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　It's not good B　No， no ‎ C　My pleasure D　Never mind  ‎［答案］ C. ‎24　 When someone did a good deed for you， you should say ‎ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A.you are too good B.It's very kind of you C.you are very kind D.I'll thank you ‎［答案］ B. ‎25　 - I am very sorry I am late for dinner  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A.No， you aren't B.That's all right C.Yes， you are D.No， you don't ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ That's all right 没关系。 ‎26　 - I'm sorry if I hurt you ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I'm sorry B　It's not true  C　It doesn't matter D　Don't say sorry  ‎［答案］ C. ‎27　 - I should have gone to see the exhibition with you  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I'm sorry B　What a pity  C　It doesn't matter to me D　That's terrible ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ What a pity. 真遗憾。第一句应为我真该和你一起去展览会。 ‎28　 - Help yourself to some fish ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　You are very kind B　Yes， I'm helping myself  C　Thank you D　Yes， don't worry about me ‎［答案］ C. ‎29　 - Are you ready?-______ ． A　I'm very sorry B　Try to be patient  C　Not yet， wait a minute D　Do you have the time， please?‎ ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ not yet 意为还没有完成。 ‎30　 - Mum， I have passed the exam ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　That's all right B　Congratulations ‎ C　You are luck D　Good luck to you ‎［答案］ B. ‎31　 - I think I have to leave I hope we can get together again ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　All right B　That's all right ‎ C　OK D　I hope so， too ‎［答案］ D. ‎32　 Must I wait till he comes back?  ． A　No， you needn't B　No， you mustn't  C　No， you may not D　No， you can't ‎［答案］ A. ‎［析］ must 提问表示必须这样做吗?而肯定句要用 must， 表示必须做，而否定句则要用 needn't 表示没有必要做。 ‎33　 - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ I pay you the house rent right away? ‎- Yes， you have to do it A　Shall B　Way C　Must D　Have ‎［答案］ C. ‎34　 - Don't you think this colour is too bright?  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　Yes， I agree． B　Yes， but I don't think so．  C　Yes， of course not． D　Yes， what's wrong?‎ ‎［答案］ A. ‎35　 - It was cold yesterday ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　So was it B　So it was ‎ C　I believe not so D　I believe not ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ 当答语只是重复对方讲的话时，则不用倒装。因 so it was即为：是的，天气昨天很冷。而当讲前面讲的动作也适合于另一个人时，则要倒装。如： I went to the cinema yesterday So did I 表示对方去了电影院，我也去了。 ‎36　 - What do you think of the song? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I like music very much B　I like it too  C　With pleasure D　It sounds sweet ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ sound 在这里是系动词，为听起来很甜美。系动词后要用形容词，而不要用被动语态。 ‎37　 Do you like tea or coffee? ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Yes， I do B　Thank you ‎ C　That's fine D　Either will do ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ either will do 为两者哪个都可以。 ‎38　 I like your sweater very much ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　No， it's ugly B　Sorry ‎ C　Thank you D　You're welcome ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 这是英美语言的习惯。 ‎39　 He likes travelling by train  ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　So do I B　I dos ‎ C　I like so D　I like it， neither ‎［答案］ A. ‎40　 - How do you like your school? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I like it very much B　It's very beautiful C　I doesn't like it D　Very well ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ How do you like … 是问你们学校是怎样值得你热爱的。也就是为什么你热爱你的学校。 ‎41　 What a nice day!  ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  A　You're right． B　No， isn't it? ‎ C　Yes， isn't it? D　Really?‎ ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ Yes， isn't it 是的，难道不是个好天气吗? ‎42　 - Hello， ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ? ‎- This is Della speaking A　Who are you B　Are you Tom  C　Who is that D　Please tell me who are you ‎［答案］ C. ‎［析］ 电话用语中 that 指对方，而 this 指自己。 ‎43　 -What's he like?  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　He likes English B　He is old  C　He is like a farmer D　He is tall and this ‎［答案］ D. ‎［析］ 要区分 What's he like? 如 What does he like? 前者为：他长得什么样?而后者是：他喜欢什么。 ‎44　 How did you do your job?  Not very well， ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　I'm sure B　I am afraid ‎ C　Thank you D　I'm sorry ‎［答案］ B. ‎［析］ I am afraid 我恐怕是，我想是。 ‎45　 - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ your aunt? ‎-She is a principal of a middle school A　What does B　Where does ‎ C　What is D　Whom is ‎［答案］ C. ‎46　 - ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿  ‎- He is my boss A　What's the man? B　Who is the man?  C　How is the man? D　What does the man do?‎ ‎［答案］ B. ‎47　 - May I have your name?  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　No， no B　You're polite ‎ C　Call me John D　It's kind of you  ‎［答案］ C. ‎48　 - Shall I make coffee for you?  ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Yes， thank you B　No， don't trouble  C　Don't trouble this， thank you D　No， don't make it  ‎［答案］ A. ‎49　 - Could you show me the way to Mr Buown's office? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　Not at all B　I'm sure ‎ C　All right D　I can do it  ‎［答案］ C. ‎50　 - Shall we go swimming tomorrow afternoon? ‎- ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ ． A　It's very kind of you B　You are so thoughtful  C　That's a good idea D　Yes， we'll go  ‎［答案］ C. ‎ ‎ 四、 完形填空与阅读  ‎（一）　知识概要  完形填空是一种在语意封闭的情况下考察学生阅读能力及掌握语言基础知识能力的综合性题目。学生应根据语义完整、语法正确的原则进行通篇阅读。借助文章的现成文字，通过逻辑思维，联系上下文，推断出可能的答案。然后再从所给选择答案中逐空选出在通读全文时脑海中已出现的答案填入空内。试推想在小学五六年级时去读"西游记"，"水浒传"，你也并非每个字都认得，每句话都能真正理解。但你还是可以明了全文的意思，读得有滋有味。这就是语言能力。所以完形填空考查的就是你能否在缺字，不认得字、词语的情况下，能否全面理解文章的正确意思，然后选入适当的词语。在选择后还要前后彼此呼应反复验证所选答案。有时答案一时不易验证，不要急于顺序填写，可能在填出后面答案时，而得到前面的答案。有时则需运用所学的词法、句法、时态和固定搭配等知识对4个选项进行分析，比较、排除干扰项，确定正确的答案。待答案全部选定后，一定要复读全文以验证：①　所选答案是否能使全文流畅，逻辑推理是否正确。②　具体实事是否成立，前后关系是否理顺。③　语法是否正确，其中包括时态的选择、词汇选择、固定搭配等。在通读全文时最好在可能的条件下将所选答案填入文章中，反复阅读。而不要在文章空中只写选项的代号，这样影响全文的理解，不易找出错误之处。在做完形填空时，应注意以下几点： ‎（１）　重视首句，首段的开篇启示作用，读懂了第一句，或第一段有可能预测到全篇大意。‎ ‎（２）　一定要顾及上下文间的语意联系。在完形填空的设计中，一般是以语义为第一要素同时兼顾语法。有的4个选项单独填入这个单句中全是正确的，但拿到文中从下文联系起来看，则文理不通。为此要通篇考虑，顾及上下文的联系是十分重要的。 ‎（３）　要坚持语意第一的原则，而语法应放于第二位。完形填空形式上是一种单项选择式的考察。但实质上也是一种阅读能力和学生重建文意能力的考察。它一般是利用语法的正确性与内容排斥性的矛盾而命题的。所给答案大都是离开上下文均可说得通的。但语意上辩析、排斥才能找到答案。例如： It took Charlie Mui several months to save up seven dollars He wanted to ______ a model plane and went to the shop with the money A　sell B　buy C　hold D　bring 这里肯定需要一个动词，所给答案也都是动词，但只能从意义上考虑而选B项。 ‎（４）　要认真注意细节，做到语法正确。一些答案在意义上讲都是正确的，但从线索上看要找出语法正确的答案。如： Ｍr Evans is an old man of about sixty His wife died a few years ago His chi ldren ______ him by then． A　left B　would leave C　have left D　had left 答案应为D。这句话正确的语意都是"离开"，但仔细发现有 by then 之说，由此可得出这是个动作的截止时间，应选为 had left 过去完成时态。下面再看一些例子。 ‎（１）　语意第一原则 A young father was visiting an old neighbour They were standing in the old man's garden and talking about ______ ． A　trees B　flowers C　children D　old people 那么他们谈论的中心是什么呢?可能是树、花，由于他们是在花园里谈论。但如果前后的段落配合看，则其谈论的也可能是孩子和老年人。这就是要求我们切勿望文生义。 ‎（２）　语法正确，注意细节的原则 在语意正确的前题下，还要根据学过的语法知识，及词语的固定搭配，选择正确答案。如：‎ One night the dog began to bark suddenly It made Mr Erens  ______ ①______  to sleep He had to get up and tried his ______ ② ______  to stop it， but the beast wouldn't stop， and kept on ______ ③ ______  ‎①　A　go not B　not go C　not to go D　to not go ‎②　A　well B　good C　better D　best ‎③　A　bark B　to bark C　barking D　barked 以上3个小题中所给答案从语意上都是正确的，这就要求选择语法正确的那一个。第一空中根据句子结构，要填一个宾语补足语。而动词 make 后面的定语补足语应省去不定式符号 to， 且其否定式 ＋ not，即不定式的否定式为 not to do， 而省去 to 后则应为 not do． 在动词前直接＋ not故应选B。而第二个空显然是一个固定搭配。语意上为： Mr Erens 尽力地阻止狗叫，所以应选D。 try one's best 是尽力而为之意。第三个空显然是 keep on doing something 连续不断之意，应选 ing 的动词形式。其答案为C。 ‎（３）　根据所给答案的不同词类，从不同角度分别考虑选择 完形填空所给的词往往是不同类的，这就要求对不同词类作不同考虑。如果所缺的是动词，那么首先在选择语意正确的前提下，考虑动词的时态、语态和是否是要填入非谓语动词。若是介词或副词则要考虑是否固定搭配，以及介词、副词在结构和意义上的选择。若是连词，则应更多地从句子结构和上下文的连接上选择。若是代词，则应考虑性、数、格等方面，以及形容词和副词的比较级和最高级等。 例如： A man and his wife had a small bar near a station They often worked late into the night， ______ ① ______  people came to drink there while they were  ______ ② ______  trainsAt two o'clock one morning， one man was still at a table in the small bar He was asleep The bar man's wife wanted to leave She looked ______ ③ ______ the bar several times， and each time the man was  ______ ④ ______  there Then at last she went to her husband and said to him， "You  ______ ⑤ ______  that man six times， George ，‎  ______ ⑥ ______ he isn't drinking anything" ‎①　 A　as soon as B　because C　so D　though  ‎②　 A　catching up with B　getting on C　looking after D　waiting for  ‎③　 A　at B　for C　into D　out of  ‎④　 A　always B　often C　still D　already  ‎⑤　 A　have woken B　wake C　had woken D　will wake  ‎⑥　 A　and B　but C　yet D　too  从文中看，第一选项，由于给了不同的连词，从意义选择应为B。第二选项均为分词形式，也应从语意上选择，其答案是D。 第三选项给了四个介词，而 into 则是从外向里观看，所以应选C。第四项是副词 still 意为仍然，从意义上应选择C。 而第五项所给的是同个动词，只是时态不同。从故事情景看，只能选完成时态A。 而最后一个选项是连词，由于句意则只能用 but 转折连词。 从目前完形填空初中阶段的考察看，除语意第一外，更多地选择了单词的用法及意义，动词的时态，短语和惯用法等。为此，要做好完形填空题目，除有较好的阅读能力外，更要有扎实的语言基础知识及日常生活的逻辑推理能力。阅读理解能力在教学大纲中有明确的要求。它是目前条件下考查学生英语运用能力的常规题型之一，也是分值最高的题型之一。学生的阅读理解能力如何，标志着学生继续深入学习的潜力有多大，它是集语法，词汇，逻辑推理背景知识于一体的综合语言能力的测试。它除对学生的阅读理解的正确性进行测试外，同时从阅读速度、技巧、文化背景常识等方面对学生进行测试。从近年各地中考题分析看，阅读类测试除为一般常规测试题型外，在试题中所占分值较大，为此应引起学生特别注意。如何做好阅读理解题呢?首先要求考生有足够的基础知识和较好的阅读速度以及技巧方面的训练。同时还要注意以下几个方面的问题。 ‎1　要了解阅读测试的重点 如上所述，阅读过程是一个综合作用的过程，为此阅读的测试就不能仅将着眼点放在语言结构的测试上，而是通过看，通过阅读获取信息的能力。在阅读一篇文章时，我们首先会想到：①　文章说的是什么事情(即中心思想是什么)。②　事情发生的时间、地点、人物是什么。③　作者所持态度如何。④　结论是什么。有些说明性信息在文章中容易获取，如：时间、数字、地点、人物等。有些信息如作者的态度，事件的结论，中心思想，文章的标题，则需通过文中线索，说明信息等等去分析推断才能获取。而这些说明性及内隐性的信息正是阅读理解的测试重点内容。而其难点在于理解、推断、得出结论时，‎ 应从英语国家的风俗习惯、语言习惯、宗教信仰、民族问题等方面来考虑，而不是仅从中国人的语言习惯来作推论。这也是这方面的难点之一。 例： John drove a taxi through the busy streets of Boston every dayJohn was ____________‎ A　a manager B　a driver C　a policeman D　a dustman  由此我们应能由drive a taxi 来得出结论约翰是位出租车司机而不是别的什么人。 例：Mrs Barker's sister was ill　She had someone to look after her from Monday to Friday， but not at the weekend， so every Friday evening Mrs Baker used to go off to spend the weekend at her home in a neighboring town…This meant that Mr　Baker … First he had to drive home from the station　Then he had to drive his wife to the station to catch her trainWho was ill? ____________  A　MrBaker B　Mrs Baker C　Mr　Baker's sister D　Mrs Baker's sister 从这些只言片语中可以看出有三个人物出场，而问题的设计是表浅的，只要细心即可。 ‎［答案］ D. 从中考阅读命题中，由于考虑到考生的能力有限，和大部分学生毕业的要求，语言结构的测试占很大一部分比重。但对于要考入重点中学的学生来讲，仅仅几分较高要求的题目可能会决定他们的升学命运。因为这一部分分值是往往使学生棘手的那些隐性问题的测试。如： Like many other families in 1870， Katie Olson and her family had come to the grassy plains of Kansas　Katie liked the prairie and their new sold house　But with no friends to play with， she was very lonely　Besides her mother and father， she had only her little brother， Matt， for company　She missed their old home in Wisconsir　Then one day her father had exciting news　Some settlers had bought the farm near the Olson's land　Katie became so excited on hearing the news that she thought she might burst　She begged her father to let her ride over with him to greet their new neighborsThe two rode across the prairie　They found Mr　and Mrs Laski were hard at working building their sod home　Katie was disappointed　She had hoped there would be some children to play with　But soon Mr Laski called out" Anna， and Carl,　come out of the wagon" A boy and a girl　jumped down and came over to Katie　Katie didn't believe it　Her wish had come true ‎1　 Who was the most important person in the story? A　Matt B　Katie C　Mr Laski D　Anna and Carl  ‎2　 What was Katie's problem in the story? A　She had no friend. B　She didn't like Kansas. C　She couldn't ride a horse. D　She didn't like Anna and Carl.  从上文中看，信息的获得不是直接的，而是必须通过整个文章的阅读，理清人物关系，掌握中心思想，才能作出正确的判定。如第一问故事中人物众多，但一直到读完才知，故事讲述了一个女孩Katie的事情。则她是故事的中心，所以应选择B　第二问是测试通过阅读是否了解了人物的心理情绪。这些信息必须通过线索，综合判定，从而其结论是A。 ‎2　阅读理解的解题思路和方法 阅读理解的测试点是在通过由于阅读所能够获取信息的能力上，所以解题思路的重点应放在：‎ ‎(1) 通读全文，了解文章的主题和大意；了解作者的写作目的、对事件的态度上。 People sometimes change their way of doing business　In a village in Africa， people are using money for the first time　They're doing business with the world Before this tribe (部落) used money， people came to the market in the village to trade (交易) things they had for things they needed　Now people must use money to buy what they wantBefore using money， people helped one another　Their father who was head of the family， gave food， and clothing to his sons and their families　In return， the sons worked for their father　Now people no longer work for one another free　Instead， they are paid for the work they doWhen a new road was needed. Everyone in the village helped build it,　Now people must pay money to the village chief (首领) for roads and schools　The chief hires workers to build these new projects　More and better roads and schools are being builtIt is not easy for people to change a way of doing business　To change from trading goods to using money takes time ‎①　 The story doesn't say so， but it makes you think that ____________. A　family members often quarrel (争吵) about money B　Africans do not change their way of doing business C　Africans refuse to use money D　families do not help one another in the same way now  ‎［答案］ D. ‎②　 On the whole this story is about ____________  A　the life of some Africans ‎ B　changing from goods to using money C　people helps one another ‎ D　building roads across Africa  ‎［答案］ B. 从以上的问题看，所设提问均不是对某个具体事实。而是真对整篇文章，由此可见通读全文，掌握中心和作者的态度的重要性。 ‎(2) 要注重文句间的相互关系。既注重主要情节又不可忽视细节。中考中阅读命题很多情况下是对事件的某个细节而进行测试的。 例：… on Saturday afternoon they began with the back of the house　The next Saturday Tom went to a football match while his wife painted the front of the house　The next day they found they couldn't open any of the front windows　They get them open at last， but they broke three of the seven and they were very expensive to repair ①　 They lasted for about ______ days A　two B　three C　more than seven D　Less than seven ‎  ‎［答案］ A. ‎②　 They had to get someone to make repair for ______ windows A　seven B　four C　ten D　three  ‎［答案］ D. 第一问中，如不分析第一句和第二句中的两个 Saturday， 很可能会选择答案C。事实上，他们只干了两个 Saturday， 而不是从这个星期六到下个星期六的7天时间。而第二问是他们弄坏了所有7个窗户中的3个，所以应选D。 ‎(3) 特别注意首尾句在整个文章中的作用，以及它起到的启示和结论性作用。 例： Man has a big brain　He can think， learn and speak……but no animal learns when we speak? Scientists do not really know　They only know that man can speak because he has a big brain 这篇文章只要我们注意了首尾句，即可得出结论，它是讲述人类大脑与语言的关系的。人脑的其中一个作用是使他拥有语言，也就是和动物 apes， dogs 有了根本的区别。这样这篇文章的许多细节可以迎刃而解了。 ‎①　 In what way are men different from animals? A　Men can understand things quickly. ‎ B　Men can learn. C　Men have learned language. ‎ D　Men have brains.  ‎［答案］ C. ‎②　 Scientists now know ______ A　how children learn to speak ‎ B　why apes can learn a few words C　men's brain helps him to learn to speak ‎ D　what happens when men speak  ‎［答案］ C. ‎③　 What is the topic the writer wants to talk about? A　ape's language ‎ B　men's brain and language C　human brain ‎ D　animals' learning  ‎［答案］ B. 以上只是做阅读练习中的一般分析，要取得优异成绩，还有赖于扎实的阅读基础和语言能力，以及平时的技巧训练和刻苦练习。要坚持每天至少读三四篇文章，以逐步提高自己的英语水平。‎ ‎(二) 例题解析 通读下面短文，掌握其大意。然后从短文后各题所给的四个选项中选择最佳的一项。 Once there was a clever farmer　Though he was poor， he decided one day to take the king a roast goose (烤鹅) as a present　He had not had ____ 1 ____to cat that day， and soon the ____ 2 ____  of the roast goose became too much for him as (当……时) he  ____ 3 ____  it to the king， so he ate one of its legsWhen he came before the king and gave him the goose， the king ____ 4 ____ saw that it had only one legNow， the king ____ 5 ____  was born with one ‎ bad leg， so he had never been able to ____ 6 ____  properly (正常地)　When he saw the goose with only one leg， he thought the farmer had ____ 7 ____  this to laugh at him　Of course he was very ____ 8 ____ 　The farmer was told that if anybody laughed at the king， he would be ____ 9____  at once"Where is ____ 10 ____  leg of the goose?" the king asked" All the geese (goose 的复数) in this  ____ 11 ____  of the country have one leg only， " the farmer answered"Do you think I'm a fool(傻子)?" the king shouted"____ 12 ____ ，" said the farmer， "if you look out of the window， you will see geese with one leg by the  ____ 13____ "The king looked， and there the geese were  ____ 14 ____  on one leg beside the water　The king at once told one of his men to  ____ 15 ____  them with a big stick， and of course， they  ____ 16 ____ their other legs and ran away"There， " said the king　" You were lying(说谎)　That  ____ 17 ____  that the geese here have two legs， like all other  ____ 18 ____  in the country""But it doesn't show anything，" answered the farmer， "if your men threw a big stick like that at me， I would grow two  ____19 ____  legs myself to help me to run away ____ 20 ____ "‎ ‎1　A　less B　all C　little D　much ‎2　A　head B　neck C　smell D　temperature ‎3　A　returned B　carried C　sent D　handed ‎4　A　at once B　at last C　by then D　on time ‎5　A　once B　really C　himself D　yet ‎6　A　come B　walk C　see D　eat ‎7　A　kept B　done C　made D　found ‎8　A　sorry B　worried C　sad D　angry ‎9　A　helped B　killed C　saved D　covered ‎10　A　other B　another C　that D　the other ‎11　A　city B　village C　farm D　part ‎12　A　Certainly not B　Of course C　That's nothing D　Never mind ‎13　A　hole B　forest C　lake D　house ‎14　A　swimming B　resting C　flying D　lying ‎15　A　fill B　lock C　hit D　keep ‎16　A　sent up B　put down C　did with D　moved away ‎17　A　shows B　talks C　sees D　knows ‎18　A　geese B　animals C　legs D　farmers ‎19　A　slower B　faster C　less D　more ‎20　A　more slowly B　more carefully C　faster D　earlier ‎ ‎［答案］ 1　D 2　C 3　B 4　A 5　C ‎6　B 7　B 8　D 9　B 10　D ‎11　D 12　A 13　C 14　B 15　C ‎16　B 17　A 18　A 19　D 20　C ‎ 其中1选 much是应能从文章字里行间中猜到的，它应为much food to eat　而将food 省略。2要知道 smell 可以作系动词，但也可以作名词，而4则为多个短语的词语辨析：at once 立刻， at last 最终， by then 到那时为止，on time ‎ 准时。所以应为at once　7则要熟悉英语的习惯用法，即干这件事要用do，而不用make　10之所以要用D则是因为鹅有两只腿，由于只剩一只而问另一只哪里去了，要用特指的定冠词。而 other 则为泛指的形容词，一般指复数， another虽然也指单数，但也应用于泛指的情况。而11题因其后有 of the country， 是在乡村的这个部分，所以只能用part　country 是不可数名词作"乡村"讲，作为可数名词则作"国家"讲。而作"乡村"讲时，前面的定冠词不可少。19则是要通读全文才知道鹅一只腿站立体息，而一被哄赶则放下另一只腿跑走了，人是两条腿站着，当被哄赶时那应是再长出两条腿奔跑着逃走。由此可见中考的难题越来越不在语法项，而在阅读和完形上用以选拔高质量的学生。 We were going to play a team from a country school　They didn't come until the game time arrived　They looked  ____ 1 ____  than we had thought　They were wearing dirty blue jeans (仔裤) and looked like farm boys　We even thought that they had never seen a basketball beforeWe all sat down　We felt that we didn't  ____ 2 ____  any practice (训练) against a team like thatIt was already so late that no  ____ 3 ____  could be given to them for a warmupThe game beganOne of our boys  ____ 4 ____  the ball and he shot (掷) a long pass to our forward (前锋)　From out of nowhere a boy in a dirty Tshirt ____ 5____  the pass and with a beautiful form (姿势) he shot and got two points (分)They  ____ 6 ____  usThen they got another  ____ 7____  of points in a minuteSoon it was all over　The country team  ____ 8____  usWe certainly learned that even though a team is good， there is usually another  ____ 9 ____  a little better　But the important lesson learned was: One can't tell a man， or a team， by the  ____10 ____  ‎1　A　stronger B　younger C　worse D　less ‎2　A　get B　try C　use D　need ‎3　A　basket B　space C　ball D　time ‎4　A　got B　played C　missed D　carried ‎5　A　caught B　changed C　started D　stopped ‎6　A　surprised B　kept C　broke D　hit ‎7　A　half B　pair C　group D　double ‎8　A　won B　saved C　beat D　joined ‎9　A　just B　already C　about D　almost ‎10　A　Tshirts B　clothes C　places D　points ‎ ‎［答案］ 1　C 2　D 3　D 4　A 5　D ‎6　A 7　B 8　C 9　A 10　B ‎ ‎［析］ 在1题中可以看出stronger， younger worse， less 四个选项全可以选，语法是正确的。从文章开始到这里并看不出其原因为什么要选择C，这时只能将其选择空出往后面看，所以提醒考生要注意的是千万不要一一对完形填空作出选择，有很多情况 是后面的情景决定了前面的选择。当看到 We even thought that they had never seen a basketball before 和 We felt that we didn't need (2) any practice against a team like that　则就肯定会得到第一个空的选项决不是比我们强壮，也不可能是少，更不可能是年轻、而是球技不佳，比我们差得很远。而 ‎5题是要仔细考虑才能得到正确的结论。这四个动词都可以用在篮球运动中，但要注意的是，其后面的名词是pass，在这里应译为"长传"。而这个长传这里决不是开始，而是被截住了。所以这里应用stopped。 即"拦截了一个长传。"而 caught 的宾语应换为ball球就对了。B 选项为"改变"，用于这里就不合题意了。而7项虽然很多人都知道篮球规则，投一球按两分计算，但这里应选哪个词则拿不准了，主要在B选项与D选项之间发生了问题。不知double的真实意义是"加倍，翻一翻"之意，还是"一对，一双，两倍"之意。其困难点还有9项，它的选择应为 just，这是由全文所决定的。它的意思是不论一个队多么好，总会有一个队会比你强出一点儿，哪怕是仅仅一点点。这也就是完形填空不易拿满分之处。这里要提醒大家的是：语言是十分灵活的，要经常不断地学习思考才会有所进步。 Peter was a small boy　He lived with his parents in a small house near some hills　The people there were all poorOne night it was very dry and windyWhen everybody was asleep， Peter suddenly heard some noise　It came out from the kitchen (厨房)　He got up and walked to the kitchen　He found that the wood beside the stove (火炉) was burning　There was no water tap (水龙头) in the house， so he could not put out (扑灭) the fire　He shouted loudly to wake up everyone in the house　Then he ran out of his house and knocked on the doors of many houses to wake the people up　They all left their houses quicklyAt last the fire was put out by the firemen　Many houses were burnt　But nobody was hurt in the fire ‎1　 Peter lived with his ______  A　sisters B　brothers C　uncles D　parents ‎  ‎2　 One night he found that ______ beside the stove was burning A　the table B　the wood C　the door D　the window  ‎3______　 ， so he could not put out the fire A　Everybody was asleep B　He couldn't shout loudly C　The kitchen was very big D　There was no water tap in the house  ‎4　 Peter knocked on the doors of many houses ______z A　to wake the people up B　to get some water C　to find his classmates D　to visit them  ‎5______　 hurt in the fire A　People in other houses were B　Peter's parents were C　Nobody was D　Peter was  ‎［答案］ 1　D 2　B 3　D 4　A 5　C ‎［析］ 本题属于表层理解阅读考查题目，因为完成其答案所需要的信息基本上可以直接从文章中获取，并不太多的需要推理和对环境，习俗的分析与了解。例如1题可直接从文章中 He lived with his parents in a small…中获取。2 题则可以从 He found that the wood beside the stove was buring 获取答案。3 题几乎是文章中的原句， There was no water tap in the house　所以得分率会很高。4 题也可从文章中：Then he ran out of his house and knocked on the doors of many houses to wake the people up　直接找出答案。5题的答案则可以从文章中最后一句获得，如： But nobody was hurt in the fire。‎ ‎ 这样的阅读题目，是属于表层理解题目，也就是为了那些获取毕业成绩的分数所设计的。其目的在于对普通同学给予适当的分以求达到毕业之目的。这样的题目虽然容易，但还是要小心为好，不要粗心大意，以免不必要的丢分。 ‎"You're just in time， Joe　We're going to play cowboys (牛仔) and Indians， and you can be the Indians， " one of my cousins (堂兄弟) said"How many Indians?" I asked"Oh， about a thousand，" he answered， and before I could say no， I was pushed out into the night and became a thousand Indians　Two minutes later I was running in the fields with a group of cowboys behind　The shouts of "After them　Let's catch the killers!" and other such TVplay language came into my ears as I ran round a corner and hurried into my Grandpa's car"We've got him,　boys　Let's go and catch him!"But no one wanted to come to get me　All of my cousins except one were always very friendly with me　It was quiet outside　And I went out of the car to have a lookJust then I heard a shout， "Bring the rope (绳子)， and we can burn him""Only Indians burn people　Cowboys …，" I stopped just in time　I had almost said， "Cowboys hang (绞死) people"I was tied to a tree， and the cowboys were looking for some wood when my dear mother called， "We're leaving now""Untie me，" I shouted　"We're going""Why did Bobby want matches (火柴)?" Mum asked when we were in the car　"He was asking Dad whether he had any""Oh， he was just going to matches? MATCHES? Are you sure he wanted matches?"Mother was quite sure， and I didn't say any more ‎1　 How many children played the Indians? A　One thousand. B　One hundred. C　One group. D　One.‎  ‎2　 Why did Joe's cousin say that Joe was just in time? Because ______  A　there were not enough children for the game B　the game was just going to start C　none of his cousins wanted to be the Indians D　they were waiting for Joe ‎ ‎3　 Joe didn't say "Cowboys hang people" out because ______ A　he was tied to a tree B　that would make things worse C　he was caught by the cowboys D　that would make the cowboys angry  ‎4　 Which of the following is TRUE? A　One of Joe's cousins was looking for matches. B　Dad didn't want to give the children any matches. C　Bobby wanted to get some matches from his father. D　Mum didn't think children should play with matches.‎  ‎5　 The name of the story should be "______ " A　Joe and his cousins B　Who knows what danger is waiting there C　CowboysandIndians is a favourite children's game D　How cowboys and Indians fought in the past  ‎［答案］ 1　D 2　C 3　B 4　A 5　B ‎［析］ 本文在阅读过程中会感到难度，而其问题与选项的设计更为困难。其难点不仅在于要阅读好文章，而且要对问题和问题中的选择项作深入仔细地阅读。如1题的问句之意是有多少个孩子在游戏中扮演印第安人。而文章中又有"How many Indians?" I asked 当作者问到有多少印第安人时，其答语为" about a thousand" 这对于看不懂全文，而只认识个别单词的人就是一种很强的误导作用。因题目中问的是 How many，而文章中的数字是 a thousand　但如果认真往下看则会发现： I was pushed out into the night and became a thousand Indians　我被推入了黑暗之中变成了一千个印第安人。所以文章暗示了一个小孩来扮演一千个印第安人。这种题目的得分率自然不会很高。紧接而来的2题则更困难，问题问的是 Joe 的堂兄说他来的正是时候，是因为 ______。这是要认真去推理来判定的。由文中的句子 and before I could say no …这显然暗示了作者并不想扮演这样的角色，所以可以推论是没有人愿意扮演这个角色，但正在这个时候 Joe 来了，而且不由分说把 Joe 推入了角色之中。而3题则更加困难，其题目之意是"Joe 没有说出牛仔是绞死人"的这一句话是为了什么 ______。从文章中 Joe 被一群孩子追逐后被抓住，十分不高兴，想从中解脱出来。因其他孩子讲我们可以烧死他。所以 Joe 为了摆脱困境而要讲出的话是："只有印第安人才烧人，而牛仔是用绳子绞死人。"后半句没有讲出来，是因为他看到如果要烧死人还需要找柴，找火柴，还是要一段时间的，但绳子就在他身上，如果绞死人那几乎是立刻马上之事。所以其答案选择了B。　这样的话可能会使事情更糟。4 题的题目是简单的，即下面陈述中那个是真实的。由于中考英语答案是唯一的，所以只有一个是符合标准的。这时可以采用选取正确答案的方法，但实际上更好的办法是排除法。把不正确的排除后再对其他项进行对比，作出选择。这叫作所谓的排除法。首先排除的应是C选项，因文章中讲在他们上车回家的路上妈妈问他："为什么 Bobby 要火柴，他问爸爸是否有火柴。" 这里的爸爸显然指的是 Joe 的爸爸而不是 Bobby的爸爸。而其他三个选项则都处于可选之例：如A项应为 Joe 的一个堂兄在找火柴。B项是爸爸不想给孩子任何火柴。D项是妈妈认为孩子们不应玩火柴。而B项，在文章中根本没有进述Joe 爸爸的态度，所以应首先放弃，而D项是可以从推理中得到的，要不然他的母亲不会在车上问这个问题，但是文章中并未直接提出来，所以只有A是对的。因其妈妈讲 Bobby 是向 Joe的爸爸寻找火柴。而5项则更是要全文反复阅读才可能领会到其中的原由的。文章的题目要概括全部文章内容，但更重要的是从中抽取最重要的，也就是作者的主要意图。从文章的最后两句，当作者反问他妈妈时说："他真的在找火柴?火柴、你敢肯定他是在找火柴吗?"妈妈表示十分肯定，而作者再也不讲什么了。显然他感到如果玩下去危险的存在。所以其答案是B。这也就是中考中要求较高的题目，虽然分数不多但对要进入重点高中的学生来说，这是个关键问题，也就是成功与失败的焦点所在。 例：We spent a day in the country and picked a lot of flowers　Our car was full of flowers inside! On the way home we had to stop at traffic lights， and there my wife saw the bookshelfIt stood outside a furniture (家具)shop　"Buy it，" she said at once　"We'll carry it home on the roofrack(车顶架)　I've always wanted one like that"What could I do? Ten minutes later I was twenty dollars poorer， and the bookshelf was tied on to the roofrack　It was tall andnarrow， quite heavy tooAs it was getting darker， I drove slowly　Other drivers seemed ‎ more polite than usual that evening　The police even stopped traffic to let us through　Carrying furniture was a good ideaAfter a time my wife said， "There's a long line of cars behind　Why don't they overtake(超车)?"Just at that time a police car did overtake　The two officers (警官) inside looked at us seriously when they went past　But then， with a kind smile they asked us to follow their car through the busy traffic　The police car stopped at our village church(教堂)One of the officers came to me"Right， sir，"he said"Do you need any more help now?"I didn't quite understand"Thanks， officer，" I said　"You've been very kind　I live just down the road"He was looking at our things: first at the flowers， then at the bookshelf　"Well， well，" he said and laughed　"It's a bookshelf you've got there! We thought it was－er something else"My wife began to laugh　Suddenly I understood why the police drove here　I smilcd at the officer　"Yes， it's a bookshelf， but thanks again" I drove home as fast as I could ‎1　 From the story we know that ______ A　the writer was poor and didn't buy the bookshelf for his wife B　the writer's wife didn't like the bookshelf at all C　the writer was always glad to buy something for his wife D　the writer was not very glad to buy the bookshelf for his wife  ‎2　 What made the writer think that carrying furniture was "a good idea"? A　He could drive slowly and it was safe B　Other drivers would let him go first C　His wife could use a new bookshelf D　He could save a lot of money and time  ‎3　 Why were the police and other drivers so kind to the writer? A　Because they thought the writer liked studying very much and needed a bookshelf B　Because they didn't think it was polite to overtake a car with a bookshelf on it C　Because they thought somebody in the writer's family had died and he needed help D　Because they thought it was dangerous to carry a bookshelf on a car ‎  ‎4　 Why did the writer's wife begin to laugh? A　Because now she knew what mistake the police had made B　Because at last her husband understood why the police had driven to the church C　Because the officer was always looking at the flowcrs and the bookshelf D　Because the police had helped them a lot  ‎5　 When did the officers begin to realize(意识到)they had made a mistake? A　Before they arrived at the church B　Before they overtook (overtake的过去式) the writer's car C　After one of them looked at the flowers and the bookshelf carefully at the church D　After the writer's family left the church  ‎［答案］ 1D 2B 3C 4A 5C ‎［析］ 这篇文章有英国幽默的味道。英国的幽默是十分特别的，它一般都是讲述一个故事，但当结尾时仅几句话则道出天机来。对于这样的文章要从头认真看到尾，不要在考场中为了赶时间自认为是全懂了，其实则不然。造成不必要的丢分。从1题可以看出作者十分不情愿地为其妻子买了个书架呢。第二段则出现"Buy it"这样的祈使句。初学者不易看出里面的原委。要知道祈使句在对话中常常带有命令，或不客气之意，所以从这里开始已看出作者的情绪了。其后的What can I do?又是一句抱怨的话，"我还能作什么吗?"其后又是一句风趣的抱怨：Ten minutes later I was twenty dollars poorer即暗示十分不情愿地又花了20美元。所以其答案是D。其后2题则是推理题，从作者买了书架之后一连串的奇怪事情发生了。首先是其他的驾驶员开车对他十分的礼貌，甚至警察阻挡其他车辆让他先行。所以其答案是B。第3题则一句道破天机。因为前两件事已使作者感到奇怪了。后来警察竟然亲自驾驶汽车为他开道。而且警察并不知道他要去什么地方就把他带到教堂来了。这是因为英美人一生三件大事都要在教堂做：其一是出生时在教堂洗礼，其二是结婚，其三则是死亡。所以警察不问其由而将他带到教堂是为了帮助他。所以答案是C。当警察讲到We thought it was …er something else?时，显然有个词是不好意思讲出口的，所以道出了文章的真实情况。这时不难对5题作出答复其答案是C。‎ ‎ ‎ 附 录 中学生英语学习常见错误一览表 A a  ‎［误］ I think it is an useful English dictionary. ‎［正］ I think it is a useful English dictionary. ‎［析］ 在不定冠词a与an的用法中要注意的一点是：an用在以元音开头的词之前；而a则用在以辅音开头的词之前。要特别注意的是以u字母打头的单词，如useful,university等，其第一个音标是［j］，所以要特别予以注意。 ‎［误］ I need a hour to finish this letter. ‎［正］ I need an hour to finish this letter. ‎［析］ 要注意hour和honest的第一个字母不发音。 ‎［误］ My teacher is a unknown man, but he is a very good man. ‎［正］ My teacher is an unknown man, but he is a very good man. ‎［析］ 要注意以u打头的单词，它的发音为［］时，单数名词前要用an，如uncle等。‎ ‎［误］ There is a "f" in the word "football". ‎［正］ There is an "f" in the word "football". ‎［析］ 英文字母单独使用时，如其第一个发音是元音时，其前面的不定冠词应该用an而不是a. ‎［误］ I have a little brother. He is a 8yearold boy. ‎［正］ I have a little brother. He is an 8yearold boy. ‎［析］ 要注意这些字母的第一个发音为元音，如eight, eleven等。‎  able  ‎［误］ This bike is able to be repaired. ‎［正］ This bike can be repaired. ‎［析］ be able to 主要表达某事或某人具有某种能力去作某事，应译为"有本领"、"有能力"、"可以"作某事，如：I'm able to swim across this river. 而can可以用来表示具有接受能力或吸收能力。如：This radio can be repaired here. ‎ about  ‎［误］ This class is about to begin just now. ‎［正］ This class is about to begin. ‎［析］ 要注意be about to 是"将要"的意思，含有将来时之意，不要与表示过去时的时间状语连用。另外，be about to 一般用作书面语，对应的口语是be going to.‎  about on  about与on都可以作"关于"讲，但却有所不同，例如：This book is about physics. 应译为"这是一本关于物理学的科普读物。"而：This book is on physics.则应译为"这是一本物理学方面的专著。" above  ‎［误］ The temperature is five degrees over zero. ‎［正］ The temperature is five degrees above zero. ‎［析］ 表达"在……上方"时，above与over是可以互换的，如：The sky is above(or over)our heads. 但是要表达在垂直方向上的上方时则应用above不可用over，如：The sun has risen above the horizon. ‎［误］ There is often thick cloud above the South of China in summer. ‎［正］ There is often thick cloud over the South of China in summer. ‎［析］ 当表达覆盖之意时，只可用over而不能用above. ‎［误］ There is a bridge above the river. ‎［正］ There is a bridge over the river. ‎［析］ 用来表达"从……上方越过"时不能用above只能用over，如：The plane flew over the city. 但要注意There is waterfall above the bridge. 则应译为"在桥的上游有一个瀑布。" across  ‎［误］ He ran across the wood. ‎［正］ He ran through the wood. ‎［析］ across是指某一动作在一平面内进行，而through则是指该动作在一三维立体空间的运动过程。如：The man came in through the window. He walked across the square.‎ across  across的主要用法有两个。其一，意为"对面"，如：There is a school just across the street. 其二，意为"横过"，如：He walked across the street. afraid  ‎［误］ I dont't afraid of him. ‎［正］ I am not afraid of him. ‎［析］ 要注意"害怕"afraid一词在英语中不是动词，而是形容词，要与be动词连用。 after  ‎［误］ Two weeks after he left. ‎［正］ Two weeks later he left. ‎［正］ He left after two weeks. ‎［析］ 要表达"在多少时间之后"，英语中有两种表达法，即：用later时，要时间在前，如three hours later; 而用after时要时间在后，如after three hours. ‎［误］ My father will be back after a few hours. ‎［正］ My father will be back in a few hours. ‎［析］ 受中文的影响，这个介词常常被误用。当你要表达在一段时间内某个动作可以完成时，一定要用in，而不能用after，因为after是指在某一时间之后。例如：This work will be done in two days. 即表明在两天内这一工作一定会做完。而如用了after，即表示在两天之后，完成的时间是不确定的。 after behind  after多用于表示顺序的前后，如：She walked in the line after Tom. 或用来表示"追赶"，表示一种动态，如：He ran after Mary. 而behind多用于强调先进与落后，如：She is much behind the other girls in sewing. 或者用于表达"迟于"，如：The train was ten minutes behind the time table. 或者与表示静态的动词连用，如：She hid herself behind the flowers. afternoon  ‎［误］ He worked very hard in a hot afternoon. ‎［正］ He worked very hard on a hot afternoon. ‎［析］ 习惯用的词组in the afternoon, 如果加入任何修饰词后其前面的介词in都要改为on，不论其修饰词在前还是在后，如：He swam in this river on the afternoon of June lst. 又如：Are you free on Sunday afternoon? against  ‎［误］ He against me. ‎［正］ He is against me. ‎［析］ 要注意against意为"反对"，但它在英文中却不是动词，而是介词，如要讲反对某事或某人时则要加动词be, 如：He is against somebody/something. against for  against意为"反对"、"不赞成"；而for则意为"同意"，为其反意词。如：Are you for or against the plan? age  ‎［误］ He is twenty years old of age. ‎［正］ He is twenty. ‎［正］ He is twenty years old. ‎［正］ He is at the age of twenty. ago  ‎［误］ Tom's father has been dead five years ago. ‎［正］ Tom's father died five years ago. ‎［析］ ago意为由说话时算起，若干时间以前。它只能和一般动词过去时连用，而不要与完成时连用。 ‎［误］ Yesterday I met a friend. We didn't see each other for a long time since we left the college twenty years ago. ‎［正］ Yesterday I met a friend. We hadn't seen each other for a long time since we left the college twenty years ago. ‎［析］ 要注意的是在本句是ago是用在由since引起的从句之中，只是从句应用过去时，但不影响主句的时态。 agree  ‎［误］ Does the teacher agree to us? ‎［正］ Does the teacher agree with us? ‎［误］ Does he agree with our plan? ‎［正］ Does he agree with us? ‎［析］ agree with 指"同意某人的提议、建议、计划"等。如果要讲同意某项计划则要用agree to, 如：Do you agree to the plan? all  ‎［误］ The old man has two sons. All of them are workers. ‎［正］ The old man has two sons. Both of them are workers. ‎［析］ all是指三者或以上的全部，而both则是指"两者都"。 ‎［误］ The all children are playing football now. ‎［正］ All the children are playing football now. ‎［析］ all作修饰词时其位置要在所有的修饰词之前，不论这些修饰词是定冠词、指示代词、形容词或名词，或代词的所有格。 ‎［误］ You all are right. ‎［正］ You are all right. ‎［析］ all作同位语时其位置要置于be动词之后，实意动词之前，如：The teachers all work hard. 或用于第一助动词之后，如：The boys have all been waiting for their mothers. almost  ‎［误］ Nearly nobody thinks he is right. ‎［正］ Almost nobody thinks he is right. ‎［析］ nearly与almost是近意词，其含意差别不大，但是与否定词连用时要用almost, 例如：She brought almost no money with her. 此句中的almost不能用nearly替换。 alone  ‎［误］ The old man lived lone but he didn't feel lonely. ‎［正］ The old man lived alone, but he didn't feel lonely. ‎［析］ alone, lone, lonely 三个词全具有"孤单、孤独"之意。但其用法不同：lone可以作定语，而alone则只能作表语，lonely则多指感情上与感觉上的孤独。 already  ‎［误］ We are already for the work. ‎［正］ We are all ready for the work. ‎［析］ already 是副词，其意为"已经"，如：He already knew about it. 而all ready为形容词意为"准备好"。 already yet  already多用于肯定句中，例如：The students have already finished the work. 而yet则多用于疑问句与否定句中，如：Have you finished it yet? I haven't finished it yet. also  ‎［误］ I didn't find the dictionary also. ‎［正］ I didn't find the dictionary either. ‎［析］ 作为"也"讲，在否定句中要用either而不能用also. also too  also与too都可用在肯定句中表示"也"，但also通常用于be动词或情态动词之后，如：I can also do it myself. 而too一般放于句尾。I'll attend his class, too. always  ‎［误］ Always he asked himself why he had come here. ‎［正］ He always asked himself why he had come here. ‎［析］ always一般不能用于句首，它在一般句中的位置是于动词之前第一助动词之后，如：I've always thought he is honest. 又如：He is always late. among  ‎［误］ If the three apples are divided among the two boys how much will each receive?‎ ‎［正］ If the three apples are divided among the three boys how much will each receive?‎ ‎［析］ among常用于三个事物或人物之间，而between则多用于两者之间。 an  ‎［误］ This is an useful dictionary. ‎［正］ This is a useful dictionary. ‎［析］ 详见a条。 and  ‎［误］ He did not speak loudly and clearly. ‎［正］ He did not speak loudly nor clearly. ‎［误］ Our school is not in New York and Chicago, but in Boston. ‎［正］ Our school is not in New York or Chicago, but in Boston. ‎［析］ "和"这一概念在肯定句中应用and，但在否定句中则要用or angry  ‎［误］ My mother was angry to me. ‎［正］ My mother was angry with me. ‎［误］ He was angry with what I said. ‎［正］ He was angry at what I said. ‎［析］ 要注意be angry后面如果接人，表示"对某人生气不满"时应用be angry with somebody. 但要接事物时要用be angry at something. another  ‎［误］ I have two sisters, one in America and another in English. ‎［正］ I have two sisters, one in America and the other in English. ‎［析］ 要注意英语中another, other, the other, the others, others的不同用法，现分别说明如下：another作形容词其意为：泛指的另一个或再一个，别的，类似的。一般在句中作定语，如: This is not good enough, please show me another one. another还可以作为代词用，如：One student said："I want to play baskball."another said："I want to play football."other作形容词其意为"泛指其余的，别的"。如：I have other books besides these. 又如：Ask some other people please. the other则为特指，作形容词时其后面可接单数或复数名词，如：She has two flowers. One is white, the other one is yellow. (特指，单数)又如：There are fifty students in our class, twenty five are boys, the other students are girls. (特指，复数)但当the other作为代词时，它代表的可以是单数，也可以是复数，如：He has a book in one hand, and a pen in the other. (单数)又如：There are some people in the room. Four are girls, the other(复数)are boys. 要注意的是当the other作主语时，其后面的谓语动词要视具体情况而定，它可能是单数，也可能是复数。others则只能作代词，其意为other ones即为：泛指某些，某一部分人或物，如：Each of us must think of others. 而the others只能作为代词，它是特指某一些人或物，如：I know only one or two of the students; the others are unknown to me.‎  answer  ‎［误］ Someone is knocking at the door. Please reply the door bell. ‎［正］ Someone is knocking at the door, Please answer the door bell. ‎［析］ answer与reply是近意词，作为及物动词用时有时二者是可以互换的，如：The student answered/replied that he wanted to watch TV. 但在某些特定场合则不易互换。作为应答之意时则多用answer，如：You should answer to your name. Please answer my letter as soon as possible. Answer my question in English. any  ‎［误］ Do you have some questions? ‎［正］ Do you have any questions? ‎［析］ some一般要用于肯定句，而any则用于否定句或疑问句。 ‎［误］ China is larger than any other countries in Asia. ‎［正］ China is larger than any other country in Asia. ‎［析］ 要注意any other 其后要跟单数名词，但any of the other 其后要接复数名词。China is larger than any of the other countries in Asia. ‎［误］ Here are some books; you can choose anyone of these. ‎［正］ Here are some books; you can choose any one of these. ‎［析］ anyone只能指人，而any one即可指人 也可以指物。 around  ‎［误］ The nine planets go around of the sun. ‎［正］ The nine planets go around the sun. ‎［析］ around后面不要再加介词，如：The sun shines all around us. around round  作介词用的around与round通常可以互换，只不过美语常用around，而英语常用round，例如：You can see the post office round/around that corner.‎ ‎ (绕过那个弯你就可以看到邮局。但是一定要区别它们的不同之处：round可以用作形容词、副词、介词、动词、名词；而around只能用作副词或介词。例如：The post office is just round (around) the house (用作介词). He has round face (用作形容词). The river rounded the stones. (用作动词) arrive  ‎［误］ I arrived Beijing the day before yesterday. ‎［正］ I arrived in Beijing the day before yesterday. ‎［正］ I reached Beijing the day before yesterday. ‎［误］ He arrived in the school at 11∶00. ‎［正］ He arrived at the school at 11∶00. ‎［析］ arrive为不及物动词，当到达的是较大的地理区域时用介词in，而到达较小的地方时则用at, 如：arrive in New York, arrive at the village. arrive reach get  arrive如上所述是不及物动词，而reach则是及物动词。如：How did you reach the school this morning? 而get可用作不及物动词，作"到达"讲时其后面多与to连用。如：When did you get to New York? as  ‎［误］ This man works in the bank for a manager. ‎［正］ This man works in the bank as a manager. ‎［析］ as与for有时是可以通用的。如：This room is used as (for) a classroom. 但是用来指官衔、职位时只能用as. ‎［误］ My brother is so taller as Tom. ‎［正］ My brother is as tall as Tom. ‎［析］ as… as之间只能用形容词与副词的原级，而不能用比较级。在否定句中可以用so…as，也可以用as…as，但在肯定句中只能用as…as，如：He is not so tall as Tom.‎ ‎［误］ I'll give him the note as soon as he will come. ‎［正］ I'll give him the note as soon as he comes. ‎［析］ as soon as所引导的状语从句中应使用一般时态表示将来。 ask  ‎［误］ The student asked a question to the teacher. ‎［正］ The student asked the teacher a question. ‎［析］ ask应接双宾语，即ask somebody something. ‎［误］ They asked some books. ‎［正］ They asked for some books. ‎［析］ 向某人要求某物时应用ask somebody for something或ask for something from somebody, 如：He asked his mother for some money. 或He asked for some money from his mother. asleep  ‎［误］ He is deeply asleep. ‎［正］ He is fast asleep. ‎［析］ 要讲"熟睡"，就要用fast来修饰asleep。另外， 在英语中一般不讲somebody is sleeping而要用asleep。关于睡觉这一词的惯用法还有：go to sleep(如：The old man usually goes to sleep at ten.)， fall asleep(如：I fell asleep at English ‎ class yes terday.) at  ‎［误］ It will really do you no harm quite. ‎［正］ It will really do you no harm at all. ‎［析］ at all和quite的汉语意思均为"全然"、"确定的"，但at all适用于否定句，例如： -I'm sorry. I'm late. ‎-No trouble at all.  又如：I don't think it is right at all. 而quite则适用于肯定句，例如：He is quite a good teacher. ‎［误］ The children play football for lunch. ‎［正］ The children play football at lunch. ‎［析］ 英语中的at lunch为"在吃午饭时"。这种惯用法还有at work(在工作)，at table(在吃饭)，at desk(在学习)。而for lunch则是为午饭而准备的食物，又如：We had some milk for breakfast. ‎［误］ There is a post office in the corner of the street. ‎［正］ There is a post office at the corner of the street. ‎［析］ at the corner是指墙外面的角，而in the corner是指建筑物内部的角落。例如：There is a computer in the corner of the room. There is a street lamp at the corner of the street. at in on  在表示时间时用来表示具体钟点用at，如：He will be back at six. 表示一天的上、 下午时要用in,如：I usually get up at six in the morning. 但要注意的是，in the morning和in the afternoon这两个词组中如果加入了任何修饰词，其介词要换为on， 如：on the cold morning, on the hot afternoon.又如：See you on Monday morning. 如讲到具体的某一天，要用on, 如：on Sunday, 如：I usually want to visit my mother on Sundays. 在谈到周、月、季、年时要用in，如：All the children will be happy in Easter week. He was born in July. 但要注意在泛指圣诞节、复活节、感恩节时都用at, 如：Where are you going at Easter. B back  ‎［误］ I'm sorry. I have to back home. ‎［正］ I'm sorry. I have to go back home. ‎［正］ I'm sorry. I have to go home. ‎［析］ back用作"回到(某处)"之意，不是动词。 be  ‎［误］ Where do you from? ‎［正］ Where are you from? ‎［析］ "你从何处来"应为Where are you from?或Where do you come from? 但要注意这两句话均是问对方从哪个国家来的。要是口语中问"你是从什么地方来?"应讲Where did you come from? 回答用I came from the library. beat  ‎［误］ We have won your class. ‎［正］ We have beaten your class. ‎［正］ We have won the game. ‎［析］ win是胜过之意，它是及物动词，但其后的宾语只能接比赛、战争、奖品、奖金的名称，如：Which team won the football match? 而beat指打败对手、敌人……如：My brother beat me at poker.(要注意的是，beat的过去式与原形相同，而过去分词为beaten)。 ‎［误］ The ball beat me badly. ‎［正］ The ball hit me badly. ‎［误］ He used to hit the little boy black and blue. ‎［正］ He used to beat the little boy black and blue. ‎［析］ beat指打击多次，而hit则为击中对方的一次性打击。 beautiful  ‎［误］ He is a beautiful boy. ‎［正］ He is a handsome boy. ‎［析］ 我们可以讲She is a beautiful girl. This is a beautiful park. 但要讲男人的"英俊"时要用handsome. because  ‎［误］ The reason why I was late is because I was ill. ‎［正］ The reason why I was late is that I was ill. ‎［误］ Because it was Sunday, so the park was crowded. ‎［正］ Because it was Sunday the park was crowded. ‎［析］ 这种错误是因为中文的习惯与英语的表述法不同，中文常讲我来晚了的原因是因为我病了，而英文中的第二个因为要用that代替。又因中文常讲因为……所以……，而英文中用了因为就不能再用所以了，同样用了"所以"也就不要再用"因为"一词。例如：Because we study hard, we passed the exam easily. 或者：We study hard so we passed the exam easily. because because of  because后要接从句，例如：We like physics because we can learn a lot of new ideas. 而because of后要接名词作介词宾语，如：He is not at school because of the illness. before  ‎［误］ We have two hours to kill before we will go home. ‎［正］ We have two hours to kill before we go home. ‎［析］ kill time意为"消磨时光"。 英语状语从句中要用一般现在时表示将来的动作。如：If it rains we will not go to the park.‎ ‎［误］ I did this work two days before. ‎［正］ I did this work two days ago. ‎［析］ 用ago组成的时间状语其主句中的谓语动词要用过去时，而before引起的时间状语其主句中的谓语动词多用完成时，如：I has done this work a few days before. before long long before  before long是"不久"之意，例如：I shall go to America before long. 而long ‎ before则是"很久很久"之意，如：We knew this teacher long before we saw him. (我们在看到这位老师之前很久就知道他了。) begin  ‎［误］ The meeting will begin from Monday. ‎［正］ The meeting will begin on Monday. ‎［误］ The film has begun for ten minutes. ‎［正］ The film has been on for ten minutes. ‎［析］ begin是瞬间动词，所以它的完成时态不能接表示一段时间的状语，如：The film has begun. 这句话是对的，即"电影已经开始"。但要讲已经开始10分钟了则要用has been on即"上演了10分钟"。 begin start  begin与start两词后面加不定式或动名词都可以，且意思并无区别，但在表达习惯时接动名词的用法较多，如：How old wern you when you first started learning English?但这两个词的进行时态中则多用不定式，如：I was beginning to get hungry. 但如果句子的主语是物而不是人，则多用不定式，如：The ice began to melt. It started to get dark before we got to school. 当动词是表达某种心理状态时，要用不定式，如：The student began to understand his mistakes. ‎［误］ They study hard in the class from the beginning to the end. ‎［正］ They study hard in the class from beginning to end. ‎［析］ from beginning to end是习惯用法，即自始至终，不要加冠词，但如单独使用则要加冠词，例如：At the beginning,the teacher gave us an exam. behind  ‎［误］ He missed the class because he was behind the time. ‎［正］ He missed the class because he was behind time. ‎［析］ behind time一短语意为"晚了"，而behind the times意为"落后于时代"。behind是介词同时又是副词，如Come out from behind the door(介词). He's a long way behind(副词). He fell behind with his classmates(副词). below  ‎［误］ What's that below the chair. ‎［正］ What's that under the chair. ‎［析］ under意为"正下方"，而below意为"比……低"，或指"在下游"。如：There is a fall below the river. (河的下游有一个瀑布。)其反义词为over，如：There is a big plane flying over the city. 但在"下面的例子"一表达语中则要用the example below, 而不要用under. beside  ‎［误］ The students stood besides the teacher. ‎［正］ The students stood beside the teacher. ‎［误］ I study English beside Chinese. ‎［正］ I study English besides Chinese. ‎［析］ beside意为"在……旁边"，而besides是"除……以外(还如何)"。 beside by near  beside意为"在……旁"，如：There is a tall tree beside the river. by多指"倚、靠"、"沿着"之意，如：She is standing by the window. near多用来表示两地间距离不远，如：There is a post office near our school. better  ‎［误］ You had better to do it at home. ‎［正］ You had better do it at home. ‎［误］ You hadn't better wake me up at six. ‎［正］ You had better not wake me up at six. ‎［析］ had better在肯定句中为"应该作某事"，其后加不带to的不定式，而在否定句中应用had better+not+动词原形。在简答语中had常省略为'd，如：You'd better not. 又如：‎ Let's go first. No, we'd better not. between  ‎［误］ Among the two trees there is a space of the feet. ‎［正］ Between the two trees there is a space of the feet. ‎［析］ 两者之间多用between，三者或三者以上之间则用among. ‎［误］ You must choose between this club or that club. ‎［正］ You must choose between this club and that club. ‎［析］ 在两个之间作出选择要用between…and…，而不能用between…or…. big  ‎［误］ There was a big rain last night. ‎［正］ There was a heavy rain last night. ‎［析］ 大雨在英语中只能用a heavy rain而不要用a big rain.  bit  ‎［误］ He is a bit fool.  ‎［正］ He is a bit of a fool. ‎［析］ a bit可以作程度副词，与a little相同，但它用于名词前应用a bit of, 而用于形容词前则应用a bit，如：I'm a bit tired, 而其简答的否定句应为Not a bit, (一点儿也不。)又如： ‎-Do you mind if I open the door? ‎-Not a bit.  black  ‎［误］ The children became black after swimming in the sea. ‎［正］ The children became sunburned after swimming in the sea. ‎［析］ 因太阳照晒而皮肤变黑，不应用black而应用sunburned, sun colour或dark. ‎［误］ The girl has black eyes and black ‎ hair. ‎［正］ The girl has dark eyes and black hair. ‎［析］ 英语中black eyes的意思是被打得发青的眼睛。 ‎［误］ The Europeans like red tea. ‎［正］ The Europeans like black tea. ‎［析］ 红茶在英文中应为black tea. 这种惯用法还有：black and blue(鼻青脸肿，青一块紫一块)；blackandwhite(黑白电视片)。go black意为"在失去知觉时眼前一片黑暗"；look black意为"情况不妙，前景暗淡"。如：After the fight he was black and blue.On TV, I like colour for something and blackandwhite for others. body  ‎［误］ Going to bed earlier and getting up earlier is good for your body. ‎［正］ Going to bed earlier and getting up earlier is good for your health. ‎［析］ 中文常讲对你身体有利，而英文中则讲对你健康有利。 borrow  ‎［误］ May I lend some books from the library? ‎［正］ May I borrow some books from the library? ‎［误］ How long can I borrow it? ‎［正］ How long can I keep it? ‎［析］ 英语中有三个词都可译为"借"，但意义各不相同如："借入"是borrow，其常用句型结构是borrow something from somebody，这是个瞬间性动词，不可与表示延续的时间状语连用。例如：The students want to borrow some books from the library. "借出"用lend，即借给别人东西。其常用句型是lend somebody something, 或lend something to somebody.例如：Could you lend us your dictionary?或Could you lend your dictionary to us? 它也是瞬间性动词，也不能与延续的时间状语连用。keep则是延续性动词，可以和表示长时间段的时间状语连用，也可与how long等疑问词连用，如：You can keep it for three days. born (bear的过去分词) ‎［误］ I born in Shanghai. ‎［正］ I was born in Shanghai. ‎［误］ He was born from Greek parents. ‎［正］ He was born of Greek parents. ‎［析］ "出身于……样的家庭"不要作from而要用of，例如：He was born of a poor family. ‎ both  ‎［误］ They both are students. ‎［正］ They are both students. ‎［误］ They refuse both to answer this question. ‎ ‎［正］ They both refuse to answer this question. ‎［析］ both作同位语时，一般要用在be动词之后实意动词之前。‎ ‎［误］ I know his both parents. ‎［正］ I know both his parents. ‎［误］ The both brothers were students. ‎［正］ Both the brothers were students. ‎［正］ Both brothers were students. ‎［析］ 当both与形容词性物主代词my, his, her等以及定冠词the连用时，都应将这些词置于both之后。另外，在与定冠词连用时the可以省略。 ‎［误］ Both of my parents are not at home. ‎［正］ Neither of my parents are at home. ‎［误］ Both of your answers are not right. ‎［正］ Neither of your answers is right. ‎［正］ Both your answers are wrong. ‎［析］ both不能用于否定句中作主语。表示"两者都不"时要用neither;但作宾语时both与either则都对，但要注意句意有所不同。例如：I cannot give both of the ‎ books to you. (我不能将两本书全给你。)而I cannot give either of the books to you. (两本书中哪本书也不能给你。) bring  ‎［误］ Please bring this dictionary to Mr Brown. ‎［正］ Please take this dictionary to Mr Brown. ‎［误］ Next time, please take your little sister here. ‎［正］ Next time, please bring your little sister here. ‎［析］ 英语中bring是"带来"，而take是"带走"。还有一个词fetch, 表示"到某处去把某物取、接回来"。如：Please fetch the doctor at once. business  ‎［误］ My father went to Shanghai for business. ‎［正］ My father went to Shanghai on business. ‎［析］ on business出差 busy  ‎［误］ The students were very busy to prepare for the exam. ‎［正］ The students were very busy preparing for the exam. ‎［析］ be busy doing something为"忙于作某事" ‎［误］ The students were busy for the exam. ‎［正］ The students were busy with the exam. ‎［析］ busy直接接名词时应用with. but  ‎［误］ He couldn't help but realizing that he was wrong. ‎［正］ He couldn't help but realize that he was wrong. ‎［误］ She couldn't help to cry when she saw her mother. ‎［正］ She couldn't help crying when she saw her mother. ‎［析］ couldn't help其后应接动名词，表示情不自禁的动作，但couldn't help but后面要加动词原形即省to的不定式，所以前一句应译为"他才真正认识到他错了。"‎  buy  ‎［误］ I have bought this dictionary for three years. ‎［正］ I have had this dictionary for three years. ‎［析］ buy是截止性(即瞬间)动词，它可以有完成时，如：I have bought this dictionary. 但是不能与表示较长的时间状语连用。如要讲我这本字典已买了3年了则要用have had这一结构即我拥有这本字典已3年了。 by  ‎［误］ The boy shot the cat by a gun. ‎［正］ The boy shot the cat with a gun. ‎［误］ He came to school by a taxi this morning. ‎［正］ He came to school by taxi this morning. ‎［析］ 作为某种运输手段来讲，by与名词间不能有冠词，如：by car, by bike, by air等。如有了冠词或其他修饰词，则应用别的相应的介词，如："我们今天早上是乘他的车来的"一句应译为：We came here in his car this morning.与by结合而成的词组很多，常用的有：by the way顺便说说；by hand手工制作；by ‎ oneself独自地；by no means决不。 ‎ ‎ C call  ‎［误］ I'll call at Mr Brown. ‎［正］ I'll call on Mr Brown. ‎［误］ I'll call on Mr Brown's home. ‎［正］ I'll call at Mr Brown's home. ‎［析］ 作"拜访"讲时，at后面接访问地点，而on后面接访问的人。 ‎  call on drop in visit  call on比较正式的为公务的访问，如：We were called on by the old students. 而drop in则是比较随便的走走，顺便拜访，如：If you're free, drop in. 而visit则是更正式的外交访问或友好往来，如：My school's headmaster will visit America next week. can  ‎［误］ A blind man can not judge colours. ‎［正］ A blind man cannot judge colours. ‎［误］ I cann't call for you at ten. ‎［正］ I can't call for you at ten. ‎［析］ can的否定形式应为cannot或can't. ‎［误］ It's only six o'clock. That mustn't be the postman. ‎［正］ It's only six o'clock. That can't be the postman. ‎［析］ must用来表示一种肯定的推断，如：She must have some problems. She keeps crying. 但在否定句中则要用can't， 要表示对过去的推测则要用"must+have+过去分词"的表达法，如：The lights have gone out.A fuse must have blown.而对过去的否定推测则多用"can't+have+过去分词"，如：I don't think he can have heard you. Call again. ‎［误］ We could not help to laugh at once. ‎［正］ We could not help laughing at once. ‎［正］ We could not help but laugh at once. ‎［析］ "couldn't help+动名词"表示禁不住做了某事。但could not help but与could not but后面要加不带to的不定式，意思都是不得不去做某事.如：You could not (help) but respect him. can be able to  can与be able to都可以用来表示能力，但can只有现在时与过去时，be able to则可用任何时态，如：He will be able to teach the child. 但要表示经过努力而达到的一次性动作则只能用be able to，如：He finally was able to jump over 210 meters. 或：The plane was able to fly over the mountain. 但要注意的是这两个词都没有进行时态，而be able to后面不接不定式的被动态。 can could  can与could都可以用在现在时的口语中，只是用could更为礼貌，语气更委婉。如：Could you tell us a story? ‎ care  ‎［误］ I don't care coffee. ‎［正］ I don't care for coffee. ‎［误］ Take care for your steps. ‎［正］ Take care of your steps. ‎［析］ care for是"对某物感兴趣"，而care of是"关心，要当心某事"，如：She didn't care for him. Take care of what you are doing. ‎［误］ I don't care where we will go if it doesn't rain. ‎［正］ I don't care where we go if it doesn't rain. ‎［析］ 在it doesn't matter, I don't care, I don't mind, 及in case引出的状语从句后面要用现在时表示将来。如：I've got a football in case we have time for a game. change  ‎［误］ I want to change my camera with that one. ‎［正］ I want to change my camera for that one. ‎［析］ change for为"以某物为交换物"。而change with则是"随……而变"，如：The wood's colour changed with the season. cheap  ‎［误］ A teacher's salary is generally very cheap. ‎［正］ A teacher's salary is generally very low. ‎［析］ 工资的高低要用low，cheap是指价格便宜，如果要讲物美价廉则要用not expensive, 如：This car is not expensive. choose  ‎［误］ We each had to have a choose of A or B. ‎［正］ We each had to have a choice of A or B. ‎［析］ choice是名词，而choose是动词。 class  ‎［误］ The class is watching TV. ‎［正］ The class are watching TV. ‎［析］ class作主语时，如果作为整体讲则应用单数形式的谓语动词，如：The class was more than forty in number. 如考虑到具体的每个成员时则应用复数形式的谓语动词，如：The class are, in general, very bright. clean  ‎［误］ Sorry, I didn't bought it here. I cleanly forgot. ‎［正］ Sorry, I didn't bought it here. I clean forgot. ‎［析］ clean可以作为副词讲，其意为"完全"，而cleanly则意为"正确地"、"干净利落地"，如：The knife doesn't cut cleanly. 而clean作为形容词讲时意为"清洁的"、"干净的"，如：Her face is not clean now. clever  ‎［误］ I'm not clever in English. ‎［正］ I'm not clever at English. ‎［析］ clever at是固定搭配，表示在某方面有特长。 close  ‎［误］ It is cold outside. Please keep the door close. ‎［正］ It is cold outside. Please keep the door closed. ‎［析］ 这里的close是动词，意为"关闭"，而keep后要加形容词，所以要用close的过去分词形式closed作形容词。作形容词用的close意为"近的"、"亲密的"。 ‎［误］ Come closely so that I can see you. ‎［正］ Come close so that I can see you. ‎［误］ Good teaching and good testing are close related. ‎［正］ Good teaching and good testing are closely related. ‎［析］ close,closely同样可以作副词用，但其意义不同，close是"靠近"、"接近"之意，而closely则是"紧密"、"严密"、"密切"之意。 ‎［误］ My school was quite close from my home. ‎［正］ My school was quite close to my home. ‎［析］ "与……接近"是close to…，例如： He was close to fifty. There is a busstop close to the station. close shut turn  shut与close是同义词，如close the door或shut the door. 但要讲把某人关在门外时则只能用shut somebody out而不能用close，因shut语气较强，并含有隔离之意。而turn off是指关上电视、电灯、煤气之类，有切断之意。 cloth  ‎［误］ The children wear very good cloth to go to school. ‎［正］ The children wear very good clothes to go to school. ‎［误］ I need a lot of clothing. I'm going to make a new cloth.  ‎［正］ I need a lot of cloth. I'm going to make a new dress.  ‎［析］ cloth是"布"、"布料"，没有复数形式。一块布料是a piece of cloth, 而clothes统指衣服，是复数名词，"一套衣服"要讲a suit of clothes， 如果是"一件件衣服"应讲shirt, dress, sweater等。而clothing是衣物的总称，是不可数名词。例如：This clothing is needed in warm countries.Her clothes are made of fine cloth.英语中的dress是指比较正式的服装，如a school dress(校服)，a student dress(学生套装)，a working dress(工作服)。 coffee  ‎［误］ Please give me two waters. ‎［正］ Please give me two coffees. ‎［正］ Please give me two cups of water. ‎［析］ 虽然coffee, water, tea等都是物质名词，但是只有coffee可用coffees取代若干杯coffee,而其他的却不行，其前要加a cup of或a glass of. colour(color)  ‎［误］ Colours of flowers are red, yellow and white. ‎［正］ Flowers are red, yellow and white. ‎［析］ 中文的"花的颜色有红色、黄色和白色"，若译为英文Colours of flowers are…，就显得重复了。 ‎［误］ I like green colour. ‎［正］ I like green. ‎［正］ I like colour green. ‎［析］ colour green中的colour是green的同位语，所以这种说话方式英语是可以接受的。 come  ‎［误］ I came across with an old friend in the street yesterday. ‎［正］ I came across an old friend in the street yesterday. ‎［析］ come across是"偶然碰见、遇见"，要直接加宾语，如：I've just come across a beautiful poem in this magazine. ‎［误］ Where do you come from? I come from the station.  ‎［正］ Where did you come from? I came from the station.  ‎［正］ Where do you come from? I come from China.  ‎［析］ Where do you come from?意为"你是什么地方的人?"而Where did you come from?则是"你从何处来?"  ‎［误］ The stars are coming out from the cloud. ‎［正］ The stars are coming out of the cloud. ‎［析］ come out of意为"从……地方出来"。 come in come into enter  come in与come into的意义相同，但come into后面要加宾语，而come in后面不用宾语。如I found someone came into my room. The door opened and the child came in. enter常作为及物动词使用，如：The bus entered the English tunnel. congratulate  ‎［误］ I want to congratulate you for your success with all my heart. ‎［正］ I want to congratulate you on your success with all my heart. ‎［析］ 动词congratulate somebody on something是"向某人祝贺某事"。其名词congratulation在用时一般要用复数，如：I offered him my congratulations on his success.‎ 又如：Congratulations! cook  ‎［误］ My father is a good cooker. ‎［正］ My father is a good cook. ‎［析］ 很多动词加上er则变为执行该动作的一种人，如workworker,teachteacher. 但cook即是动词"做饭"，同时名词也是"厨师"。而cooker则是"厨具"、"炊具"之意。如：I will cook the dinner. I bought a good press cooker(高压锅)。 corner  ‎［误］ There is a post office in the corner of the street. ‎［正］ There is a post office at the corner of the street. ‎［误］ A girl sat at the corner of the room. ‎［正］ A girl sat in the corner of the room. ‎［析］ in the corner是在建筑物内部的角上，而at the corner是在外部的角上，如：There is a big tree at the corner of the building. cost  ‎［误］ I cost ten dollars for the book. ‎［正］ I spent ten dollars on the book. ‎［误］ I cost two hours to do my homework. ‎［正］ It took me two hours to do my homework. ‎［析］ cost, spend. take都可以作"花费"讲，但用法不同。cost的用法是"something+cost+somebody+时间或金钱"，如：The book cost me ten dollars. spend的用法是"somebody+spend+时间+(in)doing something"，如：I spent two hours (in) writing this book. 或"somebody+spend+金钱+on something"，如：I spend two dollars on this book. 而take的用法则要用逻辑主语it:"It+takes+somebody+时间+to do something", 如：It took me an hour to clean the classroom. country  ‎［误］ You can find cows in a country. ‎［正］ You can find cows in the country. ‎［析］ country即可作"国家"讲，也可作"农村"讲。当作"农村"讲时，一定要加定冠词，而且只有单数形式。例如： ‎［误］ Farmers live in the countries. ‎［正］ Farmers live in the country. ‎［析］ 但作为"国家"讲时则可有单、复数形式，例如：Japan is an Asian country. Japan, China, and India are Asian countries.另外，country一般指的是地理概念上的国家，如：New Zealand is an agricultural country. 而nation多指民族组成的国家，如：The Chinese nation(中华民族)。state多侧重于政权方面的区域、国家范围，如：the state farm(国营农场)。 cross  ‎［误］ There are traffic lights at the cross. ‎［正］ There are traffic lights at the crossing. ‎［析］ cross作为名词讲时是十字架、十字形的东西，如：Red Cross(红十字会)。 ‎［误］ The little boy is going to across the street. ‎［正］ The little boy is going to cross the street. ‎［析］ across是副词或介词，但不能作动词用。 cross pass  cross是指横过某地，如：He crossed the square. 而pass则强调从某物体旁经过，如：I mailed some letters when I passed the post office. crowd  ‎［误］ The room soon was crowded by people. ‎［正］ The room soon was crowded with people. ‎［析］ crowded在这句话中应作为形容词，所以这句话不是被动语态而是系表结构，如：The room was crowded with books. cup  ‎［误］ A silver glass was given to the winner. ‎［正］ A silver cup was given to the winner. ‎［误］ My mother was looking for the whisky cup. ‎［正］ My mother was looking for the whisky glass. ‎［析］ glass一般指由玻璃制成的器皿，而cup多指用陶瓷或金属制成的杯子，且cup尤其用在奖杯上。喝酒多用的是玻璃制成的杯子，如我们讲I drink a glass ‎ of wine at supper. 而不讲I drink a cup of wine at supper. D dance  ‎［误］ We'll invite you and your wife to a dance party. ‎［正］ We'll invite you and your wife to a dancing party. ‎［正］ We'll invite you and your wife to a dance. ‎［正］ We'll invite you and your wife to a ball.(美语中常用ball作为舞会。) date  ‎［误］ He studied ten hours a date. ‎［正］ He studied ten hours a day. ‎［析］ date是指具体日期。如问What's the date today? 应回答具体日期："October 1st 1998."而day是指1日(24小时)。如What day is today? 问的是星期几，应回答"It's Sunday."‎ ‎［误］ Today's date is January first. 1998. ‎［正］ Today's date is January 1， 1998. ‎［正］ Today's date is January 1st， 1998. ‎［析］ 在日期书写中不要用序数词全写，而要用1st， 2nd， 3rd……如果一定要用序数词，其顺序应为：It is the first of January. day  ‎［误］ This is a book about every day English. ‎［正］ This is a book about everyday English. ‎［正］ This is an everyday English book. ‎［误］ We go to school everyday. ‎［正］ We go to school every day. ‎［析］ everyday是形容词，意为"日常的"，而every day则是"每天"、"天天"之意。 dead  ‎［误］ My father has died for ten years. ‎［正］ My father has been dead for ten years. ‎［析］ die是瞬间动词，它可以用于完成时，如：My father has died. 但用于完成时不能与表示一段时间的状语连用。它也可以用于过去时，如：My father died three years ago ‎［误］ We'll always remember the deads who were killed in the war. ‎［正］ We'll always remember the dead who were killed in the war. ‎［析］ 形容词前如加定冠词表示一类人，如the rich(富人)，the sick(病人)，the poor(穷人)，其后的谓语动词要用复数，如：The rich are not always happy. dead deadly  dead在某些词组里是"完全"、"的确"的意思，如dead right, dead tired, dead sure。而deadly则是"致命的"，如：The rich man had many deadly enemies. 又如：Cancer is a deadly disease.  dead died  dead是形容词，如：Mrs Ginty was dead.‎ ‎ 而died是动词die的过去式及过去分词，如：She died in 1960.但英语中如表达出对某人去世的伤感说法是pass away, 如：My father passed away, this morning. deer  ‎［误］ In the zoo, there are many deers. ‎［正］ In the zoo, there are many deer. ‎［析］ deer是单、复数同形的词，如：one deer，two deer，这样的名词还有fish，sheep等。但如果讲There are many fishes here. 这句话应译为"这里有许多种鱼类。"而不应译为"这里有很多鱼。" desk  ‎［误］ The boy sat in his desk. ‎［正］ The boy sat at his desk. ‎［析］ 在课桌旁坐着应用介词at, 而at desk 则应译为"在学习"，at table应译为"在吃饭"。 die  ‎［误］ In South Africa many people died from cancer. ‎［正］ In South Africa many people died of cancer. ‎［误］ The old man died of overwork. ‎［正］ The old man died from overwork. ‎［析］ 死于疾病应用die of，而死于某种外因事故则多用from. ‎［误］ His mother is died. ‎［正］ His mother is dead. ‎［误］ The old woman was dead at the age of seventy. ‎［正］ The old woman died at the age of seventy. ‎［析］ dead是形容词，而die是动词。形容词表示状态，动词则表示动作。 ‎［误］ He died in a traffic accident. ‎［正］ He was killed in a traffic accident. ‎［析］ 由于事故而造成的死亡一般用to be killed. ‎［误］ When the doctor came，the old man had already died. ‎［正］ When the doctor came，the old man was already dead. ‎［正］ The old man died before the doctor came. different  ‎［误］ My room is different with yours. ‎［正］ My room is different from yours. ‎［误］ The village is very different with what it was. ‎［正］ The village is very different from what it was. ‎［析］ different from是"与……不同"之意。 difficult  ‎［误］ English is very difficult to be learned. ‎［正］ English is very difficult to learn. ‎［误］ He learned physics is difficult. ‎［正］ It is very difficult for him to learn physics. ‎［析］ 要学习英语的表达法而不要生硬地按字去译中文。It is difficult for somebody to do something.为"对于某人来说做某事很困难。" difficulty  ‎［误］ There was little difficulty to find him. ‎［正］ There was little difficulty in finding him. ‎［析］ 这种用法还有trouble, 即difficulty (trouble) in doing something.‎ dinner  ‎［误］ When did you have the supper? ‎［正］ When did you have supper? ‎［析］ 英语中一日三餐前无冠词，例如： ‎［误］ I had a lunch at 12 o'clock. ‎［正］ I had lunch at 12 o'clock. ‎［析］ 在某些特定场合，如指某次宴会，则要加冠词，如：The dinner was given in honour of the guest. dress  ‎［误］ My father bought a new dress for himself yesterday. ‎［正］ My father bought a new suit for himself yesterday. ‎［析］ 一般来讲男套装用suit，女服则用dress；作男服的服装店是tailor shop (tailor's), 而做女装的服装店是dressmaker's. ‎［误］ The mother dressed the clothes on her child. ‎［正］ The mother dressed her child. ‎［析］ dress作及物动词当"穿衣服"讲时，其后不能接衣服而只能接人，如：The boy is still too young to dress himself. 但作为一种穿着打扮的状态时，则多用其过去分词作形容词，如：He is not dressed in his new suit.或She is dressed in red. 词组dress up是过节日时应服装整齐，如：They dressed up for the holiday. ‎ dress have on put on wear  要区别这几个动词需分清是表示动作的动词还是表示状态的动词。表示状态的动词是have on和wear，如：He has on a white coat. He was wearing heavy shoes. 而put on则表示穿衣的动作，如：Put on your coat,it is cold outside.而dress即可以作状态又可以作动作，作动作讲时其后面接人而不能接衣服，作穿着状态时则多用dressed的形式。如：I saw a lady dressed in red. I saw a girl dressing herself. drop  ‎［误］ The students fell their voice. ‎［正］ The students dropped their voice. ‎［析］ drop与fall都可以表示"落下、掉下"之意，有时可以互换，如：The dictionary fell (dropped) from the table. 但drop还可以作及物动词，而fall一般只能作不及物动词。 ‎［误］ I shall drop in you. ‎［正］ I shall drop in on you. ‎［析］ drop in是随便拜访某人，而其后要接人时应加介词on再加人称。 during  ‎［误］ During I was sick，I couldn't eat well. ‎［正］ While I was sick，I couldn't eat well. ‎［析］ during后不能接从句，而when和while后可接从句。 ‎［误］ I have been studying English during three days. ‎［正］ I have been studying English for three days. ‎［析］‎ ‎ during不能表达一个动作持续多长的时间，而只能表达在某段时间内某事件的发生。即带有由during引导的时间状语的句子只能用过去时，不能用完成时。 ‎ ‎ E  each  ‎［误］ Every of them has his habit. ‎ ‎［正］ Each of them has his habit. ‎［析］ each可以作形容词，但也可作代词，而every只能作形容词。 ‎［误］ The manager comes to America almost each month. ‎［正］ The manager comes to America almost every month. ‎［析］ each与every都作形容词讲时，都有"每个"之意，但有不同。each多指个体，而every则多指整体。如：We want every student to succeed. each不同来表达总体概念，所以不能与almost, nearly， likely等词连用。 ‎［误］ We each has a book. ‎［正］ We each have a book. ‎［析］ each 作同位语时，其数应与其同位的名词相同，而each作主语时则应取其单数形式。  ‎ each other one another  each other与one another这两个词组的区别在很多语法书中强调each other是两者之间，而one another是多者之间，其实不然，如：All students must care for each other, must love and help each other. 事实上这两个词组是同义的，如果要讲有什么区别的话，当我们非常笼统地谈，而不特指什么人时，多用one another. early  ‎［误］ Could you come here more early? ‎［正］ Could you come here earlier? ‎［析］ 单音节和少数双音节副词的比较级和最高级要用er和est来作其结尾，如fast, soon, early, hard, long, near等。 earth  ‎［误］ What on the earth do you mean? ‎［正］ What on earth do you mean? ‎［析］ on earth这一词组在句中为的是加强语气，其意为"究竟"、"到底"。而作为"地球"讲时则要加定冠词，如：How far is the earth from the moon. 而作为"泥土"讲时则为不可数名词，如：He filled the pot with earth and wanted to plant some flowers. easy  ‎［误］ You can easy imagine my surprise. ‎［正］ You can easily imagine my surprise. ‎［析］ easy只在有限的词组中被用作副词，如take it easy (不要紧张)，go easy, stand easy等。 例如：Easy come, easy go. (钱来的容易花的也快. )Easier said than done. (说的容易做着难。)  east  ‎［误］ Japan is on the east of China. ‎［正］ Japan is to the east of China. ‎［析］ 在讲述地理位置时，有3个介词常用，它们是in, on和to, 其中in表示处于所表达的范围之内，如：Shanghai is in the east of China. on则表示双方接壤，如：North Korea is on the northeast of China. 而表示互不相接的两部分时则用to, 如：Taiwan is to the east of Fujian. either  ‎［误］ -I don't like opera.‎ -I don't like too.  ‎［正］ -I don't like opera.‎ -I don't like either.  ‎［析］ 在否定句中用either表示"也"，而在肯定句中用too表示"也"。 ‎［误］ Either you or I are right. ‎［正］ Either you or I am right. ‎［析］ 这在语法书中被称作就近原则，即哪个主语离谓语动词近，则应采用与哪个主语相一致的谓语动词，相同用法的还有neither…nor…，not only…but also…，以及or在连接两个主语时。如：You or he is to go home. The others will have to stay in the classroom. elder  ‎［误］ My older brother has gone to Shanghai. ‎［正］ My elder brother has gone to Shanghai. ‎［析］ 在表示兄姐的长幼时应用elder表示"哥哥姐姐"，如：my elder sister 姐姐，但表示岁数时则多用older，如：She is two years older than I. empty  ‎［误］ Are these seats empty? ‎［正］ Are these seats taken? ‎［析］ empty是指空洞的没有任何物体，如：The house was empty, 其意思是没有任何家具或屋内无人。但座位是否有人坐应用take. English  ‎［误］ My sister studied English language very well. ‎［正］ My sister studied the English language very well. ‎［正］ My sister studied English very well. ‎［析］ 在泛指某一种学科时，不应加冠词，如：I like history.但如特指某一门学科时则应加冠词，如：He likes the history of America. enjoy  ‎［误］ I enjoy to play football. ‎［正］ I enjoy playing football. ‎［析］ enjoy后要接动名词，而不接不定式。 ‎［误］ Did you enjoy at the English evening? ‎［正］ Did you enjoy yourself at the English evening? enough  ‎［误］ I'm sorry. You are not studying enough carefully. ‎［正］ I'm sorry. You are not studying carefully enough. ‎［析］ enough要用在形容词或副词之后。 ‎［误］ Do you have enough of money? ‎［正］ Do you have enough money? ‎［正］ Do you have enough of the money? ‎［误］ The coffee isn't enough. ‎［正］ There isn't enough coffee. ‎［析］ enough可以作be动词的表语，但其主语应是代词，如：That's enough. It was enough. 如果是名词时应换用上面的句型。 entrance  ‎［误］ The entrance of the cinema is on your right. ‎［正］ The entrance to the cinema is on your right. ‎［析］ 在表示通往某处时entrance后面多用to作介词。这样的用法还有key to the door, answer to the question等。 evening  ‎［误］ I walked home in a cold evening. ‎［正］ I walked home on a cold evening. ‎［析］ in the evening这一词组如加上另外的修饰词则其介词应换为on. everyone  ‎［误］ Everyone of you goes to class. ‎［正］ Every one of you goes to class. ‎［析］ everyone其后不能接of结构。在否定句中如果要讲"每一个人都没有注意到它"，就译作：Nobody noticed it. 要注意Every one of us is not right. 应译为"我们不都对。"而None of us are right. 才应译为"我们全错了。" exam  ‎［误］ We take part in an exam. ‎［正］ We take an exam. ‎［析］ take part in为"参加"某种活动，运动，而在学科中选择某一学科学习并进行考试应用take. except  ‎［误］ The room is clean except two desks. ‎［正］ The room is clean except for two desks. ‎［误］ I come here every day except for Sunday. ‎［正］ I come here every day except Sunday. ‎［析］ 在同一类物体中排除某一部分用except, 在不同类物体中排除某一物体时用except for。而except that其后接从句，如：She is a good girl except that she is careless sometimes. 而besides则是"包括在内"，如"我学习英语同时还学法语。"应译为：I study English besides French. exercise  ‎［误］ The students exercise spoken English in the morning. ‎［正］ The students practise spoken English in the morning. ‎［析］ exercise多指运动、训练，而practise则多指把理论付诸于实践的练习。 ‎［误］ Everyone should do exercises every day. ‎［正］ Everyone should do exercise every day. ‎［析］ 作为运动讲exercise是不可数名词，而当"练习"、"体操"、"早操"则是可数名词，例如：I do a lot exercises in the P.E. class. F fail  ‎［误］ Tom failed his exam. ‎［正］ Tom failed in his exam. ‎［正］ Tom failed to pass the exam. ‎［析］ fail为不及物动词，其后可用in加名词，或直接接不定式。 family  ‎［误］ I'm sorry I have to go. Tom's families are waiting for me. ‎［误］ I'm sorry I have to go. Tom's family is waiting for me. ‎［正］ I'm sorry I have to go. Tom's family are waiting for me. ‎［析］ family是集合名词，把它当作整体看它是单数，如看作家庭中的每个成员则为复数。如：Your family are very kind to me. My family is very large. far  ‎［误］ My school is ten miles far from here. ‎［正］ My school is ten miles away from here. ‎［析］ far一般不与实际距离连用。 ‎［误］ "Did you walk far?"‎ "Yes，I walked far."  ‎［正］ "Did you walk far?"‎ "Yes, I walked a long way."  ‎［析］ 一般肯定句中不用far单独作状语，而用a long way.far组成的常用词组有：as far as. ①远至，一直到。如：He walked as far as the station. ②就……而言。如：As far as he was concerned these books were very good. ③只要。如：I can help you as far as I can. so for到目前为止。例：He is very well so far. farther further  far有两个比较级，即farther和further，其意思略有不同：farther主要用于表示距离的远近，如：Milan is farther away than Rome. 而further则是指"进一步的"，如：Will we need any further discussion on this matter. fast  ‎［误］ A fast train runs fastly. ‎［正］ A fast train runs fast. ‎［析］ fast其形容词与副词形式相同。 fast soon  fast指行动本身的速度快，如：The foreigner speaks too fast. 而soon则多指两个动作之间间隔短，时间到来的迅速，如：She will come soon. feel  ‎［误］ I feel badly about my mistakes. ‎［正］ I feel bad about my mistakes. ‎［析］ 感观动词如feel, smell等后面要接形容词而不是副词。feel good是指某人精神好，而feel well是指人身体状况良好。 ‎［误］ I try not to hurt her feeling. ‎［正］ I try not to hurt her feelings. ‎［析］ feeling在作"感情"讲时要用复数，而作"感觉"讲则要用单数。如：I have a feeling that we will win the game. few  ‎［误］ Few of them is very good. ‎［正］ Few of them are very good. ‎［析］ few意为"几乎没有"，但要用复数谓语动词。如果讲有一些人应用a few, 如：There were only a few people in the street. ‎［误］ There are less farms than there used to be. ‎［正］ There are fewer farms than there used to be. ‎［析］ few的比较级为fewer，其后接可数名词；而little的 比较级为less，其后接不可数名词。 field  ‎［误］ He is a famous scientist on the field of physics. ‎［正］ He is a famous scientist in the field of physics. ‎［析］ in the field是"在田野上"或是"在某一学科领域内"，而on the field则多指"在战场上"。如：He lost his life on the battle field. fill  ‎［误］ She filled orange into my glass. ‎［正］ She filled my glass with orange. ‎［析］ 表示要用某种物品装满某容器时要用fill with词组，如：The boy ran back home filled with joy. fill full  fill是动词，但有及物与不及物两种用法，当表示"充满"之意时是不及物动词，应用fill with，如：The little girl's eyes filled with tears. 而当表示"使……装满某物"时，是及物动词，如：He filled his pocket with books. 而be filled with应看作系表结构，如：The boy's mother was filled with anger. full是形容词，要用be full of这一词组，如：The boy was full of joy. find  ‎［误］ He has finded his lost bike. ‎［正］ He has found his lost bike. ‎［析］ find是不规则动词，其过去式和过去分词均是found。但found一词又意为"建立"，它是规则动词，其过去式及过去分词均为founded. ‎［误］ It is very difficult to look for a suitable job. ‎［正］ It is very difficult to find a suitable job. ‎［析］ look for为"寻找"，而find是找到。寻找工作并不难，难的应是找到合适的工作。 find find out  find out意为"找出、算出、发现"，如：I have found out how to do it. 而find的主要侧重点在找到某物，如：I find my book under the desk. finish  ‎［误］ I finished to read that book last night. ‎［正］ I finished reading that book last night. ‎［析］ 英文中有些动词其后只能用动名词作宾语而不能用不定式作宾语，这样的动词在中考范围内有两个，即finish和enjoy。 fire  ‎［误］ There's no smoke without a fire. ‎［正］ There's no smoke without fire. ‎［析］ 此句应译为中文"无风不起浪"。fire作为物质名词"火"讲时为不可数名词，而作为"炉火"、"火灾"讲则是可数名词，如：There was a fire in the next street last month. 如要讲"着火了"要用be on fire, 如：The factory was ‎ on fire. ‎［误］ The man fired to us. ‎［正］ The man fired at us. ‎［析］ fire (on) at均指"向某目标开火"，at用于较小目标，而on用于较大目标。 first  ‎［误］ Is this your firstly visit to Beijing? ‎［正］ Is this your first visit to Beijing? ‎［析］ 除了在强调第一、第二、第三等场合中有时还可见firstly一词外，这个词已不多见，而均被first取代。first还有"首先"、"首次"、"第一次"之意。‎  follow  ‎［误］ I received a letter which ran as follow. ‎［正］ I received a letter which ran as follows. ‎［析］ as follows是惯用法，其意为"如下"，不论在任何场合均要用follows. ‎［误］ As follows are his arguments. ‎［正］ The following are his arguments. ‎［析］ as follows主要用于句尾，而the following则用于句首。 food  ‎［误］ Too much sweet food, such as cakes, chocolates,pastry…may increase your weight. ‎［正］ Too many foods, such as cakes, chocolates,pastry…may increase your weight.‎ ‎［析］ food泛指食物时为不可数名词，如：There is no food for supper. 而指一种种食物时则用作可数名词。 foot  ‎［误］ There is a fivefeetwide bridge. ‎ ‎［正］ There is a fivefootwide bridge. ‎ ‎［析］ 用连字符组成的形容词中所有名词均要用单数形式。 ‎［误］ We went to college on feet. ‎［正］ We went to college on foot. ‎［析］ by后面加接交通工具时，不应加任何冠词，不要用名词的复数形式。如加了某些修饰词后，其前面的介词要作适当的改变，如：I came to school in his car yesterday. I go to shool on a train. for  ‎［误］ I wanted to go to the pub for having a drink. ‎［正］ I wanted to go to the pub for a drink. ‎［正］ I wanted to go to the pub to have a drink. ‎［析］ 用for表示目的时，其后面只能接名词，而不要接动名词。 ‎［误］ I went to the office for seeing the headmaster. ‎［正］ I went to the office to see the headmaster. ‎［析］ 用不定式来表示动作的目的。 ‎［误］ I will leave Beijing to Shanghai. ‎［正］ I will leave Beijing for Shanghai. ‎［正］ I will leave for Shanghai. ‎［析］ leave for为一固定搭配，不要改动。 ‎［误］ I bought a book to you. ‎［正］ I bought a book for you. ‎［误］ He is a friend for us. ‎［正］ He is a friend to us. ‎［析］ 在英文中"为"一词在泛指时用to, 在特指时要用for. ‎［误］ This food is good to us. ‎［正］ This food is good for us. ‎［析］ 词组be good (bad) for 表示"对……有好(坏)处"。 ‎［误］ For I was feeling quite hungry, I wanted to have lunch. ‎［正］ I wanted to have lunch, for I was feeling quite hungry. ‎［析］ for作为"因为"讲时一般不要置于句首，而且口气也比because弱的多。 forget  ‎［误］ I left my key. ‎［正］ I left my key at home. ‎［正］ I forgot my key. ‎［析］ leave是"丢下"之意，所以一定要接地点状语，而forget是"忘记"，所以不用接地点状语。 ‎［误］ I will not forget the rules. ‎［正］ I will never forget the rules. ‎［误］ Please don't forget posting my letter on your way home. ‎［正］ Please don't forget to post my letter on your way home. ‎［析］ 要注意forget to do something为"忘了去作某事"，而forget doing something则应译为"对已经作过的事记不起来了"。如：He forget returning the book to the library. 应译为"他忘记已把书还给图书馆这件事了。"同样用法的词还有remember和regret. free  ‎［误］ You can speak free in front of my parents. ‎［正］ You can speak freely in front of my parents. ‎［析］ free作为副词时意为"免费"、"不必付款"，如：You can eat free in my restaurant. 而freely则意为"自由地"、"无限制地"。 French  ‎［误］ She comes from French. ‎［正］ She comes from France. ‎［析］ French是"法语"、"法国的"，而France才是"法国"。‎  friend  ‎［误］ He nodded to me friendly. ‎［正］ He nodded to me in a friendly fashion. ‎［析］ friendly是形容词，不是副词。在英语中应避免讲He is a friend of my mother. 又比如：I go to school with my friend. 从语法上讲是对的但不是习惯上英语的说法。而应讲He is a friend of my mother's. I go to school with a friend. be friends with 则是"交朋友"之意，例如：I hope you will be friends with me. 而不应讲I hope you will be my friend. 交朋友还有一惯用法是make friends. from  ‎［误］ Where do you come from?I come from the library.  ‎［正］ Where do you come from?I come from England.  ‎［正］ Where did you come from?I came from the library.  ‎［析］ Where do you come from?应意为"你是从什么国家(地方)来的?"(即意为"你是哪的人?")而Where did you come from? 才是"你刚刚从哪来?" front  ‎ ‎［误］ There are three tall trees in the front of my house. ‎［正］ There are three tall trees in front of my house. ‎［析］ in front of是某物体外部的前面，而in the front of是在某物体内部的前面。如：The bus driver is seated in the front of the bus. ‎ ‎ G game  ‎［误］ He went to America to take part in the Olympic Game. ‎［正］ He went to America to take part in the Olympic Games. ‎［析］ game作为"运动会"讲时应用其复数形式，而具体一个游戏则可用其单数形式。如：Our school team won the game. ‎ German  ‎ ‎［误］ They are Germen. ‎［正］ They are Germans. ‎［误］ She comes from German. ‎［正］ She comes from Germany. ‎［析］ German是"德国人"、"德国的"、"德语"，其复数形式是Germans；而Germany才是德国。 gather  ‎ ‎［误］ All the students and teachers are gathered together now. ‎［正］ All the students and teachers are gathered now. ‎［析］ 用了动词gather就不要再用together了。这句话还可以这样讲：All the students and teachers got together. give  ‎ ‎［误］ She gives up to look for the lost bike. ‎［正］ She gives up looking for the lost bike. ‎［析］ give up意为"放弃"，其后只接动名词作介词宾语，而不应接不定式。‎  glad  ‎ ‎［误］ His parents were very glad for his success in business. ‎［正］ His parents were very glad of his success in business. ‎［正］ His parents were very glad to know his success in business. ‎［析］ "为……感到高兴"应是be glad of something或be glad to do something. glass  ‎［误］ The old teacher has two pair of big glass. ‎［正］ The old teacher has two pairs of big glasses. ‎［析］ glass作为"眼镜"讲，应用复数形式，在英语中手套gloves 裤子pants，剪刀scissors均用复数形式。glass作"玻璃杯"讲时则可用单数形式或复数形式，如：I want two glasses of milk. 而作为物质名词"玻璃"讲则要用作不可数名词，如：The boy broke two panes of glass. go  ‎［误］ -Mary, could you come to my home now?-Yes, I'm going.  ‎［正］ -Mary, could you come to my home now? ‎-Yes, I'm coming.  ‎［析］ go是指离开说话人所在地，而come指的是朝向说话人的方向：如：Come here!Can I come and help you?但在口语中也有一些例外，如表示要参加到某人或者某件活动时常用come, 如：We are going to have a party tonight. Would you like to come with us? gone been  He has gone to Shanghai. 指此人已去上海不在此地了。 He has been to Shanghai. 指此人去过上海现已回来了。 gold  ‎［误］ She brushed her gold hair carefully. ‎［正］ She brushed her golden hair carefully. ‎［析］ gold作形容词指"金质的"，如：a gold ring， a gold coin，而golden是"金色的"，如：golden age(金色的时代)，但"金鱼"例外，为gold fish。‎  good  ‎［误］ I've been waiting for good twenty minutes. ‎［正］ I've been waiting for a good twenty minutes. ‎［析］ a good之意为"足足"、"整整"之意。 good well  He is good. 应译为"他是个好人。"而He is well. 应译为"他身体不错。"I feel good. 即精神状态良好，而I feel well.即身体状况不错。 ‎［误］ This food is very good to you. ‎［正］ This food is very good for you. ‎［析］ be good for是"对……有利、有好处"，而be good to是指"对待某人不错"，如：Your friend is very good to me. grade  ‎［误］ -What grade are you in?-I'm in grade 1.  ‎［正］ -What grade are you in?-I'm in Gread 1.  ‎［析］ 当泛指那一年级时grade的头一个字母小写，当有具体数字时则要大写。 H had better  ‎［误］ You have better hurry. ‎［正］ You had better hurry. ‎［析］ had better只用过去时had，不要误用成现在时have。 ‎［误］ You hadn't better worry. ‎［正］ You had better not worry. ‎［析］ had better后面加不带to的不定式，其否定式是"had better not+动词原形"。 half  ‎［误］ I had driven about half mile. ‎［正］ I had driven about half a mile. ‎［析］ "半小时"有两种讲法half an hour, a half hour. 而"一个半小时"应讲an hour and a half或one and a half hours."半天"应讲half a day，"半镑"应讲half a pound.但要尽量避免使用half a year，而应用six months；不用half a month, 而用two weeks或fifteen days. ‎［误］ Half us could go to the park. ‎［正］ Half of us could go to the park. ‎［析］ half用于名词前可用of结构也可不用of结构，但用于代词前则必须加of。如：More than half (of) my classmates are boys. ‎［误］ One and half apples are left on the table. ‎［正］ One and half apples is left on the table. ‎［析］ 一个半one and half后面的名词要用复数，而句中的谓语动词却要用单数。 ‎［误］ Half of the work are done. ‎［正］ Half of the work is done. ‎［误］ Half of the six apples is red. ‎［正］ Half of the six apples are red. ‎［析］ "half of+名词"这一结构后面的谓语动词应与of后面的名词相一致，如为不可数名词或可数名词单数，要用单数谓语动词；而复数名词后面要加与复数相对应的谓语动词。 hand  ‎［误］ He shook hand with his teacher. ‎［正］ He shook hands with his teacher. ‎［析］ 与某人握手要用shake hands. 与hand有关的词组中有很多要用复数形式，如：change hands (转手、易手)，in the hands of (由……控制)，join hands (与人合作)。 happen  ‎［误］ What was happened to you last month? ‎［正］ What happened to you last month? ‎［误］ An accident was happened in this street last night. ‎［正］ An accident happened in this street last night. ‎［析］ 在英语中不及物动词没有被动态，作为"发生"讲的happen，take place和break out都不具有被动态。happen to常用来表达一件偶然发生的事，如：If you happen to meet my sister please ask her to call me. hard  ‎［误］ I have to study hardly. ‎［正］ I have to study hard. ‎［析］ hard是形容词，如：a hard work，但它同时也是副词。hardly是hard的又一副词形式，但词意截然不同，意为"几乎不"。 ‎［误］ I had my leg broken last term， so I couldn't hardly study at all. ‎［正］ I had my leg broken last term so I hardly studied at all. ‎［析］ hardly意为"否定"，所以不要再加否定词语了，如果hardly用于句首则应采用倒装语序，如：Hardly had he arrived when she started complaining. have  ‎［误］ I had my boy do his homework from morning till noon. ‎［正］ I had my boy doing his homework from morning till noon. ‎［析］ 用have somebody do something还是doing something要取决句子的意思和句中的时间状语。 ‎［误］ I have my bike to repair. ‎［正］ I have my bike repaired. ‎［析］ have something done这一句型是让某事被别人去作，请看下面两句意义的不同：I have repaired my bike. (我自己已修好了自行车。)而I have my bike repaired.(我把车推出去让别人修理了。) ‎［误］ Could you give me some money if you have. ‎［正］ Could you give me some money if you have any. ‎［析］ "如果你有的话"一句译为英文应加上any一词，如：I want some books if there is any. headache  ‎［误］ I've got headache. ‎［正］ I've got a headache. ‎［析］ Headache是一个规则的可数名词，所以可以讲：My mother often gets headaches. 但是"牙痛"toothache，"肚子痛"stomacheache等却都可以用作不可数名词，如：I've got toothache. 但也可用作可数名词。 hear  ‎［误］ He was heard sing in the next room. ‎［正］ He was heard to sing in the next room. ‎［析］ hear somebody do something这一句式用于被动语态时要把原来省略的不定式to还原回来。而在hear somebody doing something这一句式中则不会出现上述问题。如，主动态：I heard her singing in the next room. 变为被动态时为：She was heard singing in the next room. 这种用法还适用于see, look, observe, watch, notice, listen to等。 hear listen to  hear一词为听见了什么，或听到什么，强调其结果；而listen to则强调有意要听，听的倾向。如：I want to listen to you, but I hear nothing. 但词组hear about (of)则为"听说过"之意，如：I heard about this.‎ ‎ (我听说过此事。)而hear from则为"收到某人信件"之意：I often hear from my girl friend. help  ‎［误］ Please help my homework. ‎［正］ Please help me do my homework. ‎［正］ Please help me with my homework. ‎［析］ help其句型是help somebody do (to do) something. 意为"帮某人作某事"，但在较古老的语法中不带to的不定式表示句子的主语参加这个动作，如：He help his mother cook the meal. 即"他和母亲一起作饭。"而He help me to do my homework. 则是"他指导我做作业"。但在现代英语中这个区别则往往被取消了。所以带to与不带to的不定式在句中意思相同，并无区别。 ‎［误］ When I read the play I can't help to think of my childhood. ‎［正］ When I read the play I can't help thinking of my childhood. ‎［析］ can't help doing something是"身不由己，情不自禁做某事"。 ‎［误］ Help yourself with some cakes. ‎［正］ Help yourself to some cakes. ‎［析］ 中文中讲"你自己拿蛋糕吃"，英文中要用help somebody to something. here  ‎［误］ Here the bus comes! ‎［正］ Here comes the bus! ‎［析］ 副词在句首时一般要用倒装语序，即谓语动词的位置前移。但是，若主语如是人称代词，则还是要用正常语序，如：Here we are! high  ‎［误］ He is very high. ‎［正］ He is very tall. ‎［析］ 英语中的两个"高"high和tall，其中tall指人指物都是可以的，但high则只指物体的高，所以可以讲This building is the highest building in the city.但tall一般不用来指山脉的高低。 hit  ‎［误］ The mother got angry and hit the boy. ‎［正］ The mother got angry and beat the boy. ‎［析］ hit指打到某物之上，一般指一次性打击，如He hit his head against the wall.(他把头撞到了墙上。)而beat则指多次性的打击。 home  ‎［误］ I'm tired. It's time I went to home. ‎［正］ I'm tired. It's time I went home. ‎［析］ home此处用作副词，所以不应加to，又如：I arrived home at eleven thirty yesterday evening.而at home除了"在家"之意外，还有像"在家里一样"之意。如Make yourself at home.(不要拘束就像在家一样。) home house family  home是指与亲人一起居住的地方，可以讲a letter from home，所以有人解释home包括住处和家人。而house的侧重点则在建筑物，如Many new houses were built this year. family一词，作为整体讲其谓语动词用单数，如：Her family is a happy one.而作为家庭成员讲时要用复数谓语动词，如：My family are all like swimming. homgwork  ‎［误］ I have so many homework to do today. ‎［正］ I have so much homework go do today. ‎［析］ homework为不可数名词。同样的词还有work(work作为"著作"、"作品"、"工厂"讲时为可数名词)，fun，health information等。 hope  ‎［误］ I hope you to be a good student. ‎［正］ I hope you will be a good student. ‎［析］ hope一词不能接宾语再加上宾语补足语，但它可以接不定式作宾语，如：I hope to be a scientist.而wish却可以接宾语加宾语补足语，如：I wish you to be a good student.‎ ‎［误］ I don't hope you will go to the park tomorrow. ‎［正］ I hope you won't go to the park tomorrow. ‎［析］ hope 和think在否定句中的用法不同，如"我认为你错了"。应译为：I don't think you are right.即否定在前。而hope则不能这样用。又如在答语中"我不这样认为"应译为I don't think so.或I hope not.  ‎［误］ I hope your help. ‎［正］ I hope for your help. ‎［析］ hope for为"期望某事发生"，虽然hope是及物动词，但表达期望某事情发生要用"hope for+名词"这一结构。 ‎［误］ I was hopeful to pass the exam. ‎［正］ I was hopeful of passing the exam. ‎［析］ 对某事存有希望应用"hopeful of (about)+介词宾语"这一结构。 hospital  ‎［误］ My mother was in the hospital for two weeks. ‎［正］ My mother was in hospital for two weeks. ‎［析］ in hospital为"住院就医"。而in (at) the hospital 为"在医院(工作)"。如：He is a doctor in (at) the hospital.类似的用法还有很多，如："上学"为go to school，at school为"在校就读"，go to bed为"上床睡觉"。 how  ‎［误］ I want to know how to do. ‎［正］ I want to know how to do it. ‎［析］ how 是关联副词，要注意与关联代词的不同用法。如：I want to know what to do.‎ ‎［误］ How do you think about it? ‎［正］ What do you think about it? ‎［析］ 英文中表达你对某事的看法如何应用What do you think about…这一句式。 hurry  ‎［误］ Let's hurry. There is a little time left. ‎［正］ Let's hurry. There is little time left. ‎［误］ Don't worry. There is little time left. ‎［正］ Don't worry. There is a little time left. ‎［析］‎ ‎ 请注意英语中的惯用法："快点吧，没时间了"，或"别着急还有一点时间。" ‎［误］ The car is hurrying through the street. ‎［正］ The car is rushing throught the street. ‎［析］ hurry一词只用于人而不用于物体。 hundred  ‎［误］ There are two hundreds people here. ‎［正］ There are two hundred people here. ‎［误］ There are hundred of people here. ‎［正］ There are hundreds of people here. ‎［析］ hundred一词前如有数字时不论多少其后都不加s，这和thousand(千)等数量词的用法一样，而hundreds of是数百的，这一词组一定要加s. hurt  ‎［误］ I don't want to wound her feelings. ‎［正］ I don't want to hurt her feelings. ‎［析］ wound是指战场上的刀枪伤(名词)，或用刀枪"伤害"、"打伤"(动词)。‎ ‎ ‎ I if  ‎［误］ If it will rain I won't go to school tomorrow. ‎［正］ If it rains I won't go to school tomorrow. ‎［析］ 由if引起的状语从句要用一般时表示将来。 ‎［误］ I want to know if he comes here tomorrow. ‎［正］ I want to know if he will come here tomorrow. ‎［析］ if所引起的如果是宾语从句则不能用一般现在时表示将来。 ‎［误］ I want to know if it will rain tomorrow he will come or not. ‎［正］ I want to know if it rains tomorrow he will come or not. ‎［析］ 这里的if从句是整个宾语从句的条件状语，所以，还应用一般时表示将来。 ‎ ill  ‎［误］ He spent many years looking after his ill father. ‎［正］ He spent many years looking after his sick father. ‎［析］ ill和sick都可以作表语，如： I'm ill (sick). 美国英语中常用sick， 而英国英语中两者都可用，但ill一般不作定语。 in  ‎［误］ In a cold morning, I went to school alone. ‎［正］ On a cold morning, I went to school alone. ‎［析］ 在in the morning或in the afternoon词组中，不论在这两个名词的前或后加任何修饰词，其介词in都要变为on. ‎［误］ I will finish it after two days. ‎［正］ I will finish it in two days. ‎［析］ 中文中几天以后可以完成，或几天后来取，在译为英文时都不要用after，而要用in.如： He will be back in a few days. in into  作为副词应用in，而不能用into，如： Come in, please. 又若在句中不涉及到动词的位置，只是表达空间的位置时用in，如： The teacher in the office is my mother. 但在go, run, come, walk, dive等词后则要用into. 如： She dives into the river. instead  ‎［误］ The boy stayed in bed all day instead to go to school. ‎［正］ The boy stayed in bed all day instead of going to school. ‎［析］ instead of其后要接动名词、名词或代词，而不能用不定式，如： I choose this book instead of that one. ‎［误］ The beer here is not good, so I drink wine instead of it. ‎［正］ The beer here is not good, so I drink wine instead. ‎［析］ instead是副词，而instead of是介词短语。如： If you are not free, you may come another day instead. interest  ‎［误］ He has a great interest for physics. ‎［正］ He has a great interest in physics. ‎［误］ He has some interest in many companies. ‎［正］ He has some interests in many companies. ‎［析］ interest作为"兴趣"讲可用作不可数名词，但作为"利息"、"股份"讲时为可数名词。 ‎［误］ This is an interested book. ‎［正］ This is an interesting book. ‎［析］ 修饰物时应用interesting, 如，an interesting film，而讲某人对某事感兴趣时要用过去分词interested，如： I'm interested in this play. 但"他是一个十分有趣的人"。应译为He is an interesting man. 所以interesting是"令人感兴趣"之意，而interested则表示某人对某事物感兴趣，多用"be interested in something"这一句型。 invent  ‎［误］ America was invented by Christopher Columbus in 1492. ‎［正］ America was discovered by Christopher Columbus in 1492. ‎［析］ invent意为"发明"即从无到有，如： Compass was invented by the Chinese people. 而discover则意为"发现"。 it  ‎［误］ That takes me ten years to finish this work. ‎［正］ It takes me ten years to finish this work. ‎［析］ it在这个句中的语法作用是形式主语，而真正的主语是句子后面的不定式。有的句子要用it作形式主语或形式宾语，如： I think it difficult to learn English well. J join  ‎［误］ Did you attend the football club? ‎［正］ Did you join the football club? ‎［析］ join经常用于参加某个团体、政党，并作为其中的一个成员；attend则重点强调出会议、到场，而不一定进行具体活动，如： Did you attend the meeting yesterday?而take part in则强调参与某些具体活动或运动，如： I take part in the football game.‎  just  ‎［误］ I have finished my work just now. ‎［正］ I finished my work just now. ‎［析］ just now意义"刚才"，所以句中的谓语动词要用过去式。 ‎［误］ Just I won the game. ‎［正］ I just won the game. ‎［析］ just单独使用时不应放在句首，而应放于① be动词之后，如： He is just a student.② 名词与一般动词之间。③ 用在第一助动词之后，如： I have just returned home. 但just与其他词组成词组时，如just now, just then, 则可用于句首和句尾。如： Just then he saw the bus coming. just justly  just常用于三种含意： ① 恰好，如： It's just five o'clock. ② 仅仅，相当于only, 如： I have just enough money to buy a dictionary. ③ 不久前，如： I just missed my old friend; He left a few minutes ago. 而justly其意为"公正的"，如： He was justly punished for his crimes. Ｋ keep  ‎［误］ She was keeping something to her father. ‎［正］ She was keeping something from her father. ‎［析］ "对某人隐瞒某事"要用"keep something from somebody"句型。 ‎［误］ He kept to repeat the word again and again. ‎［正］ He kept repeating the word again and again. ‎［析］ keep doing something为连续不断地做某事。有时可以与keep on doing something互换。它们的区别在于keep doing something意为该动作一直不停地在进行中，如： When the train started, she kept waving her hand. 而keep on doing something则表示该动作可能停停顿顿但却一直在进行中，如： He kept on making the same mistakes in grammar.‎ ‎［误］ We must keep up the times. ‎［正］ We must keep up with the times. ‎［析］ 这句话意为"我们必须赶上时代"，keep up with是"赶上"之意，而keep up则是"坚持下去"的意思，如： Keep it up, don't stop now! key  ‎［误］ I lost the key of the door. ‎［正］ I lost the key to the door. ‎［析］ 英语中讲某某的东西一般要用of，而key, entrance, answer则多用to，如："门的钥匙"为key to the door, "高速公路入口"为entrance to the highway,‎ ‎ "问题的答案"为the answer (key) to the question. kind  ‎［误］ This kind of books are not good. ‎［正］ This kind of books is not good. ‎［析］ kind在这种句式中应作为主语，如果讲Those kinds of books are very good. 则是正确的。 kind sort type  kind和sort为同义词，意为"种类"，而type则为"型号"，如： What type of this car do you want?(你想要这种车的什么型号?) knock  ‎［误］ Someone was knocking the door. ‎［正］ Someone was knocking at the door. ‎［析］ knock虽可以作及物动词，如： The car knocked a hole in the fence. 但作"敲门"讲一定要用作不及物动词： knock at (on) the door. know  ‎［误］ I want to know to play this game. ‎［正］ I want to know how to play this game. ‎［析］ 要注意英语中在不定式前加疑问代词或疑问副词的用法。如：I want to know how to do it / what to do / when to do it / where to go. know know of  I know him.为"我很了解他。"而I know of him. 则为"我听说过他。"同样的用法还有hear和hear of这一词组。 L  large  ‎［误］ He found a large number of mistake in his homework. ‎［正］ He found a large number of mistakes in his homework. ‎［析］ "a large number of + 复数名词"，意为大量的。 ‎ last  ‎［误］ This is the newest news. ‎［正］ This is the latest news. ‎［析］ "最新消息"应为latest news，因为最晚到的新闻才是最新消息，请注意英语与汉语的区别。 last the last  ‎［误］ I saw my brother the last week. ‎［正］ I saw my brother last week. ‎［析］ 当谈到与目前有关的上月、上星期等概念时只能用last month, last week, 而不能加定冠词，the last 可用于表示一系列词的最后一个，如： That was the last Christmas I spent at home. 但the last可以用来表示持续到现在的一个长时期，如： I am busy for the last week. late  ‎［误］ Yesterday I went home lately. ‎［正］ Yesterday I went home late. ‎［析］ late即可做形容词又可作副词；而lately则意为"最近的"，如： I haven't seen her lately. late latter later lately  late有两个比较级，指时间较晚应用later，如口语中常讲： See you later. (一会见。)而latter则指按顺序讲的后者，或靠后的，其反意词为former，如： the former president(前总统)。又如： I can understand the latter part of the story. 而lately则意为"近来"、"不久前"。laughed at by his classmates. 中的at是不可省掉的。laugh over 则指"笑着谈论"某事，如 We laugh over the film. (我们笑着谈论那个电影。) lay  ‎［误］ We lied on the beach. ‎［正］ We lay on the beach. ‎［析］ 英文中有三个动词易混，在考试中也频频出现，它们的现在式，过去式，过去分词以及现在分词是：  lay (vt. 放) laid laid laying lie(vi. 躺) lay lain cying lie(vi. 说谎) lied lied lying learn  ‎［误］ The teacher said："You must study this poem by heart." ‎［正］ The teacher said："You must learn this poem by heart." ‎［析］ study与learn在作"学习"讲时，常常可以互换，但learn侧重于学习成果或初级阶段的模仿性学习，如：The little baby is learning to walk. 而study则多侧重于学习的过程，如： I'm studying at this college. 而learn…by heart则是"记住"、"背诵"之意。 leave  ‎［误］ I'll leave Beijing to Shanghai. ‎［正］ I'll leave Beijing for Shanghai. ‎［析］ leave for一词组为"去某地"，如对话中常讲I'll leave for Shanghai. 因所离开的地点是双方都知道的则可以省略。 leave forget  ‎［误］ I've forgotten my homework at home. ‎［正］ I've forgotten my homework. ‎［正］ I've left my homework at home. ‎［析］ 如果句中有地点状语则不要用forget, 而要用leave. lesson  ‎［误］ I have two lessons of English. ‎［正］ I have two English lessons. ‎［正］ I have two lessons in English. ‎［析］ "我有两节英语课。"这一表达法如上，但美国老师讲他有两节课时则多用"I have two classes."teach somebody a lesson 为"教训某人"，或"要吸取教训"，如： Let this thing teaches you a lesson. lend  ‎［误］ Please borrow me your bike. ‎［正］ Please lend me your bike. ‎［析］ borrow是指"借入"，如： I want to borrow some books from the library. lend 是"借出"，如： I can lend you my bike. 而keep为"借多久"： 如 How long can I keep it? less  ‎［误］ He has fewer money than she has. ‎［正］ He has less money than she has. ‎［析］ less是little的比较级，而fewer是few的比较级。要注意前者修饰不可数名词，而后者修饰可数名词。 let  ‎［误］ The teacher lets the students clean the classroom as a punishment. ‎［正］ The teacher makes the students clean the classroom as a punishment. ‎［析］ 虽然let, have, make有相同的用法，但make和have含有迫使某人做某事的意思。‎ ‎［误］ Let's go to the park, will you? ‎［正］ Let's go to the park, shall we? ‎［误］ Let us go to the park, shall we? ‎［正］ Let us go to the park, will you? ‎［析］ Let's go的反意疑问句是shall we?而Let us go的反意疑问句则是will you? life  ‎［误］ Many people lost their life in the Second World War. ‎［正］ Many People lost their lives in the Second World War. ‎［析］ life作为"生命"、"性命"时应为可数名词；当泛指一般"生活"讲时则为不可数名词，如： Which do you prefer, town life or country life? 又如： Life is not all fun. light  ‎［误］ There is a desk with a lit lamp on it. ‎［正］ There is a desk with a lighted lamp on it. ‎［析］ light有两个过去分词： lighted和lit，当用过去分词作形容词当定语时只能用lighted.light可以用作名词，如： The moon gets its light from the sun. 也可以作形容词，如： The classroom is very light. 还可以作动词，如： The little girl lit a match. 作形容词时还有"轻"、"浅"等意，如： This box is light. I like light blue. like  ‎［误］ My sister is very as me. ‎［正］ My sister is very like me. ‎［析］ as 作为连词其后要接从句，如： She is a good student as his brother used to be. 而like是介词，其后接宾语。 ‎［误］ Do you like swimming with me tonight. ‎［正］ Would you like to swim with me tonight. ‎［析］ like作为动词当"喜欢"讲时，其后面可接不定式也可接动名词，用不定式多表达一个一次性的动作，如： I'm sorry I don't like to go swimming tonight. 用动名词则表示一个习惯性的动作，如： I like swimming very much. like alike  作为形容词，alike 一般不作定语，而只作表语，如； The twins are very alike. ‎［误］ Would you like swimming with us? ‎［正］ Would you like to swim with us? ‎［析］ 在would you like…这一句型中，其后面只能接不定式，而不能接动名词。like的用法还要注意以下两点： ① He likes Tom. 为"他喜欢汤姆。"② He is like Tom. 为"他像汤姆。"第二句话的like为介词，而第一句话的like为动词。 listen  ‎［误］ You should hear the teahcer's advice. ‎［正］ You should listen to the teacher's advice. ‎［析］ hear多侧重于听到某事或某种声音，而listen to则侧重于听的倾向性。如： We listen but hear nothing. 例句为"听取某人意见"，所以只能用listen to someone's advice. little  ‎［误］ Don't worry, there is little time. ‎［正］ Don't worry, there is a little time. ‎［误］ There is a little water. Shall I get some? ‎［正］ There is little water. Shall I get some? ‎［析］ 要注意中英文在同一问题上的表达法是不同的。如中文"水不多了，我去取点吧。"英文要讲"没水了，我去取点吧。" little small  little与small是近义词，在作定语时常常可以互换，如： a little girl或a small girl,但little一般不作表语，如： The car over there is small. 一句中不要用little. 作定语时little常常带有感情色彩，而small则带有对比的含义。 live  ‎［误］ Tom lives with his parents' money. ‎［正］ Tom lives on his parents' money. ‎［误］ He lives on teaching. ‎［正］ He lives by teaching. ‎［析］ "靠吃某物为生"应用live on something, 而live by是"靠某种生活手段为生"。 living alive  living侧重于生活得很好，身体不错，如： My grandfather is still living in his eighties. 而alive则强调没有死而是活着的，如： Is that cat alive or dead? lonely  ‎［误］ She wanted to do her homework lonely. ‎［正］ She wanted to do her homework alone. ‎［析］ lonely意为"寂寞的"、"孤单的"，如： The old man felt lonely. alone则意为"独自的"、"单独的"，如： He lives alone but he doesn't feel lonely.‎  long  ‎［误］ I have been studying long for the exam. ‎［正］ I have been studying for a long time for the exam. ‎［析］‎ ‎ long用作表达时间的副词时，在否定句及疑问句中最常用，但在肯定句中除与so, too, as…as连用外，一般要用for a long time. ‎［误］ I'll call you as long as the book will be returned. ‎［正］ I'll call you as long as the book is returned. ‎［析］ as…as引导的状语从句中可以用一般现在时表示将来。 ‎［误］ How long do you go to see your parents? Once a week. ‎［正］ How often do you go to see your parents? Once a week. ‎［析］ 因为答语为每周一次所以问的是频率，要用how often.‎  look  look for find  look for 侧重于 "寻找"这个动作，如： What are you looking for? 而find则侧重于结果，如： It is very difficult to find a job. 这里不能用look for，因为真正困难的是"找到"工作。 其他用法还有： ‎［例］ He often looks back on his highschool days. ‎［析］ look back on something 为"回顾"、"回想"。 ‎［例］ I wish you wouldn't look down on (upon) the children's work. ‎［析］ look down on (upon) 为"看不起"某人或某事。 ‎［误］ I'm looking forward to see you. ‎［正］ I'm looking forward to seeing you. ‎［析］ look forward to词组中的to是介词，所以其后要加名词或动名词，不能接不定式。 lot  ‎［误］ I can buy this dictionary now, because I have got much money. ‎［正］ I can buy this dictionary now because I have got a lot of money. ‎［析］ much money多用于疑问句与否定句中，而在肯定句中要用a lot of.lots of与a lot of之间无多大区别，两者都可以修饰可数与不可数名词，所以常常可以互换。 ‎［误］ He is more happier now. ‎［正］ He is a lot happier now. ‎［析］ 不可用more来修饰比较级，能修饰比较级的词有very much, a lot, lots, any, no, rather, a little, a bit等。 loud loudly  这两个词含意相同，在日常用语中loud多与talk，speak, shout, laugh等动词连用，如：Don't speak so loud， you'll wake the baby. 而在比较正式的场合才用loudly. loud aloud  loud多指把声音放大，而aloud则指要出声不要默读。如：-What did you say?-Oh, nothing, I was just think aloud. (我只不过自言自语。) Ｍ make  ‎［误］ The little boy was made repeat the whole story. ‎［正］ The little boy was made to repeat the whole story. ‎［误］ The father made his son to do his homework from morning till night. ‎［正］ The father made his son do his homework from morning till night. ‎［析］ make 的句型为"make somebody do (doing) something".但在被动语态中原来被省去的不定式符号to要被还原回来。 ‎［误］ I always do this mistake. ‎［正］ I always make this mistake. ‎［析］ 英语中do和make是十分不易弄清的两个动词，do常用于谈论工作时或某种不确定的活动时，如： do a favour(帮个忙)，do one's best(竭尽全力)，do good(有益)， do harm(有害)，而多数情况下常用make, 如： make a suggestion, make a cake, make a bed(收拾床)，make a noise, make money等等。 ‎［误］ This wine was made of grapes. ‎［正］ This wine was made from grapes. ‎［析］ 当成品制成后，其原料的性质有所改变时应用make from，否则用make of， 如： This door was made of iron. ‎［误］ Hard work can often make up a lack of intelligence. ‎［正］ Hard work can often make up for a lack of intelligence. ‎［析］ make up是"创造"、"编织"，而make up for是"弥补……的不足之处"。上句应译为"勤奋工作可以弥补天资的不足。" ‎［误］ We made up our mind to study hard. ‎［正］ We made up our minds to study hard. ‎［析］ mind这里是可数名词，使用时要特别予以注意make up one's mind是"下定决心"之意。 ‎［误］ Our class is made of twenty girls and twentyone boys. ‎［正］ Our class is made up of twenty girls and twentyone boys. ‎［析］ make up of…是"某物由……组成或构成"。 many  ‎［误］ I have many friends. ‎［正］ I have a lot of friends. ‎［析］ many和much多用于疑问句或否定句中，而在肯定句中则用处不多，尤其在非正式谈话中。如： ‎-How much money have you got? ‎-I've got plenty. ‎［误］ You bought much too tomatoes. ‎［正］ You bought too many tomatoes. ‎［析］ too many后接可数名词，too much后接不可数名词，而much too后面接形容词，意为"太多"。 ‎［误］ For many a weeks it rained a lot. ‎［正］ For many a week it rained a lot. ‎［析］ many a意为"好多"、"许多"，但其后面要加单数名词 ‎。 matter  ‎［误］ No matter what you did. ‎［正］ No matter what you did, I trusted you. ‎［析］ No ‎ matter是个词组，意为"不论"，它的语法功能是起连接作用，所以不能用于一个单独的句子。 it doesn't matter这个词组则不是一个连接词组，所以可以和一个单句连用，如： It doesn't mater what you say. (你说什么都不要紧。) maybe  ‎［误］ May be he is right. ‎［正］ Maybe he is right. ‎［析］ maybe是副词，不要错用为may be. maybe perhaps  这两个词的词意一样，maybe常用于非正式谈话，而perhaps则多用在正式文体中。如： Maybe/Perhaps the weather will get better. 而Julius Caesar is perhaps the greatest of Shakespeare's early plays. mend  ‎［误］ I want to have my bike mended. ‎［正］ I want to have my bike repaired. ‎［析］ mend意为"缝补"，如： My mother mended my coat. 而repair是"修理"。 mind  ‎［误］ Could you mind to close the door? ‎［正］ Could you mind closing the door? ‎［误］ Try to make up your mind studying hard. ‎［正］ Try to make up your mind to study hard. ‎［析］ mind用作动词时，其后加动名词；而用作名词意为"下定决心"时，其后要加不定式。 要注意Do you mind if I smoke?的答语： 如果你不介意，应回答"No, go ahead."如果你不想让对方吸烟，则应讲"Yes, please don't." miss  ‎［误］ I found my bag missed. ‎［正］ I found my bag missing. ‎［析］ missing为形容词，其意为"不见了"、"丢了"。在句中用作宾语补足语时不要误用missed，它作动词时多为及物动词，要接名词或动名词，而不接不定式。如： I missed the first train, I don't want to miss seeing the famous football player.在作补足语讲某物"不见了"时有missing, gone, lost等，如： I found my bag missing (gone, lost). mistake  ‎［误］ I took your pen by wrong. ‎［正］ I took your pen by mistake. ‎［析］ by mistake是"错拿了"、"误拿了"你的东西。wrong意为"错误"，而by mistake为"弄混了"。如： ‎［误］ If I'm not wrong, you are Mr Brown. ‎［正］ If I'm not mistaken, you are Mr Brown. (如果我没弄错的话，您是Brown先生。)‎ ‎［误］ The teachers always mistook me as my brother. ‎［正］ The teachers always mistook me for my brother. ‎［析］ mistake…for…是"错把……当作……"之意，如： I took your book for mine. more  ‎［误］ This book is more better than that one. ‎［正］ This book is much better than that one. ‎［析］ 不能用比较级来修饰比较级，而应用much, rather等来修饰比较级。 ‎［误］ More you read, more you learn. ‎［正］ The more you read, the more you learn. ‎［析］ 在"越……越……的"表达法中，形容词的比较级前要加定冠词。请注意more than one这个词组的后面要跟单数名词和单数谓语动词。如： More than one student is going to do part time job after school. no more than not morethan  no more than应译为"只不过"、"才"，如： He wrote no more than three books. 即他真正写了三本书。而not more than则意为"不会多于"，如： He wrote not more than three books. 即他写的书不会多于三本。又如： He is no shorter than you. 应译为"你和他都不矮"，而He is not shorter than you. 才应译为"他比你高。" most  ‎［误］ Most of students are good at English. ‎［正］ Most of the students are good at English. ‎［正］ Most students are good at English. ‎［析］ most of这一结构后面的名词前一定要有一个限定词。 ‎［误］ My friends are most teachers. ‎［正］ My friends are mostly teachers. ‎［析］ mostly意为"大部分的"，"主要的"。 much  ‎［误］ The boy was asleep very much. ‎［正］ The boy was fast asleep. ‎［析］ 不是所有的形容词都可以用very来修饰，如fast asleep意为"熟睡"，则是固定搭配。像interesting, exciting, surprising这些形容词化的现在分词，以及tired, interested这些形容词化的过去分词则要用very来修饰。 must  ‎［误］ He must be in the office, and mustn't go home. ‎［正］ He must be in the office, and can't go home. ‎［析］ must加动词原形为对事情的肯定推测，而否定的推测则要用can't加动词原形。 ‎［误］ It must have rained now. ‎［正］ It must have rained yesterday. ‎［析］ "must+have+过去分词"为对过去发生事情的推测。这句话应译为"昨天一定是下雨了。"又如： I must go and call him. He must have forgotten it. must have to  must用来表示说话者觉得某件事有必要去做，如I must stop smoking. 其意为：我自己认为我要戒烟；而have to则多用来表达由于来自外界的因素而不得不去做的事，如： I have to go to school tomorrow.must无过去式，当用在讲过去某件必须要做的事时要用had to, 如： When I was young, I had to go to the factory.在否定句中mustn't意为：一定不要做某事，如： You mustn't tell this to Tom. 而haven't to则多意为没有必要去做，如： You don't have to tell this to Tom. 而英语中多用needn't 来取代haven't to. myself  ‎［误］ I can't play pingpong myself. ‎［正］ I can't play pingpong by myself. ‎［析］ 第一句并无语法错误，myself为"我亲自要去"，而by myself为"独自一人"。这句话要表达的意思是"我一个人无法打乒乓球。"而I want to play pingpong myself. 应译为"我自己想去打乒乓球。" ‎ ‎ Ｎ name  ‎ ‎［误］ She was named of a flower. ‎［正］ She was named after a flower. ‎［析］ 以……命名应为name after，又如给某人取名应为The father named his son Tom. near  ‎［误］ We came near to hit him. ‎［正］ We came near to hitting him. ‎［析］ 这句话应译为"我们几乎要打他一顿。"near to这一用法中to为介词，其后要接宾语，所以要接名词或动名词。near作介词时其后可加to也可不加to，如： I sit near the door, I sit near to the fire. by near  We lived near the city. 与We lived by the city. 两句话都是对的，但其表达的意义有所不同，by在表达距离时比near更近，所以by the city是紧靠近某城市。 need  ‎［误］ This room needs to clean. ‎［正］ This room needs to be cleaned. ‎［正］ This room needs cleaning. ‎［析］ 在表达某事需要做什么时，need后面如用不定式要用其被动态，如接动名词则要用主动态。 ‎［误］ We need not to do it. ‎［正］ We needn't do it. ‎［析］ need用在否定句、疑问句中一般用作情态动词，所以无人称变化也不加to，而在肯定句中则多用作实意动词，如： We need your help. neither  ‎［误］ None of my parents is a teacher. ‎［正］ Neither of my parents is a teacher. ‎［析］ 对两者的否定不能用none只能用neither, none用于三人以上的情况。 ‎［误］ I don't do my homework. Neither he does. ‎［正］ I don't do my homework. Neither does he. ‎［析］ 这时应用倒装句。 ‎［误］ Neither you nor I are right. ‎［正］ Neither you nor I am right. ‎［析］ neither…nor… 这一句型在应用时其谓语动词应以邻近的主语一致。 ‎［误］ Neither he studies nor plays. ‎［正］ Neither does he study nor play. ‎［析］ neither, hardly, seldom等否定词位于句首时，谓语动词采用倒装形式。‎  never  ‎［误］ Never I have broken my word. ‎［正］ Never have I broken my word. ‎［析］ never用于句首时起强调作用，要用倒装语序。但用于句中一般放于情态动词、助动词、或be动词后面，如： I shall never forgot the expression on her face. Lost time is never found again. 用于成语中，如： Better late than never. (晚做比不做强。)never mind没关系，如： "What did you say?""Oh, never mind." news  ‎［误］ There are many news about the accident. ‎［正］ There is much news about the accident. ‎［析］ news是不可数名词，它没有复数形式，如果讲一条新闻要用a piece of news. ‎ newspaper  ‎［误］ I read the news on today's newspaper. ‎［正］ I read the news in today's newspaper. ‎［析］ 在报纸上读到某一条新闻一定要用介词in，而on the newspaper是指把某物放于报纸之上，如： May I put the flower on this newspaper? night  ‎［误］ I came home very late yesterday night. ‎［正］ I came home very late last night. ‎［析］ "昨晚"一般要讲last night，而不应参照"昨天上午、下午、傍晚"的说法yesterday morning等套用。 no none  no是个限定词，它可以用在可数名词单复数或不可数名词前，如： No news is good news. 但如果名词前有另一限定词时则不能用no，而要用none of，如None of the students was here. no not  要使句子具有部分否定的意思，我们用not，如： I can see you tomorrow, but not Sunday. 如果是全部否定则用no，如Sorry, there is no time to talk. No one none  no one与nobody一样不能接of结构，如： No one wished me good luck. 而要用of结构时要用none, 如： None of my friends wished me good luck. nor  ‎［误］ I never saw the painting before, or did I hear of it. ‎［正］ I never saw the painting before, not did I hear of it. ‎［析］ 注意在表达"既不……也不……"时不要用or作连词，而要用nor，并且要用倒装语序。  not  ‎［误］ The students went to the park, but no the teachers. ‎［正］ The students went to the park, but not the teachers. ‎［析］ 要使一个句子或一个句子的某一部分为否定时我们要用not, 而不用no. ‎［误］ There is no my letter today. ‎［正］ There is no letter for me today. ‎［析］ no是一个限定词，用在名词前时，要注意这个名词前应没有冠词、物主代词或指示代词。 ‎［误］ He not only was a writer but also an actor. ‎［正］ He was not only a writer but also an actor. ‎［析］ 在这一句型中not only之后的词与but also之后的词类必须一致，否则应为错句。如果这一结构用在主语位置，则谓语动词要与but also后面的主语保持一致，如： Not only you but also I am wrong. nothing  ‎［误］ Nothing but books were sold here. ‎［正］ Nothing but books was sold here. ‎［析］ 要注意真正的主语是nothing而不是books，所以这一结构在学生的使用中经常出错。‎ ‎［误］ I have nothing to do but to cry. ‎［正］ I have nothing to do but cry. ‎［析］ 在这一结构中but后面要用省to的不定式。 number  ‎［误］ A number of news can be heard on TV today. ‎［正］ A lot of news can be heard on TV today. ‎［析］ a number of后接可数名词复数。 ‎［误］ The number of students are ten thousand. ‎［正］ The number of students is ten thousand. ‎［析］ a number of 其意为"大量的"，而the number of…是"某某的数量"。即the number of students意为"学生人数"，所以要用单数形式的谓语动词。 Ｏ o'clock  ‎［误］ It's ten past five o'clock. ‎［正］ It's ten past five. ‎［析］ o'clock所表达的时间是正点，如果要表达的时间是几点几分或差几分几点都不能用o'clock. once  ‎［误］ Please come and see me once. ‎［正］ Please come and see me one day. ‎［析］ once用来谈论过去的事情，而不能谈论未来。如果要谈及未来要用one day, some time等。 ‎［误］ I met him one time when I was a student. ‎［正］ I met him once when I was a student. ‎［析］ 英语中一次应用once而不用one time，二次要用twice而不用two times. one  ‎［误］ My grandfather wants to live for hundred years. ‎［正］ My grandfather wants to live for one hundred years. ‎［误］ He threw away the old dictionary and wanted to buy new one. ‎［正］ He threw away the old dictionary and wanted to buy a new one. ‎［误］ His dog is bigger than my one. ‎［正］ His dog is bigger than mine. ‎［析］ 一般物主代词之后不用one，除非one前有修饰词，如my old one， 否则要用名词性物主代词。 ‎［误］ One of the teacher is in the office. ‎［误］ One of the teachers are in the office. ‎［正］ One of the teachers is in the office. ‎［析］ One是句子的主语，其谓语动词应用单数，而of后面的名词要用复数名词。 ‎［误］ One third of the books is sent to the students. ‎［正］ One third of the books are sent to the students. ‎［析］ 几分之几或百分之几这一结构用在主语位置，其谓语动词要与of后面的名词一致，如Two thirds of the work is done. open  ‎［误］ Are the banks opened today? ‎［正］ Are the banks open today? ‎［析］ 要注意open即可用作动词、名词，还可以用作形容词，而close则不同。请看： Are the banks closed today?这一句是正确的。 or  ‎［误］ He doesn't drink and smoke. ‎［正］ He doesn't drink or smoke. ‎［析］ 否定句中的并列连词要用or而不用and. ‎［误］ He neither drinks or smokes. ‎［正］ He neither drinks nor smokes. other  ‎［误］ Where are the others students? ‎［正］ Where are the other students? ‎［正］ Where are the others? ‎［析］ other作形容词时没有复数形式，且作为泛指讲时没有定冠词，如： Ask some other eople. 而加定冠词后为特指。 the other可在句中作主语、宾语或定语，如： Now let me show you the other. (宾语) He has two sons. One is a worker, the other is a teacher. (主语) others 只能作代词，而the others则为特指，如： There are five books. Two of them are not good. I like the others. out  ‎［误］ She went out the classroom, taking a dictionary with her. ‎［正］ She went out of the classroom, taking a dictionary with her. ‎［析］ out of是指"从……里出来"，使用时不要将of丢掉。 ‎ ‎ Ｐ paper  ‎［误］ Please give me two letter papers. ‎［正］ Please give me two sheets of letter paper. ‎［析］ paper作为纸讲为不可数名词。 ‎［误］ Each student must write paper on what he learned. ‎［正］ Each student must write a paper on what he learned. ‎［析］ 这里的paper作为论文讲，是可数名词。paper的这种用法还可以用于证件、报纸、考卷等。‎ parent  ‎［误］ My parents and I are both interested in football.‎ ‎［正］ My parents and I are all interested in football. ‎［析］ parents即为父母、双亲，指两个人，加上自己为三个人，所以只能用all而不能用both. ‎ pass  ‎［误］ The ship pasted the channel. ‎［正］ The ship passed the channel. ‎［析］ pass为动词，而past则为副词，不要混淆，如： My father has been ill for the past two weeks. All the students passed the exam. pay  ‎［误］ Please help me do this job, and I will pay for you later. ‎［正］ Please help me do this job and I will pay you later. ‎［析］ 为某工作付给工人工资应为pay somebody, 而pay for something是为某物付款，如： You can buy all the things you want. I'll pay for those. people  ‎［误］ There are five hundred peoples here. ‎［正］ There are five hundred people here. ‎［误］ There is only one people. ‎［正］ There is only one person. ‎［误］ People there is friendly. ‎［正］ People there are friendly. ‎［析］ people作为人讲时为复数名词，如要讲一个人应用one person, 而不能用people, 讲若干人时用people而不能加s，这样的用法还有police(警察)等，这些概念用单数时要换其他的词. 如： people－a person; police－policeman policewoman; youth－a young man/woman. picture  ‎［误］ There are some spots in the picture. ‎［正］ There are some spots on the picture. ‎［误］ There is a young woman on the picture. ‎［正］ There is a young woman in the picture. ‎［析］ 指溅落在画面上的灰尘，污物是on the picture，即讲与画面内容无关的东西用on，而in the picture用于讲画面的内容。 pity  ‎［误］ What pity that her mother must always suffer! ‎［正］ What a pity that her mother must always suffer! ‎［析］ pity作为遗憾之事讲常加不定冠词；但要注意作为同情、怜悯讲则不加冠词，为不可数名词，如： I feel pity for you. 它还可以用作动词，如： He pitied the poor people. ‎［误］ I have pity for you. ‎［正］ I have pity on you. ‎［析］ 可怜某人时应用have (take) pity on somebody，这是个惯用法。 place  ‎［误］ Last year he went to America. He travelled from place to another. ‎［正］ Last year he went to America. He travelled from place to place (from one place to another). ‎［析］ 到处译为英文时为from place to place请不要在place之前加冠词。这种用法在有些语法书中叫作零冠词用法，如：一户挨一户为door by door，手拉手为hand in hand. ‎［误］ The accident was taken place in that street. ‎［正］ The accident took place in that street. ‎［析］ take place为发生，它不能用于被动态，这样的词还有happen等。 ‎［误］ There is no place in the bus. ‎［正］ There is no room in the bus. ‎［析］ room这里为不可数名词，意为空间，即没有地方了。place多指场所所在之地。‎ ‎［误］ I came here to take place of Mr Smith. ‎［正］ I came here to take the place of Mr Smith. ‎［析］ take the place of 意为代替、取代某人某事。‎  play  ‎［误］ Do you want to play guitar? ‎［正］ Do you want to play the guitar? ‎［误］ I like to play the bridge. ‎［正］ I like to play bridge(桥牌). ‎［析］ play作为玩讲时，在各种乐器前要加冠词，在各种体育运动前则没有冠词。 please  ‎［误］ My friend pleased me to his birthday party yesterday. ‎［正］ My friend invited me to his birthday party yesterday. ‎［析］ please作为动词时其词义不是请，而是高兴、愿意等意，如： She always does what she pleases. (她总是想做什么就做什么。)又如： It's hard to please all. 而please作为请讲时为语气词，多用于祈使句中，如： Please come in. ‎［误］ Both the teacher and the mother were pleased to the little girl. ‎［正］ Both the teacher and the mother were pleased with the little girl. ‎［析］ 对某人表示满意、喜欢，应用be pleased with somebody. 对某事感到高兴和满意时多用be pleased at或about，但有时也可用with，却不能用of. pleasure  ‎［误］ The boy gave his parents a lot of pleasures. ‎［正］ The boy gave his parents a lot of pleasure. ‎［析］ pleasure作为高兴、愉快、享乐、娱乐 讲时为不可数名词。 ‎［误］ It is pleasure to work with you. ‎［正］ It is a pleasure to work with you. ‎［析］ pleasure作为一件或某件乐事、高兴之事讲时为 可数名词，如： It is one of my pleasures. police  ‎［误］ The police has not found the cause of the accident.‎ ‎［正］ The police have not found the cause of the accident.‎ ‎［析］ police为复数名词，它没有单数形式。如果要讲一个警察 要用a policeman，两个要用two policemen，或a policewoman, two policewomen. prepare  ‎［误］ I'm preparing the exam. ‎［正］ I'm preparing for the exam. ‎［误］ We'll return in time for you to prepare for dinner.‎ ‎［正］ We'll return in time for you to prepare dinner. ‎［析］ prepare既是及物动词，又是不及物动词。作及物动词时 其后面所跟的事物是正在 准备的；而作不及物动词时for后面的事物是目标。如： I'm preparing for the exam. 应 译为我正在为考试做准备。同样的用法还有search与search for. present  ‎［误］ Don't worry. I can present the meeting. ‎［正］ Don't worry. I can be present at the meeting. ‎［析］ present作为出席、在场讲时，是形容词而不应 用作动词。其动词意为 送给;赠给;提出，如： The reporter presented arguments of his idea.‎  put ‎  ‎［误］ She put off her red dress and put on the green one.‎ ‎［正］ She took off her red dress and put on the green on e. ‎［析］ 与put连用的介词很多，一般来讲on与off是一对相反的意 义的介词，如： turn on (打开)，turn off(关上)，穿衣服是put on，但脱衣服却只能用take off,而put o ff是推迟、使某人下车、关掉之意，如： They put off the exam because t he national holiday. (因国家假日而推迟考期。)Could you put me off at the Town Ha ll. (请在市政厅让我下车。)Please put off the wireless before you leave. (走之前 请关掉无线电。) Ｒ  radio ‎  ‎［误］ There are two radioes in the classroom. ‎［正］ There are two radios in the classroom. ‎［误］ I heard the weather report through the radio. ‎［正］ I heard the weather report on the radio. ‎［析］ 在收音机中听到某事应为hear something on the ra dio，听收音机应为l isten to the radio. 这样的用法还有电视，看电视为watch TV，讲在电视上看见什 么节目为watch…on TV，如： I'm watching the football match on TV. 但注意，作为 一种通信手段时应为by radio, 如： Police are talking to each other by radio. rain  ‎［误］ There is a small rain falling. ‎［正］ There is a light rain falling. ‎［误］ There is a big rain. ‎［正］ There is a heavy rain. ‎［析］ 大雨在英文中应为a heavy rain, rain cats and do gs 为倾盆大雨，小雨 为a light rain. 千万不要讲a big rain 或a small rain. 当作动词讲时，雨下得很 大可译为： It rains very much now/hard now/heavily now. reach ‎  ‎［误］ We reached to the town very late. ‎［正］ We reached the town very late. ‎［析］ reach作为到达讲是及物动词，而arrive为不及物动 词。但要注意reach的词组 搭配，如reach for， 为伸手去拿，如： The thief reached for the gun. reach ou t伸出手，如： He reached out and took an interesting book. ready  ‎［误］ You must ready at once. ‎［正］ You must be ready at once. ‎［析］ ready为形容词，而不像中文中准备为动词。 remember ‎  ‎［误］ I didn't remember closing the door, so the thief c ame into the room directly. ‎［正］ I didn't remember to close the door, so the thief came into the room directly. ‎［析］ remember其后接动名词，动名词所表示的动作已经做完， 如： I don't remember meeting you. 其后如接不定式，不定式表达的动作还没有去做，如： Do remember to tur n off the light before you leave. rest  ‎［误］ The rest of the students is girls. ‎［正］ The rest of the students are girls. ‎［析］ rest作剩余部分讲时，the rest of…结构作主语时 其谓语动词应与of后面的名词的数保持一致。这种用法还有1/3 of, 80% of等。 ‎［误］ The rest of the work are done. ‎［正］ The rest of the work is done. return  ‎［误］ My friends returned back to their second home town . ‎［正］ My friends returned to their second home town. ‎［析］ return即为返回，所以back是多余的。这句话还可以 表述为： My friends went back to their second home town. rice ‎  ‎［误］ We had a few rice and some bread. ‎［正］ We had a little rice and some bread. ‎［析］ rice为物质名词，为不可数名词。 rice ‎  ‎［误］ We had a few rice and some bread. ‎［正］ We had a little rice and some bread. ‎［析］ rice为物质名词，为不可数名词。 rich  ‎［误］ The country is rich of oil. ‎［正］ The country is rich in oil. ‎［析］ be rich in 为盛产……。 ‎［误］ The rich is not always happy. ‎［正］ The rich are not always happy. ‎［析］ 形容词加定冠词表示一类人，作主语时要作复数看待。 ‎［误］ All his riches is no good to him if he is so ill.‎ ‎［正］ All his riches are no good to him if he is so ill.‎ ‎［析］ riches为财富，是复数名词，没有单数形式。像这 样的词还有goods(货物)，greens(青菜)，manners(礼貌)等。 river ‎ ‎［误］ We like swimming on the river. ‎［正］ We like swimming in the river. ‎［误］ We like boating in the river. ‎［正］ We like boating on the river. ‎［析］ 游泳用in the river，而在湖中划船要用on the river.‎ room ‎［误］ There are already three people sitting on the sofa , please try to make a room for her. ‎［正］ There are already three people sitting on the sofa , please try to make room for her. ‎［析］ room作为空间讲时为不可数名词。leave room for… 为给某人留点空地； make room for…为让位给某人，如： The young man made room for an old woman.‎  run ‎  ‎［误］ I ran across with an old friend at the school gate . ‎［正］ I ran across an old friend at the school gate. ‎［析］ run across 为偶然相遇。 ‎［误］ The truck ran across the cat. ‎［正］ The truck ran over the cat. ‎［析］ run over为从……上辗过。 ‎［误］ Yesterday I ran to a storm on my way home. ‎［正］ Yesterday I ran into a storm on my way home. ‎［析］ run into为撞上或撞在……上。 Ｓ  safe ‎ ‎［误］ The brave man safed the boy from drowning. ‎［正］ The brave man saved the boy from drowning. ‎［析］ safe是形容词，如： They wished him a safe journey. safely是副词，如： The young man drives his car safely. 而safety是名词，如： safety island(安全岛)，Safety first!(安全第一!)但save是动词。‎ same  ‎［误］ Yesterday I got a postcard. It is the same that you got the day before yesterday. ‎［正］ Yesterday I got a postcard. It is the same as you got the day before yesterday. ‎［析］ the same that意为"即是"，而the same as才能译为"像……一样的。" ‎［误］ Your book is not same as mine. ‎［正］ Your book is not the same as mine. ‎［析］ the same as中的定冠词不能少。‎ say  ‎［误］ His report wrote she is nineteen. ‎［正］ His report says she is nineteen. ‎［析］ 中文中常讲"报告上写到"、"信上写到"，这样的"写"在英文中要用say. say speak talk tell ‎  英文中"说"一般有四个词，其中say和tell为及物动词。tell可以加双宾语，如Please tell me a story. 而speak与talk为不及物动词。speak只有后面直接加"语言"时才是及物的，如： Please speak English. 请看下句： He went on talking for a long time, but he spoke so fast that few of us could catch what he said. sea  ‎［误］ As a boy his great ambition(抱负) was to go to the sea. ‎［正］ As a boy his great ambition was to go to sea. ‎［析］ go to sea为"去当水手、海员"；而go to the sea=go to the seaside, 如： He want to go to the sea for his vacation. 在"海中"游泳为in the sea; at sea为在"海上航行"，如： I have a brother at sea. by sea为"坐船"、"由海路运输"，如： We travelled to New York by sea. second  ‎［误］ I want to learn the second foreign language. ‎［正］ I want to learn a second foreign language. ‎［析］ 当作为"第二"外语，"再增加一个"时，不要用the second而要用a second. the second强调排队的次序，a second强调再增加一个。 see  ‎ ‎［误］ He was seen leave the room. ‎［正］ He was seen to leave the room. ‎［析］ see作主动态时用作to see somebody do something, 而用作被动态时则是somebody to be seen to do something. 要注意惯用法let me see(让我想想)。 sheep  ‎［误］ There are five sheeps on the grass. ‎［正］ There are five sheep on the grass. ‎［析］ sheep是单、复数同形名词，其他的还有： deer(鹿)，fish(鱼)等。 ship  ‎［误］ I travelled on a yacht. ‎［正］ I travelled on a ship (in a yacht). ‎［析］ 虽然都是船，但游艇(yacht)要用in, 而ship要用on. sick  ‎［误］ The little boy was a ill boy. ‎［正］ The little boy was a sick boy. ‎［析］ sick与ill作表语时都表示"有病"之意，如： He feels ill. 或He feels sick. 都对，但作定语时则只能用sick. since  ‎［误］ He is living in Greece since 1978. ‎［正］ He has lived in Greece since 1978. ‎［正］ He has been living in Greece since 1978. ‎［析］ ‎ 由since引出的状语从句意为"自从"某时一直如何，主句要用完成时或完成进行时。  ‎［误］ She has been quite different since came back from America. ‎［正］ She has been quite different since coming back from America. ‎［析］ 分词短语可以用在after, before, since等介词后面。 sleep  ‎［误］ The boy was very asleep. ‎［正］ The boy was fast asleep. ‎［析］ 熟睡在英文中为fast asleep. 非正式英语中一般不常用He's sleeping. 而常讲He's asleep. 其形容词sleepy是"困倦的"，如： I shall go to bed now. I'm so sleepy. "卧铺"英国人讲sleeping car，而美国人讲sleeper. slow  ‎［误］ Slow the door opened. ‎［正］ Slowly the door opened. ‎［析］ slow与slowly的用法与意思相同，在口语中和路标中多用slow，如： Tell him to drive slower. Slow, dangerous bend. 但是如果用在动词前还是要用slowly. smile  ‎［误］ She smiled to me. ‎［正］ She smiled at me. ‎［析］ "冲着某人笑"应为to smile at somebody. so  ‎［误］ It is such beautiful a book that every child likes it. ‎［正］ It is such a beautiful book that every child likes it. ‎［正］ It is so beautiful a book that every child likes it. ‎［析］ 关于so与such用法的区别有四种情况： ① 用于单数可数名词之前，其格式为"such+不定冠词+形容词+名词"，而"so+形容词+不定冠词"。② 用于可数名词复数或不可数名词前，只能用 such，如： It is such good weather that we want to go for a walk. They are such good students that they can pass the exam easily. ③ 在只有形容词时只能用so，如： It is so good that I like it very much.④ 在many, much, few, little这四个词前只能用so而不能用such。如： I have so little money that I can't buy the dictionary. ‎［误］ He got up early so as he could catch the first bus. ‎［正］ He got up early so as to catch the first bus. ‎［正］ He got up early so that he could catch the first bus. ‎［正］ He got up so early that he could catch the first bus. some ‎  ‎［误］ Do you have some lessone to prepare? ‎［正］ Do you have any lessons to prepare? ‎［析］ 在疑问句或否定句中要用any; some多用在肯定句中，如： I have some money to buy it. 在请求，或真心希望得到肯定答复时，在疑问句中也要用some，如： Would you like something to drink?即真心实意希望为对方提供饮料。又如： Could you lend me some money?即真心想要借到钱。 sometime  ‎［误］ I have sometime thought that I should like to live in the country. ‎［正］ I have sometimes thought that I should like to live in the country. sometime sometimes some times sometime  sometime为"某个时候"、"总有一天"，如： We'll meet again sometime next year. 或过去的"某一时刻"，如： I saw her sometime in July. sometimes为"有时候"、"时常"、"常常"，如： Every man is a fool sometimes, and none at all times. Some times为"若干次"，如： I visited America some times. May be five or seven times. I am not sure. Some time则是"一段时间"、"一些时候"，如： I want to leave some time. soon  ‎［误］ The room as soon as became crowded. ‎［正］ The room soon became crowded. ‎［析］ soon为"不久"、"很快"，如： I'll be there very soon. 而as soon as意为"一……就……"，如： As soon as I finished my homework I went out to play football. sound  ‎［误］ The report sounds well. ‎［正］ The report sounds good. ‎［析］ sound作动词时其后接形容词而不接副词，如： How sweet the music sounds! sport  ‎［误］ Are you going to run in the school sprot? ‎［正］ Are you going to run in the school sprots? ‎［析］ sport用作可数名词单数时指具体的某项运动，如： Basketball is an indoor sport. 而在泛指"运动"或"运动会"时要用其复数形式sports. spring  ‎［误］ I'll visit America in this spring. ‎［正］ I'll visit America in spring. ‎［正］ I'll visit America this spring. ‎［析］ 英语一年四季前如果有that, this, last, next等词，则其前面不要再加介词。这样的用法还有周、月、年等。请看下面句子中的用法有何不同： He told me that she did it on the next day. 这时是指过去某一天的第二天，所以才有这种用法。如果以现在为时间基点的第二天应为I'll do it next day. start  ‎［误］ What time will you start to San Francisco? ‎［正］ What time will you start for San Francisco? ‎［析］ start与leave一样，其后接"for+目的地"。 begin start  begin与start在很多场合下是一样的意思，如： We started/began to study English two years ago. 但在如下场合则不能用begin: ① 作为"启程"讲，如： I think we ought to start at six. ② 表示"开始工作"，如： The car won't start. (车子发动不起来。) ③ 作为"开动"、"启动"讲，如： Do you know how to start this machine. still  ‎［误］ Oh, it is still raining now. ‎［正］ Oh, it is still raining. ‎［析］ 因still即包含有现在仍然如何，所以now是多余词。 still yet already  still一般与动词连用，可放于句子中间用以说明过去开始的动作现在仍然在继续，特别用来表示我们希望它早点停止。如： I've been thinking for hours, but I still can't decide. yet一般放于句末，用在疑问句与否定句中。如： Has the postman come yet? already则与动词连用，可放于句中表示某事的发生比预期的要早，如： I've already finished my homework. stop  ‎［误］ When the teacher came into the classroom the students stopped to talk. ‎［正］ When the teacher came into the classroom the students stopped talking. ‎［析］ stop to do something是"停下来去做某事"，而stop doing something是"停止做某事"。 street  ‎［误］ There is a narrow winding street from our village to the next one. ‎［正］ There is a narrow winding road from our village to the next one. ‎［析］ street一般指城市中两旁有建筑物的"街道"，而road多指乡间的"路"。 strict  ‎［误］ You ought to be strict to him. ‎［正］ You ought to be strict with him. ‎［析］ be strict with是"对……严格的"。 such  ‎［误］ Do you want to have such a dictionary? ‎［正］ Do you want to have such a good dictionary? ‎［正］ Do you want to have a dictionary like that? ‎［析］ such作加强语气时一般是"such+(冠词)形容词+名词"，如： It's such a good book. 但如果名词前没有形容词则要看其名词是否具有"能显示程度的含意"，如： I've got such a headache. You are such fools!否则在such与名词之间一定要有形容词。 sure  ‎［误］ I am quite sure for that answer. ‎［正］ I am quite sure of that answer. ‎［析］ sure用于句中表示"对……事有确实把握"时应跟of或about，而不跟for，如： I'm sure about (of) his ability to control this machine. sweet  ‎［误］ Honey tastes sweetly. ‎［正］ Honey tastes sweet. ‎［析］ sweet可以作为名词，意为"糖果"，是可数名词，如： May I have a sweet?作形容词，如： The child looked very sweet. 而sweetly为副词，意为"甜美地"、"悦耳地"。要注意taste为感观动词，其后面要接形容词而不是副词。 Ｔ take  ‎［误］ This year I want to take the driver's license. ‎［正］ This year I want to get the driver's license. ‎［析］ take可以作为动词，意为"拿"、"取"，如： I want to take my mail. 而要获得某种证书、证明，要用get而不用take， take在学校范围内意为"参加"或"选修"某些课程，如： This term I want to take both French and Spanish. ‎［误］ The accident was taken place at the street corner. ‎［正］ The accident took place at the street corner. ‎［析］ take place与happen一样作为"发生"讲时没有被动语态。 ‎［误］ Do you take me as a fool? ‎［正］ Do you take me for a fool? ‎［析］ take…for…意为"以为是……"、"错当作……"、"误认为"，而这一意思还可以用于I took you to be the best friend. (我把你认作是最好的朋友。) ‎［误］ My English teacher was ill. Who will take place her? ‎［正］ My English teacher was ill. Who will take the place of her? ‎［析］ take the place of…意为"取代"。 talk  ‎［误］ Yesterday I met an old friend. We talked many things. ‎［正］ Yesterday I met an old friend. We taked about many things. ‎［析］ talk是不及物动词。 team  ［误］ Our team likes seeing film. ‎［正］ Our team like seeing film. ‎［析］ team与family，class等词一样，指整体时为单数名词。如： Our team is excellent, 而指集体中的个体时要用作复数。 than  ‎［误］ They made fewer mistakes this term than they made last lerm. ‎［正］ They made fewer mistakes this term than they did last lerm. ‎［析］ 当一个动作在同一个句子中重复时，第二次要用do来代替，以避免重复。 ‎［误］ You make me do more then anybody I know. ‎［正］ You make me do more than anybody I know. ‎［误］ I got into the restroom than someone knocked at the door. ‎［正］ I got into the rest room then someone knocked at the door. ‎［析］ than与then不要误用。 then  ‎［误］ We went to the cinema, then went to a Chinese restaurant. ‎［正］ We went to the cinema, and then went to a Chinese restaurant. ‎［正］ We went to the cinema; then went to a Chinese restaurant. ‎［析］ then作"然后"讲时，在then前应加分号而不用逗号，或加逗号用and then，但是如果是倒装句则要用逗号，如： First come Tom, then Mary. think  ‎［误］ I think you are not right. ‎［正］ I don't think you are right. ‎［析］ think在肯定句中与中文的习惯用法是一致的，如： I think you are right. 但在宾语从句是否定意思时，要否定think，如： I don't think you are right. ‎［误］ I think he will come here, do I? ‎［正］ I think he will come here, wont he? ‎［析］ think加宾语从句时，反意疑问句的主语应用宾语从句中的主语，助动词要用宾语从句中的助动词，而肯定还是否定要看主句中的情况决定：如主句用肯定句，则反意疑问句用否定句，反之亦然。 ‎［误］ People think very high of his work. ‎［正］ People think very highly of his work. ‎［析］ think highly of为"对某人某事评价很高"。 ‎［误］ When we talk about Chinese people we always think the Yellow River. ‎［正］ When we talk about Chinese people we always think about the Yellow River. ‎［析］ think about意为"想起"、"想到"。 thousand  ‎［误］ He got thousand of books from a secondhandbook shop. ‎［正］ He got thousands of books from a secondhandbook shop. ‎［析］ 虽然two thousand, three thousand在thousand后都不加s，但thousands of则为"数千"，该结构中一定要加s。 through  ‎［误］ I had a long distance call with John throught the telephone. ‎［正］ I had a long distance call with John on the telephone. ‎［误］ It took us two hours to walk across the forest. ‎［正］ It took us two hours to walk through the forest. ‎［析］ across是表示在一平面上进行的动作，而through则是用在三维空间的动作。如： The river was frozen, so we could walk across it. I pushed through the crowds to the entrance. throw  ‎［误］ He threw a stone to me. ‎［正］ He threw a stone at me. ‎［析］ "扔"这个词表示方向时要注意他向我扔石头是at me，我向他扔石头则为to him，但throw at还有寻衅之意，如： Stop throwing stones at the cars. 这时不要误用to. time  ‎［误］ The doctor came on time so she was saved. ‎［正］ The doctor came in time so she was saved. ‎［析］ in time为"及时赶到"，如： Do you think we can get there in time for the first act. 而on time 意为"准时"，如： The train arrived on time. ‎［误］ It is time we go home. ‎［正］ It is time we should go home. ‎［正］ It is time we went home. ‎［析］ "是该作某事的时候了"，其句形为： ① It is time for somebody to do something. ② "It is time+从句"，从句中用"should+动词原形"，或直接用动词的过去式。 ‎［误］ Let's hurry. We haven't many times. ‎［正］ Let's hurry. We haven't much time. ‎［误］ I have been to America two times. ‎［正］ I have been to America twice. ‎［析］ time作为"时间"讲时为不可数名词，而作为"次"讲时则是可数名词。但"一次"不是one time，而是once；"二次"不是two times，而是twice；"三次"则是three times. too  ‎［误］ This box is too heavy to lift it. ‎［正］ This box is too heavy to lift. ‎［析］ 在too…to这一结构中，如果主语和不定式的宾语是一致的，则不要重复。 ‎［误］ The child is too young not to go to school. ‎［正］ The child is too young to go to school. ‎［析］ too…to这一结构用来表示"太……以致于不能……"，但下面的句子则不能照此翻译： I'm too glad to meet you. 应译为"我见到你真太高兴了"。 ‎［误］ There is much too noise. ‎［正］ There is too much noise. ‎［析］ "much too+形容词"，而"too much+不可数名词"。 ‎［误］ You have bought too much tomatoes. ‎［正］ You have bought too many tomatoes. ‎［析］ too many后才加可数名词。 also as well too  这三个词是近义词，但其用法各有不同。其一，too和as well通常用于句末，如： She went to the cinema and her brother went too. 而also则不用于句末，如： I've also read her other novels. 其二，这三个词都不用于否定句中，否定句中用not…either，或neither/nor…,如： He isn't here either. trousers  ‎［误］ My trouser is getting smaller and smaller. ‎［正］ My trousers are getting smaller and smaller. ‎［析］ 英语中trousers, pants, shorts(短裤)，glasses(眼镜)都要用复数形式。 ‎［误］ This pair of glasses are very good. ‎［正］ This pair of glasses is very good. ‎［析］ 有了量词a pair of，其后的谓语动词要与量词相一致。如： two pairs of…的谓语动词就要用复数。 try  ‎［误］ I tried to send her flowers but it didn't have any effect. ‎［正］ I tried sending her flowers but it didn't have any effect. (我试着给她送花，但没有什么结果。) ‎［误］ Please try understanding it. ‎［正］ Please try to understand it. ‎［析］ "try+动名词"的意思是"试一试"，或"做某事看看会发生什么情况"，而"try+不定式"表示为达到目的要去做的事。 Ｕ  under  ‎［误］ The lake is two meters under sea level. ‎［正］ The lake is two meters below sea level. ‎［析］ under的意思是在某物的下面，而below＝lower than, 即"低于"。 ‎［误］ Under the help of our teacher, all of us passed the exam. ‎［正］ With the help of our teacher, all of us passed the exam. understand  ‎［误］ I think it is diffcult to make myself to understand. ‎［正］ I think it is diffcult to make myself understood. ‎［析］ 这句话的意思是"我想让别人理解我太难了"。 ‎［误］ I am understanding the lesson now. ‎［正］ I understand the lesson now. ‎［析］ understand一词没有进行时态。类似的词还有belong, find, hear, love, like等。 until  ‎［误］ We walked until the edge of the forest. ‎［正］ We walked as far as the edge of the forest. ‎［误］ Our school bus can hold until twenty children. ‎［正］ Our school bus can hold up to twenty children. ‎［析］ until与till两词的意思一样，但两个词都只能用于时间，如： I'll wait until I hear from you. ‎［误］ I waited for my mother to seven o'clock, but she didn't come. ‎［正］ I waited for my mother until seven o'clock, but she didn't come.‎ ‎［误］ Can you return this book until Monday? ‎［正］ Can you return this book by Monday? ‎［析］ 当我们谈目前正在进行而将来某一时刻才停止的事件时用until，而用by来表达将来某一时刻会发生的动作。 ‎［误］ We arrived home until it became dark. ‎［正］ We didn't arrived home until it became dark. ‎［析］ until用于肯定句时表示"某动作直到……为止"，如： They worked until 5∶00 P. M. 用于否定句中时意为"直到……才"。所以用于肯定句中要使用延续性动词，但截止性动词却可以用在否定句中。 upstairs  ‎［误］ He went to upstairs. ‎［正］ He went upstairs. ‎［析］ upstairs一词可用作副词，如： We all hurried upstairs to see what happened. 也可用作名词，如； The upstairs of the house needs painting. 同时也可以用作形容词，如： A house with three upstairs rooms is quite good. use  ‎［误］ It is no use to ask her. ‎［正］ It is no use asking her. ‎［析］ It is no use…与There is no use…后通常用动名词，而不用不定式。 ‎［误］ I'll get used to treat the students this way. ‎［正］ I'll get used to treating the students this way. ‎［析］ be used to与get used to后要接动名词表示"习惯于"做某事。 ‎［误］ I used to getting up early in the morning. ‎［正］ I used to get up early in the morning. ‎［析］ used to表示过去习惯的动作，其后要加动词原形。 ‎［误］ Oil was used to cooking. ‎［正］ Oil was used to cook. ‎［析］ 这里的句型虽然也是be used to但这里不是主动态，而是被动态，所以不能接动名词而应接不定式。 ‎［误］ We used to go to the Great Wall three times. ‎［正］ We went to the Great Wall three times. ‎［析］ used to只能用来表示一种习惯，而不能用来表达某事发生的次数。 ‎ ‎ Ｖ  very  ‎［误］ Thank you indeed. ‎［正］ Thank you very much indeed. ‎［析］ indeed用来修饰very much, 但要放其后面，而且也不要单独使用。 ‎［误］ The baby was very asleep. ‎［正］ The baby was fast asleep. ‎［析］ 不是所有的形容词都可以用very来修饰，如： I'm wide awake. (我全醒了。)再如： all alone(十分孤独)，much afraid等。 ‎［误］ The thing seems to be very improved. ‎［正］ The thing seems to be much improved. ‎［析］ 有些语法书讲very修饰现在分词，而much修饰过去分词，这要分别对待。如果过去分词是指一个具体的动作，而且是句中主要动词的一部分就必须用much，而某些形容词化的过去分词，还是要用very来修饰的，如： I am very tired. ‎［误］ There is very less water in the river than usual. ‎［正］ There is much/far less water in the river than usual. ‎［析］ very不能修饰形容词或副词的比较级，而要用far, much等来修饰。 ‎ ‎ Ｗ wait  ‎［误］ Tomorrow I will wait you at the bus stop. ‎［正］ Tomorrow I will wait for you at the bus stop. ‎［析］ wait是不及物动词，"等人"要用wait for somebody；而wait up为"不睡觉等候某事"，如： I'll wait up tonight. walk  ‎［误］ I think she went a walk yesterday. ‎［正］ I think she went out for a walk yesterday. ‎［析］ 散步在英文中要讲have a walk, take a walk.如果用go要用go for a walk. want  ‎［误］ The flowers want to water. ‎［正］ The flowers want watering. ‎［析］ want在这里作为"需要"讲，其后加动名词。这句话的意思是"这花需要浇水。" ‎［误］ Do you want someone go along with you? ‎［正］ Do you want someone to go along with you? ‎［析］ want somebody to do something为一固定用法。 wash  ‎［误］ Are you going to mak washing this weekend? ‎［正］ Are you going to do washing this weekend? ‎［析］ do washing为"洗衣服"，是固定搭配。 watch  ‎［误］ Your watch is what time? ‎［正］ What time is it by your watch? ‎［析］ 一定要记住英文的习惯用法。 ‎［误］ The mother want to watch the children to play on the grass. ‎［正］ The mother want to watch the children play (playing) on the grass. ‎［析］ watch的用法同see, hear等词。 way  ‎［误］ Please move the chair, it is on the way. ‎［正］ Please move the chair, it is in the way. ‎［析］ in the way 为"挡道"，而on the way为"在路上"，如： on my way home (在回家路上)，on his way to the station(在他去火车站的路上)。而by the way是"顺便说"，如： By the way, have you heard from Joan recently? ‎［误］ The students were on their way to home. ‎［正］ The students were on their way home. ‎［析］ home在这里为副词。 wear  ‎［误］ The little girl is old enough to wear herself. ‎［正］ The little girl is old enough to dress herself. ‎［析］ wear后接衣物而不接反身代词。 what  ‎［误］ I want to know what to do it? ‎［正］ I want to know what to do? ［误］ I want to know how to do? ‎［正］ I want to know how to do it? ‎［析］ what是疑问代词，而how是疑问副词。要注意它们用法的不同。 when  ‎［误］ I'd cook you nice meal when you'd come home in the evening. ‎［正］ I'd cook you nice meal when you came home in the evening. ‎［析］ 在when引导的状语从句中，要用一般时表示将来，即主句中是将来时，从句中应用一般现在时，如主句中是过去将来时，从句中应用一般过去时。如： I'll be back when you come back from school. ‎［误］ When in the second grade, his mother bought him a bike. ‎［正］ When Tom was in the second grade, his mother bought him a bike. ‎［析］ 复合句中只有当主句的主语与从句的主语一致的情况下，才有可能省略，如： When young he had to work all day. ‎［误］ We'll go to the park when it doesn't rain tomorrow.  ‎［正］ We'll go to the park if it doesn't rain tomorrow. ‎［析］ if用来表示不能肯定的事如果发生会如何；而when用来表示肯定会发生或很可能会发生的事情，如： I'll see you in September when I come back. ［误］ I don't know when he comes home tomorrow. ‎［正］ I don't know when he will come home tomorrow. ‎［析］ when所引出的宾语从句如果是表示将来的动作要用将来时，而不是像时间状语从句中用一般时表示将来。 ‎ where  ‎［误］ I don't know where to go to. ‎［正］ I don't know where to go. ‎［析］ where是疑问副词。 whether  ‎［误］ It is unknown if he will come. ‎［正］ It is unknown whether he will come. ‎［析］ if不能引导主语从句。上句中it是形式主语，其后的从句才是真正的主语从句。要注意以下各种情况不宜用if而要用whether:  ‎① I didn't know whether you'll go or not. (因句中有or not选项。) ‎② He didn't know whether to visit the old man. (因用于不定式前。) ‎③ I'm interested in whether he'll go. (因作介词的宾语从句。) ‎④ I want to know the news whether our team will win. (同位语从句。) ‎⑤ Let me know whether you can come. (此句如用if则含意有所不同，其意就变为"如果你能来请通知我"。而用whether则意为"让我知道你是否能来"。) who  ‎［误］ Whom do you think would like to come for a game of football? ‎［正］ Who do you think would like to come for a game of football? ‎［析］ 在这个句式中"do you think"应看作插入语，所以原句应为Who would like to come for a game of football? ‎［误］ From who was the gift? ‎［正］ From whom was the gift? ‎［正］ Who was that gift from? ‎［析］ 在句首时现代英语常用who取代whom，而在紧跟介词时则不能用who来取代whom. why  ‎［误］ Why not to go to the park? ‎［正］ Why not go to the park? ‎［析］ why not后面接不带to的不定式，也可以用why don't you go with her? win  ‎［误］ We have won your class. ‎［正］ We have beaten your class. ‎［析］ win 是及物动词，其后的宾语应是比赛、战争、奖品、奖金，如： Which team won the football match?而beat是指"打败"对手、敌人，如： My brother beat me at poker. (请注意，beat是不规则动词，其过去式与原形相同，而过去分词为beaten. ) wish  ‎［误］ I hope you to be a good student. ‎［正］ I wish you to be a good student. ‎［析］ hope不能加宾语再加宾语补足语，而wish则可以，如： I wish you luck. (我祝你走运。) without  ‎［误］ I can't do this work well without you help me. ‎［正］ I can't do this work well without your help. ‎［析］ without其后接动名词或名词而不接从句。 work  ‎［误］ This girl is looking for a work at the bank. ‎［正］ This girl is looking for a job at the bank. ‎［析］ "找工作"一般应为to find a job，而works作为"工作"讲为不可数名词，不能加不定冠词，也不可用复数。当work作为"作品"、"著作"讲时，为可数名词，如： This painting is one of his great works. 而works作为"工厂"讲时单复数形式相同，如：an iron works或two iron works. 作主语时其谓语动词可用单数，如： The steel works is closed for the holidays. write  ‎［误］ You may write with ink. ‎［正］ You may write in ink. ‎［正］ You may write with a pen. ‎［析］ "用……写"这一表达法要看用的是什么： 如果用钢笔则应用with, 如： Please fill in this form with a pen. 但讲用墨水时则要用in. Ｙ yesterday  ‎［误］ I came across my old friend yesterday night. ‎［正］ I came across my old friend last night. ‎［析］ "昨晚"应译为last night.‎